GE Fanuc Automation

Computer Numerical Control Products

FAPT LADDER - II
Operators Manual
B- 66184EN/02 April 1998

Warnings and notices for this publication

Warning

GFLE-003

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible.

Notice
This document is based on information available at the time of its publication. While efforts have been made to be accurate, the information contained herein does not purport to cover all details or variations in hardware or software, nor to provide every contingency in connection with installation, operation, or maintenance. Features may be described herein which are not present in all hardware and software systems. GE Fanuc Automation assumes no obligation of notice to holders of this document with respect to changes subsequently made. GE Fanuc Automation makes no representation or warranty, expressed, implied, or statutory with respect to, and assumes no responsibility for accuracy, completeness, sufficiency, or usefulness of the information contained herein. No warranties of merchantability or fitness for purpose shall apply. The following are Registered Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation CIMPLICITY Genius

The following are Trademarks of GE Fanuc Automation Alarm Master CIMSTAR Field Control Genet Helpmate LogicMaster Modelmaster PowerMotion ProLoop PROMACRO Series Five Series 90 Series One Series Six Series Three VuMaster Workmaster

Copyright 1998 FANUC Ltd. Authorized Reproduction GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A.
All Rights Reserved No part of this manual may be reproduced in any form. All specifications and designs are subject to change without notice.

[Notice] 1. The FAPT LADDER-II software is copyrighted by FANUC Ltd. 2. No part of the software or this manual may be used or reproduced in any form without the prior consent of FANUC Ltd. 3. The software shall be installed on no more than one computer at a time. Separate software packages must be purchased for each additional installation. 4. The information in this manual is subject to change without notice.

[Trademarks] 1. MS-DOS is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation. 2. PC/AT and PS/2 are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. 3. PR2OlH is a registered trademark of NEC Corporation. 4. VP1000 is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

In this manual we have tried as much as possible to describe all the various matters. However, we cannot describe all the matters which must not be done, or which cannot be done, because there are so many possibilities. Therefore, matters which are not especially described as possible in this manual should be regarded as impossible.

CONTENTS

1.

GENERAL 1.1 1.2

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . .

. . .

OVERVIEW THE MAJOR 1.2.1 1.2.2 1.2.3

. . .

. . . . . . . .

. .. . . . . . . .. . . . . . . . . .
Program

. . . . . . .. . . . . .

FUNCTIONS

. . . .

The Overview PMC Models The Procedure

of PMC Function to be Supported

to Make a Sequence

1.3

ABOUT 1.3.1 1.3.2

PMC PROGRAM PMC Programming About Symbol

. . . . .
Method Data

. . . . . .

. .

& Comment

2.

OPERATING 2.1 CONFIG.

ENVIRONMENT SYS

. . .

. .

3.

THE CONTENTS 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4

OF PACAGE

AND INST ALLATlON

. . . .

. . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . .

. . .

13 13 13 14

THE CONTENTS INSTALLATION DIRECTORY

OF PACAGE

.................
AFTER INSTALLATION

............................
CONFIGURATION

. . . . . . .

FILE CONFIGURATION 3.4.1 3.4.2 File System The Constitution

....................... .........................
of Source Program

14 14

........ .

. . .. . .

. . .

. . . .

16

4.

OPERATION 4.1 4.2

.......................... ... _ ................ . _ _ ....... . _ _ ........ ...... , .. ............. ............. .............

(Selected Program) OF OPERATIONS

17 17

ACTIVATION GENERAL 4.2.1

. . .

. .. . . . .

20 20 22 25 25

Menu Configuration SYSTEM

4.3 4.4

COMMON

OPERATIONS

INITIAL MENU 4.4.1 4.4.2 4.4.3 4.4.4 4.4.5 4.4.6 Program Off-Line On-Line On-Line Utility

..................
Selection Function Functron Function

. .. . . . . . .

. . . . . ,. . .. . . . . .. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

26 27 27 27

...................... ... ............ ................

Termination FUNCTION

27 28 28 28

4.5

OFF-LINE 4.5.1 4.5.2

.............................. Editing

.......................... ...............
sequence ediling edrting diagram/step & comment edrlrng editing

4.5.2.1 4.5.2.2 4.5.2.3 4.5.2.4 4.5.2.5 4.5.2.6

Title data editing Ladder Symbol Message I10 module System

30 32 87 92

........ .... ..... _ ..

............... .........
editing

94 97

parameter

4.53 453.1

Printout

................................................
........................................... and ending item setting printing

101 101 102 103 111

Overview Starting Output

4.5.3.2 4.5.3.3 4.5.3.4 4.5.3.5

.............................. ............................
file)

....................................
menu format-2

Print format-l: Changing (AMOFTRP, printer

SETUP output

DAT/

.INF/message specification

.......................

112 123 124 125 128 129 131 132 133 136 137 138 138 140 142

4.5.3.6 4.5.4

Changing

the printer

..........................

Compilation

............................................. .................................... ...................................... ..................................

options

4.5.4.1 4.5.4.2 4.5.4.3 4.5.5

Start and terminate Compile Password

set function

Decompilation Operation Decompile Password Outputting

............................................
........................................... option

4.5.5.1 455.2 4.5.5.3 4.5.5.4 4.5.6

...................................... ...................................

........................................... to split files

Input/Output

............................................. .......................................
FA writer) (PMC writer,

4.5.6.1 4.5.6.2 4.5.6.3 4.5.6.4 4.5.6.5 4.5.6.6 4.5.7

I/O port setting ROM writers Transfer Memory Handy Backup

........................ . .

to and from PMC card interface file + 3.5 floppy

...............................
computer format) and memory card

in the personal disk (MS-DOS

144 150 153 155 155 157

.................

of user program Options

.................................

Setting

Program

....................................

4.5.7.1 4.5.7.2 4.5.7.3 4.5.8

Compiler Decompiler Modifying

............................................ .......................................... program option initial values (OPTION.CNF)

........... ............. .............

158 159

Mnemonic

Editing

.........................................
of a source program to a mnemonic file of a mnemonic file to a source program

4.5.8.1 4.5.8.2 4.5.8.3 4.5.8.4 4.5.8.5 4.5.8.6

Conversion Conversion Mnemonic Sample Sample

159 162 163 166 172

file format

................................... ...................... .........................

is selected

mnemonic mnemonic

files (single-format) files (all-format)

The note if the step sequence when setting a model file execution

function

................................... ................................ ..................

173 174 175

4.5.8.7 4.5.9 4.5.10 4.6 ONLINE 4.6.1 Utyilty

User batch

.................................................
On-Line Function from Off-Line Function

Selecting

180 181

...................................................... The Outline Outline Starting Menus of Online Function

................................ ..............................

181 181 184 191 192 192

4.6.1.1 4.6.1.2 4.6.1.3 4.6.2

............................................. the on-line function

.............................................

Preparation

..............................................
the cable

4.6.2.1

Connecting

...................................

4.6.2.2 4.6.2.3 4.6.2.4 4.6.2.5

Parameter Modifying Starting Starting

screen

for on-line

monitor

..................
function function

.
.

193 194 194

parameters and stopping and stopping

.............................
the on-line the on-line monitor monitor

.........

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .. . . . . .

(Only for Power 4.6.3 Fife

Mate-H)

..........................

195 196 196 198 198 200 201 215 216 218 231 232

............................................. Fitesave Selecting Exit ...................................... off-line function from on-line functron

4.6.3.1 4.6.3.2 4.6.3.3 4.6.4

...........

. . . . . .

.........................................

Diagnose Ladder

.........................................
monitor

4.6.4.1 4.6.4.2 4.6.4.3 4.6.4.4 4.6.4.5 4.6.4.6 4.6.4.7 4.6.5

................................. .............................. ............................. ...............................

a ladder program

PMC Status Signal

window

Status window

PMC Parameter PMC alarm Executing Displaying status

................................. ................

or stopping system

. . . . . . . .

. . . .

information

.......................

. . . a 233
234 234 235 236 238 240 240 252

Input/Output Loading Storing Writing

.......................................
from the PMC to the PMC to F-ROM

4.6.5.1 4.6.5.2 4.6.5.3 4.6.6 4.6.7

............................

. . . .

.............................. ............................... ...............................

program program held by the PMC held by a personal

Communication Examples

.....................................
a ladder a ladder

of Operation

4.6.7.1 4.6.7.2

Monitoring Monitoring

...........
computer

. . ... . . . . . . . .

5.

ERROR 5.1 A:

MESSAGE INITIAL

LIST

..................... ....................... ...................... ..... . .................. . .......... ..... ......

Diagram)

254 255 255 255 256 256 257

MENU

. .

. . .

5.1.1 5.1.2 5.2

Fatal Error Error

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . .

.................... ..........................
EDITING

B : TITLE EDITING 5.2.1 Error

5.3

C : 10 MODULE 5.3.1 5.3.2 Error Warning

..

....................... ........................
EDITING

257 257 258 258 259 259

5.4

D : SYSTEM 5.4-l Error

PARAMETER

......

...................
EDITING

5.5

E : LADDER/STEP 5.5.1 5.5.2 5.5.3 5.5.4 Fatal Error

SEQUENCE

...............
Ladder

Error (at Editing Error (at Editing Warning

...... ...... ....

. .

. .

259 260 262

Step Sequence) Ladder Diagram)

(at Editing

5.6

F : SYMBOL 5.6.1 Error

8, COMMENT

EDITING

.......... . . .

. . . .

263 263 263 263

..........................
EDITING

5.7

G : MESSAGE 5.7.1 Error

................... ....................

....

I.

BASICS
(NORMAL OPERATIONS) .

,,,,,, ,,,

,,

,,,

,,,

1. GENERAL

1.

GENERAL

1.1 Overview
Thank you for purchasing FANUC FAPT LADDER-II.

FAPT LADDER-II This software and supports see Chapter

is a programming to operate

system

for developing

FANUC

PMC sequence computers

programs. running MS-DOS, conditions,

is designed

on IBM PC/AT

and compatible For details

both the Japanese 2.

and English

languages.

of the operating

Personal

computer

Name FAPT LADDER-II

Specification A08B-9201 -J503 Japanese

Remarks and English are

IBM PC/AT and compatible machine

both supported

This manual are specific

explains

procedures designed

required

to install,

activate,

and operate

this software

about

that

to the system

for use with personal PMC sequence

computers. programs, refer to the manuals listed below.

For PMC operations

and how to create

T FANUC Programming

PMC-MODEL manual

PAl/PAB/RAl/RA2/RA3/RB/RB2/RB3/RB4/RBS/RBG/RC/RC3/RC4/NB/NB2 language)

(LADDER

J B-61 863E

Inquiry

form after reading at Appendix this operators 9 to consult manual and the manuals listed above,

If you have any questions use the inquiry

form attached

us the questions.

-l-

1. GENERAL

The following

abbreviations

are used in this manual.

1)

For PMC models

Abbreviations PMC-R Series PMCRA3 FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC

PMC Models

PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL PMC-MODEL

RA3 FIB3 RB4 RB5 RB6 RC3 RC4 PA3 QC NB NB2

. PMCRB3
PMCRB4 PMCRB5 PMC-RB6 PMCRC3

PMCRC4

PMC-PA3 PMC-QC PMC-NB PMC-NB2

2) Others
MS-DOS between and PC-DOS are both referred systems. to simply as DOS, unless it is necessary to distinguish the two operating

-2-

1. GENERAL

1.2 The Major Functions 1.2.1 The overview of PMC function

. . . .. .. .. . . .. . . .. .. . .

FLOPPY CASSETTE /Handy File

L
...)

CNC

(..........

Machine DVDO

Tool

RS-232-C

PMC

RS-232-C

.,.,,.. . ...

functions through RS-232-C (Note 1) Monitorring & debugging a sequence program Run/Stop a sequence program Transferring a sequence program Write to Flash ROM I Setting and display PMC parameters

(INLINE

II::::. EPROM/ ROM MODULE RS-232-C

Personal Floppy disk

computer

Input/Edit sequence program

IBM PC/AT

Hard disk

Fig. 1.2.1

General

of PMC Function

Note 1)

The specification Also, the above

of the above functions may

functions

may vary

from

one

PMC

model

to another. of each

not be usable manual

with some

models.

For details

function,

refer to the PMC programming

for the model

being used.

-3-

,,

,,

1. GENERAL

< Functions

of FAPT LADDER-II Display

> program program PMC status.) Display of cross reference.)

Input, Output, Monitoring (Display (Online Setting

and Edit sequence of sequence PMC alarm, diagram.

and Debugging of signal status,

monitoring and display

of ladder

PMC parameters program program

. . .

Run/Stop Transferring Writting

the sequence of sequence

to Flash ROM program

Print of the sequence

c PMC built-in

functions

> and Edtt sequence of sequence program program ladder diagram, PMC alarm, memory)

Input, Output, Monitoring (Display

Display

and Debugging of signal status,

signal waveforms,

(and crossreference.) (Monitorring Setting of ladder diagram, step sequence. Debugging user C language.)

and display

PMC parameters program

Run/Stop

the sequence

1.2.2

PMC models to be supported

to be supported by FAPT LADDER-II are as below.

PMC models

PMC-RA3 PMCRB3 PMCRB4 PMC-RB5 PMC-RB6 PMCRC3 PMCRC4 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC PMC-NB PMCNB2 (Note (Note (Note (Note (Note (Note (Note 1) 1) 1)
1)

1) 1) 1)

(Note 1)

ONLINE

function

is supported

with this PMC

-4-

1. GENERAL

1.2.3 The procedure to make a sequence

program

Start of control system development + Decrde the control object (machines, t Decide the specifications of control operations Calculate the number of DVOO points Estrmate the control scale CNC)

Create the ladder diagram (desrgnicreate J

addoress mapcoading)

Input, edit, debua and print the sequence procvam

t
FAPT LADDER-II 7

t
CNC (PMC)

Ladder diagram editing Mnemonic editing

. Ladder diagram editing

Compile/Link I

I
fDecompile (1 I I IN0 YES

t
ONLINE

function (for debug)

Pnnt the sequence FAPT LADDER-II

program

fi-----c The off-line function is

supports an off-line function and on-line functions. programming using a personal computer

used for performing (PMC).

that is not connected

to the CNC

The off-lrne function IS equrvalent to the FAPT LADDER for programming function. mainly when a connection and communication

function.

The on-line functions are used with the CNC (PMC). program) computer. is available. about FAPT computers) The latter is used

are established

There are basically two on-line functions: the on-line function and the on-line (selected The former is designed to monitor and edit for use wrth CNC (PMC) internal programs. designed to operate on the system, FAPT LADDER IS not covered refer to the FAPT programs personal

Addrtionally. a PMC programming Thus version of FAPT LADDER operators for personal LADDER

(for personal computers), For informatton (for personal LADDER

by this manual.

computers,

manual (B-661 31).

-5-

1. GENERAL

1.3 About PMC Program 1.3.1 PMC programming method

the sequence control governed by a PMC. Since it has been in use for years, PMC, the larger and the more

The ladder method is most of ten used for programming This method was derived from relay-panel the number of functions many sequence engineers are already fatiiiiar The greater complicated method. To overcome LADDER-II. (1) What is the step sequence programmable a flow chart. method. method ? this problem, step sequence the sequence program becomes. with it.

control circuits. by the

implemented

And it is hard to describe

such program for ladder into FAPT

method programming

has been introduced

The step sequence is one of the method for programming Each block of processing is described

a sequence control governed by a of the control flow on using the ladder and is

controller, this method features the direct representation visualized

as a subprogram,

Therefore it provides an easy-to-understand

flow of the processes

well-suited to the control of entire process. Step sequence method is available to PMC-RB4&lBG/RC4. The programming by step sequence method is supported by FAPT LADDER-II, not but by the builtin editing function on PMC-RB4/RBG/RC4. Setting a model in FAPT LADDER desides witch method, step sequence or ladder, is used. For the details of the step sequence method, refer to the following manual. (4.5.2.2.(3) STEP SEQUENCE EDITING]

-6-

1.

GENERAL

The configuration A sequence

of a sequence

program

program consists of the following 5 kinds of program unit ;

The 1st level of ladder The 2nd level of ladder The 3rd level of ladder Subprograms Subprograms of ladder of step sequence

LEVEL 1 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 2 ( LADDER)

LEVEL 3 ( LADDER)

ISub Program

Pl (Step Sequence)

Sub Program P2 (LADDER)

Sub Program P3 (LADDER)

. .
Sub Program Pn (Step Sequence)

-7-

1. GENERAL

(3)
-

Data flow
FAPT LADDER-II I

Source program Ladder 1st level Mnemonic Mnemonic program

A mnemonic program without step sequence

t Compilation/Decompilation 1 Object code

IMemory
I t

card format file I

------I!
Input/Output
I

Input/Output
I

RS-232-C

Handy File FLOPPY CASSETTE

Memory card ADAPTER

CNC V v V

[PMCI 2) II/O1
1) 3) [HOST]

1) FMCI 2) II01
3) [FDCAS]

1) WC1
2) If/O1 3) [MCARD] (Boot process also can read the memory card)

The operation of soft key when Input/output

-8-

1. GENERAL

1.3.2 About symbol & comment data

On FAPT LADDER-II, you can assign program. & comment data. names or add notes to l/O signals, internal relays, and can

add notes to a sequence They are generally (1) The definition The definition Terms Symbol

calledsymbol of terms

of terms are shown

below

to distinguish and uses

between

some symbol

& comment Display

data.

Definition Name assigned uniquely

I
x0.0 +I---,++ them.

to each relay/coil,

INPUT

to be used in place of PMC address. Relay comment Text assigned to relays/coils to explain

1 COMMENT Coil comment Text assigned to coils to explain them.

COMMENT HERE IS COIL COMMENT

Net comment

Text assigned them.

between

ladder

nets to explain { COMMENT )

(2) Symbol

& comment

specification relay

list

(a) For input signal and internal

I Speciftcation
Available characters

Symbol ASCII characters (lower-case alphabetic characters not allowed)

Relay comment

Coil comment ASCII characters Japanese kanalkanji characters (Note 30 byte 20,000

1ASCII characters Japanese kanalkanji characters

1)

16 byte 20,000 entries (Note 2) Not allowed

16 byte 20,000 (Note 2) Allowerd

(Note Allowerd

2)

Yes, if it is 6 bytes or shorter (Note 3)

No

Yes, if the symbol assigned to the same address is 6 bytes or (Note shoter replaced to blank. computer may

3)

Note 1) Note 2) Note 3)

CRT/MD1 can not display Free area them. When the total size of size of hard

Japanese disk drive,

characters, EMS

and XMS

on personal

restrict

all

coil

comments

exceeds

64

kbytes,

no

symbols

and

comments

are displayed

on CRTIMDI.

-9-

1. GENERAL

(b) For ladder

sequence

program

Specification Available characters

Net comment ASCII characters Japanese Line feed kana/kanji characters

Steps to occupy Maximum characters/line

2 step/Net

comment

64 characters/line 4095 characters/Net comment (Note (Note

1)

Maximum Maximum Display

lines number on CRT/MD1

100 lines/Net About 20,000 No

commennt Net comments

1)

(Note 2)

Note Note

1) 2)

The limitation Number comments. may further

which

is reached in each

first becomes Net comment

the limitation effects

for the Net comment. on maximum number of Net

of characters Free area restrict

size of hard disk drive,

EMS and XMS on personal

computer

them.

-lO-

2.

OPERATING

ENVIRONMENT

2.

OPERATING

ENVIRONMENT
the requirements indicated in the table below must be satisfied.

To use this software,

Computer

IBM PC/AT and compatible 386 or hrgher MS-DOS MS-DOS Version Version

machines

(Note

1)

ICPU

IHard

I-Memory disk 1Graphic adapter This software than 520 Kbytes The size CHKDSK.

OS

5.OAlior later (to activate Japanese system) 5.0 or later (to activate English system) (Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 4)

Conventronal EMS and/or

memory 520 Kbytes or more XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended) or more space

About 3 Mbytes VGA or higher EPSON VP1000

and compatible with MS-KANJI

machines API

(Note 5)

be in conformity

(Note 1)
(Note

does not run on PC98 series of NEC. has 640 Kbytes memory, the empty memory may not be more space. command

2) Even if the machrne

of free

when an installed space

driver, can

for example, be checked

uses a large memory with the MS-DOS

in memory

(Note

3) The quantity
Symbol specially Moreover, steps which or more data

of the and

EMS

and

XMS

memory Please

effects

on the enough

performance EMS and XMS

to handle memory

Net

comment.

prepare

for Symbol

data or Net comment with EMS less

of large number. than 256 Kbytes, the Please maximum prepare number of

at the system FAPT LADDER

can handle

may be ristricted.

256 Kbytes

EMS rf possible.

(Note (Note

4) In addrtion, an area for storing sequence data is required. PRINTERtare also available by changing 5) [NEC PR201HlandlFANUC
For details, refer 1014.5.3.6 Changing the Printer Specification).

system

file.

About

size of EMS and XMS memory memory LADDER are used

to be used : and symbol & XMS, & comment data as an temporary and/or XMS area. memory

EMS and XMS Although, according FAPT

for ladder no EMS

runs with

enough

size of EMS

to the source

program

to handle

will be necessary

for better performance.

(1)

Expansion When

memory ladder programs, uses FAPT LADDER uses EMS When if available. only If EMS is not is

reading FAPT

available, used,

LADDER program

conventional

memory.

conventional

memory
IS

up to 21840

steps

can be created.

When

256KB

EMS memory

available,

however, models,

up to 32000 regardless

program

steps can be created.

The srze of EMS is 256KB

for all PMC

of the size of the program

to be edited.

-ll-

2.

OPERATING

ENVIRONMENT

(2) EMS and XMS memory for Symbol & Comment data
FAPT LADDER When neither uses EMS and/or XMS memory of them are available, large number FAPT lor Symbol LADDER will & Comment make data if available. file on the hard temporary

diskdrive,

and processing

of Symbol

& Comment

data may be slower. 1,000 Symbol data.

About 200 Kbytes

of EMS & XMS memory

are used for every

(3)

EMS and XMS memory for Net comment

FAPT LADDER Comment data. of EMS or XMS memory are used for every 1,000 Net cement. also uses EMS and/or XMS memory, or temporary file as same as Symbol &

About 200 to 300 Kbytes

2.1 CONFIG. SYS

Before file: FAPT LADDER-II can be started, the following lines must be added to the CONFlG.SYS

DEVICE = C:UDOSVANSI.SYS DEVICE = C:VDOSVEMM~~~.EXE DEVICE = C:UDOSVMSIME.SYS DEVICE = C:VDOSVMSIMEK.SYS

(1)

ANSI.SYS (required)
The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. This setting cannot be omitted.

(2)

EMM386.EXE This device another driver enables refer the use of expansion relevant manual memory for as EMS details memory. setting When using in

EMS

driver,

to the

of the

required

CONFIG.SYS.

(3)

MSIME.SYS/MSIMEK.SYS This device using another setting required driver enables the use of MS-KANJI input system, API for Japanese-language manual input. for details When of the

Japanese

language

refer to the relevant

in CONFIG.SYS. device drivers are provided as standard under with MS-DOS. directory This manual on drive C.

(Note 1)

All of the above assumes

that these

device

drivers

are placed

the vDOS

The specification For details,

of switches

and parameters on-line

may be required

for the above

settings.

refer to the MS-DOS card,

help or the relevant provided

manual. with the memory card for

(Note

2) When using a memory

details of the setting device drivers

refer

to the manual

required may

in CONFIGSYS. adversely affect the operation of FAPT LADDER-II. If a

(Note

3) Some
problem

is anticipated, device

specify drivers.

only ANSI.SYS When only

in CONFIG.SYS. is specified,

Omit the specification FAPT drivers LADDER-II will

of the other support quickly.

ANSI.SYS

only English, Recognized

but allows conflicts

any contention

with other device 7.

to be identified

are listed in Appendix

-12-

3. THE CONTENTS

OF PACAGE

AND INSTALLATION

3.

THE CONTENTS

OF PACAGE

AND INSTALLATION

3.1 The Contents

FAPT LADDER-II The media (1) (2) (3) (4) (5)

of Pacage
in 5 floppy disks listed below. Please confirm contens.

is stored

size is 3.5 inch 2HD (1.44MB). (Vol. 1)A08B-9201 (Vol. 2)!A08B-9201 (Vol. 3)!A08B-9201 (Vol. 4)!A08B-9201 (Vol. 5)!A08B-9201

FAPT LADDER-II FAPT LADDER-II FAPT LADDER-II FAPT LADDER-II FAPT LADDER-II

-J503#ZZO7-1 -J503#2207-2 -J503#2207-3 -J503#ZZO7-4 -J503#ZZO7-5

3.2 Installation
Install the system the example below using install .exe stored in Vol. 1 of system floppy disk. A:, and directory Y FLADDER

assumes

that a system

disk is set in drive

has been created

on the hard disk drive C: to install the system.

[Operation] Set system Execute floppy disk Vol. 1 in the drive A:. exe using the following command.

install.

C: + > A: Y INSTALL After that, go on accordint To select Select changed. the displaying pattern to inquiry color. by of the system below which is inquired when necessry.

the dialog-box < 7 >,

appears. of dialog-box computer itself will be

the color Select

< 5_7 key and the color

your personal

the displaying

color for matching

s display.

Select

color

type.

. 0

COLOR MONO 1

Fig 3.2 (a)

Select

Displaying

Color

Dialog

Box

-13-

3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION

If installation

completes,

the message

below

appears.

(Note 1) (Note 2)

To stop installation,

press the <Esc>

key. to be installed are all deleted

Note that the files in the directory

specified

3.3 Directory Configuration

The installer automatically in the above creates

After Installation
the following subdirectories under the specified directory

(C: Y FLADDER

example):

C: Y FLADDER l=zz The messages error indications) The installer function to be displayed are contained by FAPT LADDER-II (such as menus, displayed instructions, and

in a file under the following

this subdirectory. subdirectory (indicated by ) when an on-line

automatically

creates

is used:

C: Y FLADDER

JPN ENG PMC-RAM () the above directory.

(Note)

Be careful

not to accidentally

delete

3.4 File Configuration 3.4.1 File system

FAPT LADDER-II are described below

The files constituting

(1)

Customizable Some functions

files can be customized ladder programs, by the user. These functions include setting of the format

for printing standard. For these edited

created

and communication

port setting

based

on the RS232C

functions,

the These

associated

data

is held

in text-format

files,

which

can

be directly

by the user.

files are listed below.

(a) Printing

(For details,

see Section

4.5.3.5.)

. AMROFTRP.DAT
CROSSINF.DAT

-14-

3. THE CONTENTS OF PACAGE AND INSTALLATION

. .INF
(b)Communications (For details. see Section 4.5.6.1.)

. FL10 - AT.DAT
(c)Compile/decompile OPTION.CNF (For details. see Section 4.573.)

(d)Entire

system (For details, (For details, see Section see Section 4.5.8.7.) 4.5.9.)

FLMNE.DAT FLVIEW.DAT

(2)

Other

files

(a)README.TXTIREADMEJ.TXT These printed. Use this information Japanese in combination with the manual. contains English text. Note that READMEJ.TXT contains text files contain important information that became available after the manual was

text, while README.TXT

(b)*.JPN.ENG A file having either of the above extensions contains most of the messages (menus. The

displayed location

instructions.

and error indications)

to be displayed

or printed

by the system.

of such a file is described

in Section 3.3.

(c)FLMNE.ERR The results (including errors) of mnemonic conversion are written into this text file.

(d).EXE A file having this extension IS an executable file. Such files are not handled by the user.

(3)

Files The These

that are not installed

files under subdirectory vAPPENDlX on Volume 5 are not installed by the installer. files are listed below.

(a)Printing

(For details.

see Section

4.5.3.6.)

. AMROFTRP.ESC . AMROFTRP.PR
(b)Standard symbols SYM SYM (For details. see Appendix 4.)

F16&18-M. F16&18-T. PM-D.SYM PM-H.SYM FSOM-CNV. FSOT-CNV.

SYM SYM SYM

. PM-C_CNV.

-15-

3. THE CONTENTS

OF PACAGE

AND INSTALLATION

(c)Message

conversion tools (For details. see Appendix 5.)

- CHGMES.EXE

3.4.2

The constitution of source program

a sequence program, which is object of editing and printing, is called source

In FAPT LADDER-II,

program and managed

by storing in files below.

H incase of named "C:Y DATAYSAMPLE"

as source program

- SAMPLE.ERR SAMPLE.MAP

execution map file

result

file

(Note 1) (Note 1)

CONTROL SYSPARAM XSYMBOL.xxx MESSAGE IOMODULE LEVELl. #LA LEVEL2. #LA LEVEL3. #LA Pyyy. #LA Pzzz. #SS NETCMT.xxx MCARD

* * * * * * * - *

Source program managing file System parameter data file Title data file Symbol & Comment data file Message data file I/O module data file 1st level ladder data file 2nd level ladder data file 3rd level ladder data file Sub-program ladder data file Sub-program step sequence data file Net comment data file Memory card format data file

(Note

2)

(Note (Note (Note (Note

3) 4) 4) 2)

(Note 1)

Contain source program compile/decompile

results and map information.

These files

are not Included in a source program, but are named in accordance the source program. These files are stored under the directory one level above

with the name of

the source

program

storage directory.

(Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 4)

xxx is number of multi file managing. Only for using LEVEL-3 ladder at PMWRC3IRC4IRC4 (STEP)/NB/NB2/QC.

"YYY","zzz" is number of sub-program.

- 16-

4. OPERATION

4. OPERATION
4.1 Activation
(1) Activation method

01 Move to the drive and directory 0 Key in FLADDER Start FAPT -z Enter > LADDER-II

where

the FAPT LADDER-II

system

software

is installed.

(Example)

when

the

software

is

installed

under

the

\FLADDER

directorv 1~:=~f%?f!)~ER C:\FLADDER 6

on drive C: < Enter >

1 shown below,
display while key (Fig. 4.1 (a)). changes

> FLADDER

c Enter > screen, appears After this screen menu

The FAPT LADDER-II is displayed screen switches

initial

for 3 seconds,

the screen any

automatically the initial without

to the initial

(Fig. 4.1(b)). the display

Pressing

screen

is displayed delay.

immediately

to the initial menu screen,

the 3second

(Note)

When no source LINE (SELECTED cannot

program

is selected,

menu

items

OFF-LINE dotted

FUNCTION lines. These

and OFFmenu items

PROGRAM)*

are displayed

using

be selected. F A P T LADDER-II Version 01 .O A08B-9201 -J503 Copyright (C) 1991- 1995 FANUC

1
LTD.

I I i I il

II 1 7 II

II II
FAPT LADDER-II Top Screen

FANUC

Fig. 4.1 (a)

fnitial
Drw. No. Ver. Press press
[TAB] [ENTER]

menu

.. ..

key
or

to

move

[SPACE]

the cursor and key to select.

*r..,...dY.:.<:>

~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~~.~~ ..._..... _,.._.. .I.> Off-tine Eunctjon

:::::::::.::.:::.:: ... .:.:+:....A.

OWtine On-tine

Func tidii grogrtim)

f selected Utility Exit

Fig. 4.1(b)

Initial Menu Screen

-17-

4.

OPERATION

(2)
There are two methods line. of returning from the FAPT LADDER-II initial menu screen to the DOS command

Press the < Esc > key while the initial menu Alternatively,select For details menu item END

screen

is displayed.

from the initial menu. see Section 4.4.

of selecting

a menu item from the initial menu,

(Note)
FAPT LADDER-II directory Example: can be started more easily by creating a batch file, as described below, under a for which a path IS set. The following software batch file, named FLDDER, is created directory when the FAPT LADDER-II

system

is installed

under the \FLADDER

on drive C:

- 19-

4.

OPERATION

4.2 GENERAL 4.2.1 Menu

OF OPERATIONS Configuration
of the menu screens displayed by the system are shown below.

The configuration

$
TOP screen -I +

Program

Selection

Off-Line On-Line

Function

(1)

(See Fig. 4.2.1 (b))

Function

(2)

(See Fig. 4.2.1 (c))

On-Line (selection program)

(3)

(See Fig. 4.2.1 (c))

Utrlity I I

DOS flOadat View result Linker TITLE PARAMETER SYMBOL LADDER DIAGRAM LADDER DIAGRAM/

L(1)

STEP SEQUENCE SYMBOL MESSAGE I/O MODULE SYSTEM PARAMETER FA WRITER PMC WRITER PMC Handy Memory BACKUP File Card & COMMENT

STEP SEQUENCE

CROSS

REFERENCE MAP

LIST

_ -

BIT ADDRESS

PROGRAM

OPTION

SET-UP

SOURCE

PROGRAM+MNEMONIC FILE+SOURCE USER BATCH

FILE

MNEMONIC EXECUTE

PROGRAM FILE

- 20 -

4.

OPERATION

File save Off-Line Exit Diagnose t Ladder Online Monitor/ Editor Timer Counter Keep relay Data table control Data table Function

(3) 1

On-Line (selected

Function program)

PMC Status Signal Status PMC Parameter PMC alarm RUN/STOP System status the ladder

Information

-21-

4. OPERATION

4.3 Common System Operations

The operations described below are common operations for FAPT LADDER-II.

(1) Function keys

When desired the menu menu items shown below are displayed in reverse function key. video, the user can select the item by pressing the corresponding

IF11

WI
key
key

IF31

IF41

WI

WI

if=71

IF81

WI

IF101

(2) Escape
escape

The escape

< ESC>

has the same screen

effect

as selecting

[END]

with the function to the previous

key.

The in the

key terminates

the current

then returns

the display

screen

menu hierarchy.

(3) Cursor
select

keys
keys < t >,

The cursor

<

1 >, < t

>, and

<

are used

to move

the cursor

to

input items. cursors can be used on a single the <SHIFT> key together screen, the second or subsequent > key. cursor

When two or more can be moved

by pressing

with the < +- > or < +

(4) Scroll
The previous

keys
scroll keys <ROLL UP> and <ROLL down DOWN > (to display scroll the screen up (to display respectively

the
(for

one page)

and scroll the screen

the next one page),

the PC9801). The scroll keys page, respectively <PAGE DOWN > and < PAGE UP > display the next page and the previous

(for the IBM PC/AT).

(5) [INS]

key between the overwrite

This key switches

mode < 0 > and insert mode < I >.

(6) [TAB]

key
keys are displayed, press < Tab > key and select one button.

When multipul

-22-

4. OPERATION

(7) Status line

A status line is displayed at the top of the screen.

Main

menu

PMC-RB3

<o>[c: \FLADDER
t-

t-

Item name currently selected

Model

currently

selected

Current directory

name

Edit mode

(overwrite/insert)

(Note)

The

indications depending

on the

key

tops

may

slightly

vary

from

the

descnptions

of this

manual,

on the personal

computer

used.

(El) Pop-up menu

When the following pop-up described menu below. appears, the desired process can be selected usrng any of the three methods

1)

Cursor

movement key < 7 > or < 1 >, such that the item to be selected the <RETURN > key selects that item.

To select an item, press the cursor is displayed in reverse video.

Then, pressing

2)

Function

key key is indicated key. at the left of each item. To select an item, press the

A function corresponding

function

3)

Command

name letter pressing In (usually, the letter the initial of) an item name key < U >, is the command can select name. In the Quit, or

An uppercase above Append case,

<Cl >, or <A>

the Update,

command,

respectively.

-23

4. OPERATION

(9) Pull-down

menus

On some screens, the following menu bar is displayed along the top of the screen:

....;

FiM;

:::

,.:.,

2. Diagnose
I
I

3. l/O
I
I

4. Communication
I
I
)

%I&

I 1

Function number. Function name Icon for PMC status indication (See the section explaining how to start the on-line functions.)

Pressing the < Alt > key displays the pull-down menu for ?i Ff@.~v The pull-down menu for a function can also be displayed by pressing the < Alt > key and
the corresponding function number simultaneously.

1:We file sa\rei

2. Diagnose I

3. I/O

4. Communication

%lll-

Exit

Using the cursor keys. position the highlight to the desired item on a functions pull-down menu. A menu item with an arrow mark (G) at its right edge has its own pull-down menu, which can be displayed by pressing the < + > key. The target screen is displayed by pressing the < Enter > key after positioning the highlight to a desired menu item.

-24-

4.

OPERATION

4.4

Initial Menu
screen appears when the FAPT LADDER-II system is started. See also Section

The inttial menu 4.1. This screen from

reappears this menu, the

upon

the termmation <Tab> or

of a function key to move The

chosen

from down be

this menu.

To select function, pressing

function then

use the key

the cursor cursor can

to the desired moved up by

press

<Enter>

spacebar.

< Shaft > + < Tab > simultaneously.

4.4.1
When screen system. fi)

Program selection
PROGRAM used SELECT is selected from the initial menu, program the screen with display the switches FAPT to the

to specify

the name

of a source

to be used

LADDER-II

To spectfy

the source

program

name,

enter

drive:vsource-program-name.

After entering FlO [END]

the name

of the desired

source

program, without

press Fl changing

(EXEC]

or <Enter>. program name.

Press

to return

to the initial menu screen

the source

Examples: Specifying SAMPLE as a source [EXEC]. name is specified, the PMC model screen. name and source program name are program under the DATA directory on drive C:

Enter CvDATAvSAMPLE When the source displayed program

in the upper

half of the initial menu

Specifying The model name Fl

a new source setting screen,

program shown

name: below, appears. program, Using the cursor then press the keys, <Enter source move the cursor to the If

of the PMC model is pressed

for a new

source

> key (Fig. 4.4.1). program name

[COPY]

without

specifying

a PMC model,

an existing

can be

copied

as a new source

program.

The

FAPT

LADDER-II

system

creates files.

a directory

for the

specified

source

program

name,

and

creates

each of the source

program

-25-

4. OPERATION

PMC IMC

E;IB -NBZ

SPliTI

PMC type for new program.

Fig. 4.4.1

Selection of PMC type

4.4.2
When

Off-line function
OFF-LINE FUNCTION is selected from the initial menu, the off-line menu screen appears a function equivalent to the FAPT LADDER system

(Fig. 4.4.2). software,

The off-line function includes on the off-line menu

displayed

screen.

This function is used mainly for programming (PMC) has not been established. For

using a personal computer details. see Section 4.5.

when connection

with the CNC

Fl F2 F3 f1 f5
Ph

KEY KEV KtV KEV KEY KEY KEY KtV KtV

EDIT PRINT COMPILE DECOHPIL~ I/O PROGRRH OPIIDN SLIPUP MNEMONIC EDIT UllLllV ON-LINt tUNCllDN

f? tB tY

Fig. 4.4.2

Offline menu screen

4.

OPERATION

4.4.3
When

On-line function
ON-LINE held FUNCTION by the PMC. is selected Programs from the initial menu, are loaded into the the on-line personal 4.6. function computer is applied by to the of

programs automatic

means

communication

with the PMC.

For details,

see Section

4.4.4
When used

On-line function (selected

ON-LINE (SELECTED selected PROGRAM)

program)
is selected from the initial menu, A comparison computer. the on-line is made function is the

for the program

on the personal

computer.

between

program select

held by the PMC and that selected method. For details,

on the personal 4.6.

If a mismatch

is detected,

a monitoring

see Section

4.4.5
When

Utility
UTILITY is selected from the initial menu, a function selection and Linker. menu appears to enable the

user to select a function press the corresponding

such as DOS, floadat. function key.

View result,

To start a desired 4.5.

function,

For details

of each function,

see Section

4.4.6
When line.

Termination
END is selected from the initial menu, the screen display returns to the DOS command

-27-

4. OPERATION

4.5 Off-line function 4.5.1

F2
F3 F1 F5

KEY KEY KEY KEY

PRINT COHPILt OFCOHPILF I/O PROGRRH OPTION SET-UP MNEMONIC EDIT UllLllV ON-LLNt CUNCIION

Ff, KEY FI t8 tY KEY KtV KtV

Fig. 4.5.1

Off-line Menu Screen

4.5.2

Editing

The source file of a sequence program is edited. (1) Start [Operation] il! Select (EDIT] from the main menu indicated below.

m
c

\ORIR\SRHPLI 1

Fl C2 C3 II 15 Fh tI t8 tY

KEY KtV KtV KFV KLV KFV KtV KtV KtV

EDIT PRINI CUnPLLt Df CnHPll~t l/O PROGRRH OPlION SCI-UP MNEMONIC EDIT UllLllV UN-LlNt tUNCIIllN

Fig. 4.5.2 (a)

Off-line Menu

-28-

4. OPERATION

The followlng

editing

menu

screen

appears:

Fig. 4.5.2 (b)

Editing

Menu

Select

data to be edited

with the corresponding

function

key.

69

The

editing

screen

for the

selected

data

appears.

For example,

the

screen

below

is

displayed

when

[TITLE]

is selected.

EDIT

( TlTUi

m*<.

: y:,:. G&-@fj@~~~~$$;*$@&$$

1) 2) :O 4) 5) 6) 7) 8) 9) IO)

bWlllNI: TUJI. BLIUJIIH FMClllMi TWL NtW tK & NC id: IW IKu;W No EIIITIUN No IKo(;I(I\M Inbfwliw; No DATA It IRUXW4IftG IRffilbd DI:SICMiD WIM kRl1TEN BY Rim UY

NkW i l%NlJCF%CKIlELRC&I:16M4

:I

7 _I I

p%,r:

: 9, f

l,).q&

Fig. 4.5.2 (c)

Editing

Title

-29-

4. OPERATION

(2) Termination
[Operation] cis Select

[END] or press the e ESC > key on the editing

message appears: & quit

screen.

02

The following

E-1
F2 F3

Save (update) Quit Edit

CC Press the desired

function

key. the editing operation is terminated after the results of

(0

When editing

UPDATE are written QUIT

is selected. to a file.

(ii) When

is selected,

the editing

operation

is terminated

without

writing

the results

of editing

to a file. is selected, the editing is continued.

(iii) When RESUME

When UPDATE (i) (ii) To continue To terminate

or QUIT editing, editing,

is selected, select select

the display

returns

to the editing key.

menu

screen.

the appropriate [END].

function

The display

returns

to the main menu.

452.1

Title data editing

the titles of sequence programs generated by a machine tool builder.

Title data represents

(1) Start

[Operation] ci? Select [TITLE] on the editing menu screen.

- 30 -

4.

OPERATION

G9 The following

title edrting

screen

appears:

I) KKIIINI:TWI. Blllll)tiR WIIIM; 11XJI. NM 3) fm: & NC NM I) PMC PRICRAM NO

2)

NAk

: FINK IM:HltlEl.K & I:IfM

8) IRWAM W:SIGNRI) BY

!I) RtMMIIIKN HY

Fig. 4.5.2.1

(2)

Input

[Operation] (I) Select an input ttem (displayed in reverse video) with the -Z 1 > and < 7 > keys.

Q)

Enter data.

The maximum

number

of characters

usable

for each title data item IS listed below 32 characters 32 characters 32 characters

MACHINE MACHINE

TOOL BUILDER TOOL NAME NO

NAME

: :
:

CNC & NC NAME

PMC PROGRAM EDITION PROGRAM NO

: : NO : : : : :

4 characters
2 characters

DRAWING

32 characters
16 characters 32 characters 32 characters 32 characters

DATE OF PROGRAMMING PROGRAM DESIGNED BY BY

ROM WRITTEN REMARKS

-31-

4.

OPERATION

(3) Termination

[Operation ) 01 Select
B, [END] on press the -z ESC > key to return lo the editing menu screen.

The following

message

appears.

11

Press the desired

function

key.

The system

returns

to the editing

menu.

4.5.2.2

Ladder diagram/step
configuration screen

sequence

editing

(1) A program This screen

lists subprograms,

and supports

the selection

and editing

of a target

subprogram

EDIT(LADDER/STEP

SEQUENCE)

Rc4(sTEP SEQ) [A:VFLYDATAYSFC~~J PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

0 D u 0

LEVEL1 n Pt)ooi 13 PO008 11 PO021 11

LEVEL2 PO002 PO009 PO022

[I LEVEL3 [:I PO004 u PO005 t3 PO014 0 PO015 fd PO024 113 PO025

0 u .

PO006 PO026

q PO016

u PO007 0 PO017 01POO27 . . 0]PO407

(7 PO101

cl PO202

m]PO304

[1]PO405

oJPO406

Sub-program

: PO001

ADRESS

DELETE

NEW

ZOOM

-32

4. OPERATION

(a) Screen display

Screen 0 display the 1stladder the 2nd ladder the 3rd ladder a subprogram a subprogram a subprogram a duplicate in editing Meaning level level level (Note 1)

(Pxxx represents Display ladder ladder ladder ladder

a subprogram

number)

by [ZOOM]

or < Enter >

LEVEL1

diagram diagram diagram diagram diagram diagram diagram

j--J LEVEL2 0 0 01 LEVEL3 Pxxx Pxxx

step sequence step sequence ladder

A ] Pxxx (Note 2) x Pxxx

subprogram

or step seqence

Note 1) Note 2)

The 3rd ladder If the [ZOOM]

level can be omitted. key was used screen to nest a program upon to a certain press depth, and if the key,

subprogram the editing

configuration

is displayed for which

a single

of the [MAIN]

of the subprograms are marked

the [ZOOM]

key was pressed

is suspended.

Such subprograms Following Function

with n J.

keys are useful in this screen. key Other keys

[ ADRESS] [ DELETE] [ NEW [ ZOOM

Meaning

: Switching : Deleting ] : Creating ] : Modifying

addresssymbol a subprogram a new subprogram a subprogram

display < Page Up > <Page

: Displaying

previous

screen

down > : Displaying

next screen

of display

IEDIT(LADDER/STEP
Edit (LADDER/STEP PMC-RC4 (STEP

SEQUENCE) :

RC4(STEP
FAPT LADDER The list screen Setting Current a model directory

SEQ)
editing

[C:~FLADDERJ
screen

SEQUENCE) SEQ)

: : :

of subprogram

[ AxFLADDERv

PROGRAM:(STEP
PROGRAM

SEQUENCE
which

DEMO PROGRAM)
is one of the title data

Remarks

I ~LEVELI
LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3

I lLEVEL2

i-tLEVEL3

: The 1st level of ladder : The 2nd level of ladder : The 3rd level of ladder

I1 1 PO001
I I
I- I] :

i1)POOO2
a subprogram

11 PO004
of the ladder

F-1PO005

f-1 PO006 11 PO007

: a subprogram

of the step sequence

-33 -

4. OPERATION

(b) Creating a new subprogram Press the [NEW] key.

New program

name ?D

Enter the number

of the subprogram

to be created

(P200, for example).

(c) Modifying [ZOOM] [ZOOM]

a subprogram
of the subprogram key. key. to be modified position (P200, the for example), to P200 then then press the press the or <Enter> Alternatively, cursor

Key in the number

or <Enter>

If a subprogram message

number

marked

with

LI]

(P21,

for example)

is selected,

the

following

is displayed:

Editing Continue

this to

subprogram select it ?

is

not

completed. [Yl

(Yes/No)

To continue session,

the editing the

session

using

the results

obtained

from

suspended

previous

editing

press

< Enter > key.

To cancel

the results

of the previous

editing

session and

edit the subprogram from its original state, enter <N >.

-34-

4.

OPERATION

(2)

Editing

a ladder diagram

(4

Start Display the program list screen. press the [ZOOM] appears. or <Enter> Position the cursor lo the program indicated key. The ladder diagram editing screen, by 0, then

shown below,

ItlD-XQ 8 SY=S!JNPLE ~mI~~3llmrm~m~n~

CCO=lESI

DATR 00001

NO 1 RCO=RELRY

SANPLE

800Bl/kWOl 00001?

I
I

Fig. 4.5.2.2.2

(a)

Ladder Diagram Edrling Screen

(1) When the [View] command is used, a different line is shown.

see (j) Combining a sequence program

(For the [View]

command,

The line shows the name displayed on the screen, can be edited.

of the file which is being edited,

number

of the net which is number of steps that

and the number of program steps/maximum

(iii) The line shows a sub-program

number (P address) or label number (L address). added to the data at the address selected by the

(iv) The lines show a symbol and comment cursor. 6, Q, AD = X000.0 SY = SAMPLE 0000 1 @ RCO = RELAY SAMPLE 00012 ($I CC0 =TEST DATA No. 1

: : : :

Address on which the cursor IS placed Symbol data Total number of symbols Relay comment Total character Coil comment Total data numbers of relay comment data numbers of symbol/coil comment

003000030

character

displayed on CRTIMDI.

-35-

4.

OPERATION

C-9Function
The ladder 0)

key indications
diagram editing

and selection
functions correspond to the function keys as indicated below.

(cornand] 63

[comand]

(3) Under condition

0,

holding

down [SHIFT]

lets you select the following

items.

(a Under condition
1 2 :3

8.
,:?

holding
4

down [SHIFT]
5 ,&$&

lets you select

6 ..!

the following
*

items.
g .I,., 11) $&i:

, j. .:i; : :y

[Delnet]
2 CihCet 3 search 4 <*down 5 <*&I#$ 6 7 MICI+ZI 8 9 '10 " I

I
I
t

WNC

inrnet

InstIn

his&n

7 .

.8

.' 9

10.

:.

!i? [Search]

2 bottom

rrch

W-W&

t+trth

g-srth

7 C-dOWi

i-Up

10

03 [Copy] I [Move]
1

until t

cancut

search

4 odown

'&up

7 *

10

to
*

cancel

Search

4 c+down

c*up

to-fil

ftS+orfi 8

10

(to-erg]

is displayed

in the [File]

command

mode

only.

(9

[File]
Opens a window in which the name menu. of an input program can be specified. Select desired processing from a POP-UP

do, [syEdit]
1 bX8C 2 cancel 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10

-36-

4.

OPERATION

(Note)

Whrle the functron of 0 screen

keys

of ti) are displayed For example, as selecting

in ladder <A>

diagram and

editing, (COMAND]

a command on the 0) To select a

can be executed.

entering

has the same effect of 0

F4 [Adress]

on the @I screen. (not necessarily screen.

command

in this way, enter command

the upper-case

letter

initial letter)

in the correspondrng

name shown

on the 8

6)

Ladder For

program

input input. select [LADDER] When from the editing menu. has been The entered, function key

ladder

program menu

programmer displays

IS displayed.

no sequence

program diagram.

the screen

only the rrght and left vertical

rails of a ladder

At this stage,

program

input can be started.

Use the cursor Examples below.

keys to move rnstruction

the cursor program

to any location

In the ladder instructron

diagram. program input are shown

of basic

input and function

(i)

Example

of basic

instruction

program

input

x0.1 X2.4

D30.2

F14.2

Y52.7

[Operation] Move the cursor The [ -I ILLEGAL to the start position. then press

[ -i

i-

1.
HORIZONTAL LINE the This message Enter warns

t_

] symbol

appears

on the screen. corner

The message

appears

at the lower-right ladder diagram

of the screen.

user that horizontal and bit data.

line creatron

is not completed.

an address

Enter X0.1 on the keyboard contact, and the cursor

and press the right.

<Enter

> key.

The address

is set at the

moves

As in 01 and 8.

enter

contact

A of D30.2.

Enter contact Press address

B of F14.2.

[e

] and enter

address

F14.2,

then

press

the

<Enter>

key.

The

is set on contact

B and the cursor

moves

right.

Without

moving

the cursor,

press extending

4
rail.

1.
automatically and a relay coil

A horizontal symbol

line segment

to the right is drawn

appears

near the right vertical

-37-

4. OPERATION

Enter address The cursor

Y52.7,

then press the < Enter > key. moves to the input start position on the next line.

automatically

Next, enter Press

an OR conditron.

[ -#+-

J and enter address

is set at contact

X2.4, then press the -Z Enter > key. moves right.

The address

B and the cursor

Press To

[ -

] to enter a horizontal
a horizontal line, enter

line. a number and press times the horizontal line key

enter

1. The line segment

will be entered exceeds

as many

as the number rail.

entered.

Note, however,

that such a line never

the right vertical

A vertical vertical

line

extending

upward

is required

for OR.

Press

--!

) to enter

line extending

upward.

(ii) Example of function

For function instruction

instruction
input. press

program input
the function key (functn]. Next, enter a SUB number,

then press the c Enter Z- key. A function number If the instruction can also be entered the [functn] remember lists function key. a certain instruction and name or SUB number, a function can be by entenng the function instruction name or SUB

and pressing user does table not that

instruction displayed The table

instructions

corresponding

SUB

numbers

on the screen. can be displayed instruction just by pressing the (funcln] displayed. screen from the function instruction key without entering any data.

Then the function Press the [functn] table.

table is automatically to the ladder

key to return

diagram

MOVE (.)!.)(.)i) (SUB 8)

(1) (.j(!!~K,

(2) 0000

(3) 0000

(4)

Control

condition -Input -High-order When entering I parameters a function Low-order 4-bit 4-bit logical

Output data address logical

address

multiplication data

data

multiplication

instruction instruction

with this function. vertically

enter the below.

of the function

as shown

-38-

4. OPERATION

[Operation

1
condition. 1. Next. right.. enter an address and bit data, then press the < Enter> key. [ ---I l--moves

Enter a control Press

The cursor

Enter a function Press the (functnj function

instruction. key. Next, enter shown SUB number above appears. 8. then press the <Enter> key. The

Instructton

diagram

Co Enter the parameters

First. enter press the <Enter>

of the function 4-bit The

instruction. multiplication automatically data of the first parameter. downwards. Enter then the

the high-order key.

logical cursor

moves

remaining

three parameters

one by one.

(iii) Restrictions [Restrictions]

Restrictions

and notes on ladder editing

related

to the ladder

1 net (corresponding

to the portlon

between

the RD

and WRT instructions) a) When the ladder 1 net exceeds program), 256 steps (as counted as steps in the

corresponding

mnemonic

the following

message

appears:

A limit of 256 steps per net was exceeded. If there are more than 256 steps, no net is displayed.

Restrictions If an attempt described a)

related

to a ladder

diagram more

display than

per screen 70 ladder net lines per screen, the error

is made occurs.

to display

below

Symptom When there are more than 70 lines per net, the following The If 70 NET being created lines are is too large. the following message appears, and no net is message appears.

(a-1 1

exceeded,

displayed. A limit of 70 lines per net was exceeded.

(a-2)

When

there are more than 70 fines totaled appears. IS too large. when totaled

over two or more nets, the following

message The

NET being created are exceeded appears

If 70 lines message

over

two

or more

nets,

the following

for a net that is the current

net when

70 lines are exceeded,

and the display The NET

IS

of the current

net IS dtscontinued. buffer. using the ladder diagram search

larger than the edltlng specify

In this case, function

the net to be displayed, search).

(such as net number

How to obtain Even

if part

the number
of a net
IS

of lines per screen

on a screen, all lines of the net are included in the

dlsplayed

- 39 -

4. OPERATION

total for that screen.

In addition, a space line between nets is counted as a valid line. as follows:

The number of lines tn each net to be displayed is determined (b-l ) Basic instructions One line is comprised of one basic instruction.

+_I-

1 line

1-r

*lines

(b-2)

Function

instructions The number of control conditions

The number of lines in a function instruction is: or parameters. Examples whichever is greater, plus 1

of calculation follow.

When the number of control conditions

< number of parameters

1004 Fro00 ROlO R020

O_

Number of control conditions = 2 Number of parameters = 4 Number of lines = number of parameters + 1 = 5 lines

When the number of control conditions

> number of parameters

00

Number of Number of Number of conditions

control conditions = 3 parameters = 1 lines = number of control + 1 = 4 lines

-4o-

4.

OPERATION

(b-3)

Data table section of function instructions The data table section of the COD, CODB, follows:

or DISP

instruction

is calculated

as

When the data table is one or two bytes Number of lines = number of data tables/6

( + 1 if there is a remainder)

ACT --i+ SUB 49 DISP 0011 0003 0300

000 003 006 009

0000 0000 0000 0000

0000

0000
0000

0000 0000 0000

Number section

0000

of = = =

lines in the data table 1 l/6 1 with remainder 5 2 lines

When the data table is four bytes Number of lines = number of data tables14 ( + 1 if there is a remainder)

0005
0007 D300 0320 000 002 004 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 Number section of = = = lines in the data table 514 1 with remainder 1 2 lines

-4l-

4.

OPERATION

(b-4)

Example

of calculating

the number

of lines per screen is

For the ladder obtained

shown below, the number of lines in the screen display section

as follows: screen are nets A and 6. = 6 lines 0 lines

- The valid nets on the display - Number of lines in net A

Function instruction section

(3+1) - The number of lines in net 8 is 2. ACT Net A +ISUB 49 DISP

+ data table section (116)

0011

0003 Screen displa! section . . . . ..

0300

1
0000
0000 0000 0000

000
003 006 009 Net B

0000 0000 0000 0000

0000 0000 0000

:
Net C

....... :

c)

Examples Example

of symptoms of symptom

(a-l)
can be edited only when (SUB the total number 396. of message data steps when 49) is less than This is because

The ladder parameter

diagram

of the DISP instruction

the total number If a net that editing,

of steps is 396, the net consists of a total message of 396 steps

of 70 lines. or more is created during mnemonic

consists

the following

appears,

and the display

of the net is discontinued.

The data table is too large.

-42-

4. OPERATION

Example

of symptom

(a-2) to enter the net of a function following message instruction on the same screen and the attempt as is

If an attempt that

is made

of a basic

instruction,

the

is displayed,

rejected. The NET being created if the basic is too large. instruction the net has 68 lines, total number of lines the MOVE exceeds instruction 70). (SUB 8) of

For example, cannot

be entered,

(because below.

The results

calculation

are described

Dtsplay

screen

:-I
RST +I SUB 8 L+

68-line

net

Number of instruction number of (4) + 1 =

MOVE lines = parameters

5 .

:.

68 + 5 = 73 lines

< Measure

> of the 68-line net is not scrolled, the MOVE instruction can be entered.

If the display

A baste tnstructton the total number

net cannot

be entered

together

with another

basic-instruction

net, if

of lines is greater

than 70.

For example, the element

if a 68-line

basic-Instruction

net is followed

by another

basic-Instruction

net,

of the third line of the latter net cannot

be entered.

rr Display screen

68-line

net

---I+
I
< Measure > of the 68-line net
IS

No more lines can be entered.

If the display

not scrolled,

the latter basic instruction

can be entered

When the CODB same steps screen, for the

instructron

(SUB 27) and DISP instruction is made to enter 49).

(SUB 49) are edited of message appears.

on the data the

if an attempt DISP

396 as the total number the following message

Instructton

(SUB

and

-43-

4.

OPERATION

attempt The

is rejected. is too large.

NET being created

This symptom

also occurs

In a combination

of two DISP instructions

and a combination

of

CODB and COD instructions. For example, steps shown if the number of tables for the CODB instruction is 200, the total number The calculation results of are

for the DISP below.

instruction

can be only

66 at maximum.

4 bytes 200 data tables Number of CODB lines = 55

. instruction
Display screen .._...... 196 198 00000000 00000000

._.. ._
00000000 00000000

I
. .
screen

Function instruction = 4 parameters section +1 Data table section = 20014 = 50 of DISP data items that can be entered instruction = 3 parameters + 1 of remaining = 70 - 55 - 4 = 11 lines 116=66 Calculation

_ instruction

Function sections Number lines

Data tables =

< Measure Moving

> to the top of the display makes it possible to set the

the DISP instruction of steps to 396.

total number

Restriction

on the maximum number

number

of steps is as follows:

The maximum Without

of ladder steps

steps that can be edited

EMS : 21840

With EMS Note, however,

: 24000 steps
that the maxrmum is used. edited exceeds message OVER the maximum is displayed: allowable number of steps, editing is allowable number of steps can decrease, depending

on how memory If a ladder disabled being

and the following BUFFER

MNEMONIC

-44-

4. OPERATION

[Notes] 0) An attempt ladder IO scroll a program is incomplete program on the screen (for example, with a scroll key or other addresses) the screen or invalid. can be scrolled. keys fails if the

program ladder

without before

A correct

must be created

Up to eight contacts However. format. displayed This

and one coil can be entered does not apply

in one line on the screen. program format created exceeds in mnemonic this limit, it is

this restriction When a sequence over several

to a sequence in mnemonic symbol. with

program

created

lanes with a continuation cannot be deleted

continuation to delete

symbol

-- ---

1.

Use

(Delnet]

(net

deletion)

this symbol.

(See Item (6) in this section.)

(4

Replacing Lines

sections of a sequence
created sequence

program
program can be replaced rn the same way as described

in an already

in Item (c) above. Move the cursor to a program section to be changed, then enter new data.

@I Sequence
indicated

program

addition soft key of the function key programmer menu and use the function keys

Press the [comand] below.

To terminate

the programmer

menu,

press the < ESC 7 key.

iflrmt

oekl@Jt

Insert

Adren

Search

COPY

MOW

File

rygdtt

I Insert 1

As described

below,

there are four types

of sequence

program

addition

in a ladder

diagram.

(i)

Example:
Addilion

when a relay contact is added on a line

on a line

HHt
To be added

Move

the cursor

to the position

to add item(s),

then

enter

item(s)

in the way described

in

Item (c) above.

-45-

4.

OPERATION

When a vertical

line affects

addition

[Operation] Move the cursor Press to the position shown the above. line to the left extending upward. This

4_

] to delete

vertical

disappears. Press

J [ -

] to create

a vertical

line extending line and vertical

upward

to the right of the cursor,

then press

1. A horizontal

line are created. is to be added.

Move the cursor Press

to the point on the line where

a contact

[ -_I

] to add a contact.
vertically

(ii)

When

a line

is added

iii+. _

N- To be added

To add a line vertically, lower cursor key. Each time the [insnetj line down to create After line addition, large enough part of the ladder

an area is required diagram must

for the addition. down

To create

such an area,

the the

be shifted enclosed

by one line. lines,

To do this, move then press

to any point in the ladder

diagram

in dashed

the [insnet]

key is pressed,

the lower

part of the ladder

diagram

is shifted

one

an area for addition. any remaining

Make an addition

in this area. two lines are added in an area

area (as In the case where

for three lines) can be left as it is.

[Operation]
Move the cursor Press [insnet]. The lower part of the ladder diagram is shifted down by one line. to any point in the ladder diagram enclosed in dashed Ilnes.

-46-

4.

OPERATION

When the [insnet) When the [rnsnet]

key IS pressed key IS pressed

without after

entering entering

a numeric a numeric

value, value,

one line is Inserted. the number of lines

specified

is inserted.

Move the cursor

to the desired > key.

position

and press

-_1 f--j.
right.

Then set address

data

and press the <Enter Press the [ L

The the cursor

moves

] soft key to create

an OR circuit

(iii) Line

insertion

in a single-net

sequence

program

Blank lines are inserted

one by one.

(Operation] 0 Enter number the number of lines to be inserted, then press the (inslin] key. The entered

of lines is inserted. key is pressed without entering a number, just one line is added.)

(When the [inslin]

-v-

-1
Cursor

If the (insltn]

key

IS

pressed

when

the cursor

is posttioned

as shown

In the left-hand

figure. a blank line is inserted

as shown

in the right-hand

figure.

(iv) Element Elements

insertion are added

in a single-net one by one.

sequence

program

[Operation]

Enter the number number of elements

of elements is Inserted.

to be inserted,

then press the [inselmj

key.

The entered

If the character [inselm] key

IS

c A> pressed.

is prefixed elements

to the number are inserted entering

of elements

to be Inserted

and the

after the cursor. the number of elements to be inserted,

(If the [Inselm] just one element

key IS pressed is inserted.)

without

1,

II

.. e .. ..,( .,.

II

-47-

4. OPERATION

II the figure, before

(inselm]

key is pressed is inserted

when as shown

the

cursor

is placed

as shown

in the left-hand is inserted

an element the cursor.

in the following

figure.

The element

If the character placed as shown

<A > is entered in the left-hand

and the [inselm] figure, an element

key is pressed is inserted

when

the cursor

is

as shown

in the right-

hand figure.

The element

is inserted

after the cursor.

(1) Deletion

in a sequence

program
deleted by positioning the cursor at the location to be deleted

(i)

A program and pressing

can be partially

one of the below

three soft keys

[ _____ I 4 I 2

] : ] :

Deletes Deletes Deletes

a horizontal a vertical a vertical

line, relay contact, line extending line extending upward upward

relay coil, etc. to the left of the cursor. to the right of the cursor.

] :

(ii)

Use the

[Delnet]

key to delete

a program

net (section

from

an RD instruction

to a WRT

instruction).

(iii) Multiple

nets can be deleted

one by one.

in&net

Reklai

lfisert

&dress

Serrrh

&.&.

MWQ

..ki;e., SjrBiiR

[Delnet]

[Operation]
0 Deletion Move deleted the cursor to the net to be deleted, in red. then press the (Delnet] key. The net to be

is displayed

G? Deletino Move

multiple

nets by using keys such as the cursor the nets to be deleted the cursor in red. moves down key, [c-down] key, or [search] after a numeric

the cursor

key, then display numeric value. value

If the [c-down] times

key is pressed as the entered

is entered.

as many

-48-

4. OPERATION

Execution Cancellation Deletion except specified nets

: Press the [exec] key.

: Press the [cancel] key. the [exclud] key. Exclude nets except specified nets in 8.

: Press

r4, When the nets to be deleted are known beforehand, move the cursor to the first net to delete, enter the number of nets to delete, then press operatron. steps ci) and 8 (g) Searching in a sequence can be omitted. the [Delnet] key. With this

program

A sequence program can be searched using the following soft keys:

[Search]

U) Itop
When this key is pressed, the start of the sequence program is drsplayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the start of the program. (ii) [bottom] When this key is pressed, the end of the sequence program is displayed on the screen and the cursor is moved to the end of the program. (iii) [srch] Search operatton using this key searches the program for aspecified address from the current location for the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. IS found, it is displayed on the screen. two ways. CiJ Address key. specrfication usrnq the cursor the [srch] the program for the specified address from the current is When an address

An address to search for can be specified in one of

Move the cursor to the relay contact of the address to search for, then press Thus operatron searches location of the cursor on the screen to the end of the program. If the specified address displayed on the screen.

is found, the sectron of the program containg the address The cursor IS automatically positioned at the found address.

If the search operation fails to find the specified address, the cursor does not move. To terminate searching, press the < ESC > key.

-49-

4.

OPERATION

x2.0 -;+@ri@#%?. 035.3

F54.1

Y52.3 I Cl

G11.6

I, II

.(
X4.2 Y49.1 032.0 b G43.1 - When the same address as this address is to be searched for, move the cursor to this position, then press the [srch] key.

G17.2 x14.0 +I F54.1

x0.5

D21.2

- When the same address is found, the cursor moves to this location.

G3 Address soecification
Enter the address This operation of the cursor

by address

inout then press the [srch] address key.

to find with the keyboard, the program

.
location

searches

for the specified

from the current

on the screen address the

to the end of the program. is found, The the section cursor of the program containing positioned the address at the found

When the specified is displayed address. If the search on

screen.

is automatically

operation

fails to find the specified

address,

an error indication

appears.

(iv) [w-srch]

(WRT coil search)

to search of the cursor the program for a relay coil with a specified address When from the coil location on the screen to the end of the program. relay coils are found, a relay

This key is used current is found, closest

it is displayed to the cursor

on the screen. is displayed

If multiple

the coil which

is the

The address

of a relay coil to search

for can be specilied

in one of two ways.

Ci> Address Move srch]

soecification

usino the cursor coil with the address to search for, then press the [w-

the cursor key.

to the relay

This operation current When location a relay

searches

the program

for relay coils with the specified to the end of the program. is found, the section

address

from the

of the cursor coil with the

on the screen specified

address

of the

program

containing

it is displayed operation

on the screen

and the cursor coil with

is positioned the specified

at the relay coil. address, an error

If the search indication

fails to find a relay

appears.

Address Enter srchj

spectfication

bv address of relay coils

input to search for with the keyboard, then press the [w-

the address key.

This operation current location

searches

the program

for relay coils wrth the specified to the end of the program.

address

from the

of the cursor

on the screen

- 50 -

4. OPERATION

When

a relay coil with the specified

address

is found,

the section

of the program

containing it is displayed on the screen and the cursor is positioned at the relay coil. If the search operation fails to find a relay coil with the specified address, an error

Indication appears.

(v) [n-srch]

(net-number

search)

This key displays those ladders that have a specified net number, starting from the top of the screen. advanced If the [n-srch] key is pressed without entering a number, the display is

by one net.

(vi) [s-srch ] (function-instruction This key searches

search) Searching is performed key. by entering a function key IS pressed

for function instructions.

instruction name or number, then pressing the [s-srch]

If the [s-srch]

while the cursor is on a function instruction, function instructions with the same number as that function instruction are searched for.

(vii)Search
l l l

operation

using the cursor

keys (<

*,

< -+ >) The address is searched for.

Enter an address or symbol, then press a cursor key. Enter a NET No., then press a cursor key.

The NET No. is searched for.

Enter a function instruction name, or enter S followed by a function instruction number, then press a cursor key. Example: Enter Sl, The function instruction is searched for. a cursor key. The function instruction END1 is

then press for,

searched (viii) Searching When

in all main/sub-programs(G-SRCH) program type is FORMAT-B/C, global searching in all main/sub-

the source

programs is enabled.

The range of search All programs, whrch rnclude a currently dtsplayed subprogram, The subprogram a) b) c) d) is searched are searched for.

for in the ascending order of P address.

From the current cursor posttion to bottom of currently opening subprogram. From next numbered subprogram to last numbered one.

From LEVEL1 to subprogram

of which P address is small next to a).

From top to cursor position in subprogram of a).

-51-

4. OPERATION

G-SRCH

mode continues

unless

pushing

the c ESC > key or the [cancel]

key.

1st net of LEVEL1

Whole program

-1 (Searching

Final net of the maximum

numbered

subprogram

in the order of 0 -@)

.
l

Searching

result of search in another is found, the cursor will move which to the position. is currently displayed will be

When the object In case of finding closed. Then, position At this

program,

the program

the program

which

contains

the

object,

will be opened

to display

the

object

with the cursor. time, whether to save or quit modifications is inquired, in case there are

modifications

in the program

to be closed.

When by one.

two or more

objects

exist,

the result

of search

are displayed

in order

of 1) one

- 52 -

4. OPERATION

Operation The global search is operated with the following functton key.

,,;~+.$-s+~

4-4

5 -t&&t*

6 -..-L-,~L~_a

t@r .+_ s +r.

,o&~er)

(cornand] 8

[comand]
2 D&net

insnet

in5Qtt 4 AdrQSj, 5 %arctI

Copy

&lrruc 8

Fk

iyhdlt

lo

d)
1

Select
2

the (G-srch]
3

with pushing

the [SHIFT]

(the following

will be displayed)

in state of 03

(Shortcut

command

is -z G >

+ [COMMAND])

Starting

of G-SRCH to the mode

mode of G-SRCH are searched by the operation unless quitting of 0) +O. mode.

It switches

After that, all programs

G-SRCH

b)

Execution Refer

of search [search](d) [w-srch]/(e) the target [s-srch] search. in (7)Searching in a sequence

to (c)

program,

for how to specify

of global

c) End of G-SRCH
G-SRCH different mode individually. =

mode is ended by pushing <ESC > or [cancel] key. The end method is

- <ESC> - [cancel]
=

Only G-SRCH

mode

is ended.

The program

on the opening

now

is the state as it is. It returns SRCH Whether to the mode. program which was opened at beginning the G-

The program or quit

on the opening modifications which

now closes. in case there are

will save

is inquired,

modifications

in the program

is currently

displayed.

PI Copying sections of
A multiple-net sequence net can be copied remains as it was.

a sequence program

program can be copied net by net. edited Specify the net to be copied. file. The selected The net

tn the same

file that is being

or into another

- 53 -

4.

OPERATION

File which

is being edited

Specified (COPY 1 Range to be copied [until]

file

Fig. 4.5.2.2

(b)

I
[Operation]

to

cancel

sear&

c-down

Pup

&fil

tu-arg

Copying Place

a net on the net to be copied and press the [Copy] key. The selected net is

the cursor

displayed Copying To select copied, pressing

in yellow. two or more nets the nets to be copied, move the cursor up, cursor first move the cursor to the first net of the range end of the range key. to be by nets

then

to the net at the other down, [c-up], [c-down],

to be copied The selected

the cursor

or [search]

are displayed Alternatively, moves

in yellow. enter a numeric value and press the [c-up] or [c-down] key. The cursor

according

to the specified

value.

Setting

the net or nels to be copied key.

Press the [until]

Specllying file) Move

the copy

destination

using the [to]

key

(Copying

the net or nets

in the same

the cursor

to the copy

destination immediately

in the

same

file and

press

the

[to]

key.

The bv the

selected

net or nets are copied

above

the copy

destination

specified

- 54-

4.

OPERATION

cursor.

To copy

the selected before

net or nets two or more pressing the [to] key.

times,

enter

the number

of times

they are to be copied

Specifying file) 1)

the copy destination

using the (to-fill

key

(Copying

the net or nets into another

Press the (to-fill

key.

The following

message

is displayed.

If no program

is specified.

LATMP

is created. work file used in editing) and press the < Enter >

(LATMP 2) file:

,.
Temporary

Enter the name of the file into which key.

the net(s) is to be copied

3)

Select

desired

processing

from the following

POP-UP

menu:

4)

If the Select

selected desired

destination processing

file is present, from the menu.

the following

POP-UP

menu

is dispfayed.

---t -

Updates the selected file. The new copy replaces previous data of the file. Cancels output to the selected file. Appends the copy to the selected file.

the

If the nets copied, and 0 (Note)

to be copied the number

are known

beforehand,

place

the cursor

on the key.

first net to be Steps 0, a,

enter

of nets to be copied,

then press

the [Copy]

can be skipped. Incorrect nets cannot be copied.

(0

Moving sections of a sequence

A multiple-net copied. edited sequence program The selected or output

program
can be moved net by net. to another Specify the net or nets to be place in the same file that is being

net or nets can be moved file. The selected

to another between

net or nets are deleted. IS that the selected net or nets are deleted rn

The only difference moving.

copying

and moving

fnznet

Oelfiet

Wart

Adrew

karch

COPV

Mawe

Pile

it&B

[Move] uirtll
c

cancel

search

c-down

C-U&l

- 55-

4.

OPERATION

[Operation] Substituting [Move] for [Copy], follow steps 0 to Q for copying.

(Note)

Incorrect nets cannot be moved.

(i)

Combining

a sequence

program

A source program can be combined to another source program that is being edited. The source program to be combined can be displayed and edited separately, then combined to

the original source program that is being edited.

Original screen

View screen

[SourcefiieSection to be edited

File being edited (original file)

P-01
Combine File to be combined IVfEWJ Input combined (view file)

Fig. 4.5.2.2

(c)

Combining

a Sequence

Program

Programs of model which is different from the specified connection displayed.) In this case, no errors will be detected (TO] or enter [VIEW]. (If a disagreement

model can be specified is found, a warning

to the files of message is

even if the file to be combined

contains model.

an address (The error careful to

range or function instruction format that does not agree with the specified will be detected in compilation.) When ignoring the warning message,

be extremely

continue the operation.

-56-

4.

OPERATION

(i)

Function keys

[Comand]

itwhet

Delnet

Insert

A&en

Mitch

COPY

Mbw?

; Flli .

::... i@llt

d
SIIWPLE -+ t------__-_ YO 0 ---_c+I

I
I

~334~5ulumm3rn331~

rRD= 1SY=

cco-

wao1

RCO=
-___ _

Fig. 4.5.2.2.2 (d)

Screen Displayed when a File is Opened

by the [File] Command

- 57 -

4. OPERATION

(ii) Operation

flowchart

for combining

a sequence

program

Start ladder diagram editing (original screen)

1 Specify an Insertion point (The data is inserted Immediately above the cursor.)

1 Press the [File] key

r_lrC1T7
Specify a view file <POP-UP menu 1 (View) Shows the ladder < diagram of the file to be combined (View screen) 1. Check the displayed data of the file to be combined 2. Edit the data of the file to be combined and combine it Combines the(To) file with the Ladder program on the original screen 1. The file is immediately combined. The data of the file is not displayed. L _I 1 on the view screen

Press the -z ESC z= key to terminate -z POP-UP menu (Quit) Cancels the edited data -

editing

t (Save) Saves the Ladder program shown on the view screen L

*I

(Temp)

(Edit) Returns to the ladder diagram screen (The view screen is continued.)

Saves the data in a provisional work file

*l: The name

of the temporary (e)

work file is LATMP. Flowchart for Combining a Sequence Program

Fig. 4.5.2.2

Operation

-58-

4. OPERATION

(iii) Examples

Example

1. Combrning

a sequence

program

file

[Operation]
Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select

[File].

Enter the name of the file to be combined

and press the -z Enter > key.

From the following

menu,

select

Fl (To).

/I

The

file

is inserted

immediately

above

the

net

specified

in step

QI>.

(Original

screen)

Example

2. Combining

a modified

sequence

program

(Operation] til Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

G3 Select

(File].

Enter the name of the file to be combining

and press the < Enter > key.

6.9 From the following

menu,

select

F2 (View).

jiil

Edit

the

Ladder key. way.)

program (Ladder

on the editing

view can

screen. be

To terminate and

editing, terminated

press in

the the

<ESC> conventional

performed

- 59 -

4.

OPERATION

From the following

menu,

select

Fl (Save).

Fl
F2 F3 F4 F5

Save (update) Quit Rename Edit Create Latemp file & Save

Return Then,

to the screen select Fl (To).

of step @ and check

the name

of the file output

in step $3.

The

file

is inserted

immediately

above

the

net

specified

in step

0.

(Original

screen)

Example

3.

Combining

a specified

section

of a sequence

program

[Operation] Place the cursor on the insertion point on the original screen.

Select

[File].
and press the < Enter > key.

Enter the name of the file to be combined

From the pop-up

menu,

select

F2 (View).

Select [until].

[Copy]

or [Move]

on the

view

screen

and

specify

a desired

range

with

From original [until] to

the

following

function

menu,

select

(to-org].

(Specify

insertion

into

the

screen.)

cancel

search

c-down

c-up

to-fil

to-org

From the following

menu,

select

Fl (Exec)

The

data

is inserted

immediately

above

the

net

specified

in step

0.

(Original

screen)

-6O-

4. OPERATION

(k)

Editing

a symbol

and comment editing

from screen,

the ladder a symbol

diagram

editing added

screen at the specified address

On the ladder can be edited.

diagram

and comment

[syEdit]

[Operation] Specifying an address and comment in a ladder key. diagram, place the cursor on the corresponding

To edit a symbol address

and press the [syEdit]

Editing

the symbol moves

and comment to the symbol editing > key. section in the bottom moves right part of the screen. to the comment field. Edit

The cursor the symbol

and press the <Enter

The cursor

Terminating [exec] [cancel] key

editing

Terminates Terminates

editrng after modifying editing without

the data. the data.

key :

modifying

(1)

Abbreviated Each function strings brackets below.

input

with

the [comand]

key with the [cornand] function key. key. Enter one of the character that are enclosed in

key can be directly then press the

selected

[cornand]

Those

portions

can be omitted.

I
S M

(nsert) (earth) (ove)

D C F

(elnet) (OPY) (ile)

(SY) E

The function

keys in the menu above

can be used for program

creation

and search

operations.

(Note)

The

keys

1c

or 4.)

and

[A

or-4

] are used

to create

or delete diagram.

a vertical

line

extending

upward

to the left or right of the cursor and the dashed vertical

in a ladder

The solid vertical item applying

line is for creation to a function

line is for deletion. and cursor

The menu

key depends

on the ladder

diagram

position.

-61

4.

OPERATION

(m) ZOOM Subprograms called by the currently and edited. selected programs issuing of a CALLCALLU instruction

can easily be referenced

(i)

Start up of zoom 0 Moved <Enter the cursor > key. to the parameter of the CALLCALLU instruction and push the

ROOl .O ACT IL

SUB65 CALL

PO01

The program

now

on opening

hides from the editing screen.

Then

the subprogram

which is specified by the parameter (ii) Start up under editing When ZOOM be inquired. is attempted Select either while editing

in mentioning above appears on the screen.

the program,

the preservation

of

modificatibns

will

(ii,) End When the end operation with the < ESC > key is attempted by ZOOM, it will return to the state when configuration screen ZOOM all at once. in the program editing Moreover, screen to

is started.

it is possible

return to the program

End menu of editing screen (pop-up screen)

~1 F2 F3 F4 F5

Save(update) Quit Rename,save Edrt Main

& quit & quit

Fl :Save(update)

& quit was started, after the content of current

It returns to the program screen where ZOOM program screen is preserved.

F2:Quit It returns to the program screen where ZOOM program screen IS cancelled. was started, after the content of current

-62

4. OPERATION

Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down, (* and ) is inserted. Then the cursor changes the area. The area for Net comment display mode) automatically expands into character-size

and the area for comment

enclosed

by

cursor,

and type comment

sentence

onto

and shrinks by two lines (four lines at four lines sentences. Every Net comment

according to the comment

can expands up to a hundred lines.

RlOOl .o R120.3 X-+

R1000.2

Y2000.4 A character cursor

(* Net comment (* All characters R1OO1.O ----IMI

is written in here. you can enter are available.

) ) Y23.4 A

R1000.2

(ii) To determine

or cancel the editing Net comment the editing Net comment, and the Net comment press [ end ] or <ESC>. editing mode is finished. Then the editing

@I To determtne comment

is fixed,

To cancel cancelled

the editing Net comment, and erased.

press

[cancel].

The new Net comment

will be

Note)

The number of characters ASCII character as two bytes.

in a Net comment one Japanese

is limited to 4095 bytes: counting one kana as one byte, one kanji character

as one byte,

Line feed is also available on Net comment. for Net comment.

Line feed is helpful to save memory

(iir) To modify Net comment 0 Place the cursor on the Net comment < Shift z= + [netcmt 1 or < Enter > and the Net comment which you want to modify and press The Net comment ediling mode becomes active,

will be ready to modify its contents.

At Net comment

editing mode,

to Insert a blank line tnto Net comment, 7 7

press [inslin].

( Net comment ( All characters

is written in here. you can enter are available.

- 64 -

4.

OPERATION

[inslin]

will shrfl irnes at the cursor position. is written in here.

and after down

by one line,

and make

a blank

line

at the cursor

( Net comment ( ( All characters ( (3 At Net comment (* Net comment ( Net comment ( All characters ( [dellin] line. ( Net comment ( All characters will delete

) )

you can enter are available.

l )
*) [dellin].

editing

mode,

to delete

by line, press

is written will expand

in here. or shrink automatically.

l )
) ) )

you can enter are available.

whole

one line at the cursor

and shift lines after the cursor

up by one

is written

in here.

you can enter are available. editing mode,

l ) l )

@I To exit from Net comment

press ( end 1 or < ESC >.

To cancel the

the modifications and the

you have just made, Net comment will

press be

[cancel]. as

[cancel] it was

will abandon before the

modifications

restored

modifications.

(iv)To

delete

Net comment Net comment

There are two ways to delete

Use [Delnet] [command]

as same as deleting + [Delnet] + specify

normal

ladder

nets. -x [exec]

area to delete

Entering cursor

Net comment

editing

mode

by <Shift

> + [netcmt]

or

<Enter

> with

the

on the Net comment

which you want to delete.

and then press

[delete].

(v) Lost Net comment A Net comment Net comment consists pointer, These two of the information and Net of posttion string in sequence data which one program which is called

comment are usually

is comment to one to

sentences make a Net such as by is

themselves. comment, copying user. called

elements might

combined

but the partner the ladder

be lost by illegal

file operations

or something,

file .#LA

or modifying pointer

the Net comment

data file NETCMT.000

When a Net comment Lost Net comment.

loses its Net comment

string data, the Net comment

Lost Net comment displayed normalized comment, in purple

is displayed or dimly operation.

as blank on

Net comment

enclosed Lost can

by ( Net

and ) comment

which can

is be Net

monochrome Lost

display.

by editing

Net comment

be edited

as a normal

such as deletion,

copying

and so on.

-65-

4. OPERATION

(p) To edit New page

It is able to specify the position to feed page at printing ladder diagram.

the position is called New page,

This specification

of

and each of them occupies two steps in sequence

program.

0)

To enter New page 0 Move the cursor to the position you want to feed page. And then press <Shift > +

1 page 1.

R1OO1.O R120.3 zJ+ R1OO1.O

R1000.2

Y2000.4 A

R1000.2

Y23.4

+Ht @ Lines at the cursor and after are shifted down,

n v

and the mark of New page is inserted.

R1OO1.O R120.3 =LI

R1000.2

Y2000.4

<New R1OO1.O R 1000.2

page> Y23.4

----1Hl
(ii) Other operation to edit New page

New page can be handled as same as other ordinary ladder nets. copying [ Copy 1, moving ( Move 1, and deleting [Delnet] New page.

The operations

such as

ladder nets are also effective on

(q)

Terminating

editing

of a sequence

program

[Operation] 0 Press the < ESC > key on the following editing screen.

- 66 -

4.

OPERATION

The following

editing

end menu(pop-up

menu)

appears.

a)

Fl :Save(update) After current

& quit of the editing is preserved, the editing screen will be ended.

content

b)

F2:Quit Alter current content of the editing is cancelled. the editing screen will be ended.

c)

FB:Rename,save After current editing screen

& quit of the editing is preserved into specified subprogram name, the

content

will be ended.

d)

F4:Edit The < ESC > key operation is canceled and it returns to the editing screen of former.

e)

F5:Main With the operation was started a).b) or c). it returns it returns to the program to a program screen where screen ZOOM at all

But with this operation, state.

configuration

once from the nested

Either the above-mentioned

is selected screen

and it returns where ZOOM

to the program was started.

configuration

screen,

the main menu or the program

When error net exists When the error net exists, ERROR NET NO. is displayed and the end menu is not

displayed.

Cope thts case by the following.

a)

After the error net is corrected operation will be done.

or deleted

and the state of the error is released.

the end

b)

When

pressed

< ESC> of 8

key

in the

state

of 0

after

CAN

is typed

(meaning

of

CANCEL),

the menu

will be displayed. it will be preserved it will be able after removing to return to the the error net. state before editing by

When Save is ordered, When Quit is ordered, the content

cancelling

of the editing.

-67-

4. OPERATION

(3)

Step sequence Position

diagram to a program editing screen marked with 01, then press below: the [ZOOM] or < Enter > key.

the cursor

The step sequence

is displayed

as shown

ZDIT(LADDER/STEP

SEQUENCE)

R~~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFCO~] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

Cl s3 P3 s4

Sll

cl s13

Cl s21

s31

n s15 r======================I=I

S24 l-l

Note

_. 1)

1 (Note 1)
The current The entire position screen of the cursor consists on the screen across is indicated. the screen to of 32 elements

and 64 elements any element

from top to bottom.

The cursor

is positioned

on the screen.

On the step sequence cursor.

screen,

different

soft keys

are displayed,

depending

on the position

of the

When the cursor

is on the step line, following

softkey

menu

is displayed.

I
n1 s2

I
III SlQ

I
Cl s20

+ L4 L-1 s30
LBL -L FUNC
CHK ZOOM

r1

1111

1 II

JMP

[ (

Cl
[Ll]

Step subprogram initial step subprogram

( +-LBL

: : : :

Label for jump The end of block step Various functions checking

I
[

-ICHK

I:
] ] ]

rl]

] : Block step subprogram

] : ]
Line for link

[ FUNC [ ZOOM

I I [ -+JMP

Grammatical Zooming

: Jump to label

into a subprogram

-68-

4.

OPERATION

When the cursor is on the transition line, following softkey menu is displayed.

P30

t
1==
1 f-.-

(f-1

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

I t
I l1

l=

I I I t1

T=

I
[ FUNC [ CHK

[ ZOOM

1 I 1 I 1 1 1 I 1 I

: : : : : : : : : :

Transition Divergence Divergence Line for link Convergence Convergence of selective sequence of simultaneous sequence of selective sequence of simultaneous sequence

Various functions Grammatical checking

Zooming into a subprogram

(i)

Entering a step Position the cursor to the desired input position, then press the [Cl] key. Then, enter a step number and subprogram number.

Pressing the [rl)

key causes a step to be created, assigned.

as shown below

A free step number is automatically

q Sl

I t

STEP ACTION

: Sl : l-l

101

I:1 1

JMP

+- LBL

-L

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

The specified subprogram number (Pi0

in thus example)

is displayed below Sl.

-69-

4. OPERATION

STEP ACTION

: 61 : PlO l-l

To change

the step number,

press the

<Enter

> key to position

the character

cursor

on

STEP and use the [BS] key to change

the number.

STEP ACTION

: Sl(f : PlO l-l

(ii)

Entering Position

a transition the cursor to the desired number input position, then press the [ + ] key

Enter a subprogram

Press the [ + 1 key.

I
InI Sl

PLO0

+ ACTION : l-2

I+_Il==l
number.

It-_l

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

Enter a subprogram

I
[l3lsl

PlOO

+
ACTION : PlOO l-2

-7o-

4. OPERATION

(vii)

Specifying Position

a label for jump destination the cursor to the desired input position (step line), then press the [c LBL] key.

Then, enter a label name.

Press the I+- LBL] key.

IiWI Sk

III

PI0

PlOO

LABEL

: Llo l-l

[l.ll

I II

JMP

LBL

-L

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

Enter a label name.

STEP ACTION

: $1 : PlO l-1

-73-

4.

OPERATION

(viii)

Specifying Position

a label jump the cursor to the dewed input position (step line), then press the [JMPJ key.

Then, enter a label name.

Press the [-

JMP]

key.

t I

LlO

[OISl

to
Ells2 f PlOO .LEBEL : 2-3

[Ul

01

--*JMP

+-LBL

-L

FUNC

CHK

ZOOM

Enter a label name.

+ LlO [UlSl

PlOO I--Tcl]S2 t PlOO

PlOO

--, tY.cl

LEBEL

: Llo 2-3

-74-

4.

OPERATION

Deleting Position

an element the cursor to the element to be deleted. then press the < Delete > key.

In the example selected video. restore

shown

above.

two figures

(elements)

of a selective cursor,

branch

and transition in reverse > key. To

are

Specify To position

the element the cursor above.

to be deleted displayed

with the narrow video, key.

displayed

in reverse

press the <Delete

the state shown

press the (ESC]

--

PlOO

If the <Enter the following

> key is pressed screen is displayed:

in the state shown

above,

the selective

branch

is deleted

and

IO] Sl

PlOtt

-75-

4.

OPERATION

To specify

another

figure,

press the < Delete > key again.

I
IO1 Sl

PlQO
i

Inserting Position an empty To create

an element the cursor to the desired insertion > key. and <Insert > keys position, then press the c Insert > key. To create

row, press the <Insert an empty column,

press the [Shift]

I
IO1 Sl

c ,;,= = = i= = = = ;
dlS2
P2
IP1l

I1

SlO

Cl s20

PlO
t

P20

n
I

s3

n I

Sll

n s21 I : S2 : P200 1-3

STEP ACTION

-76-

4. OPERATION

Press the < Insert > key.

c
PI

1-3

Press the (Shift]

and < Insert > key.

I
101 Sl

c
Pl

============

I
rllS2

n SlO
P2 PlO t r3

I i-l

s20

P20 t

t Ll I

s3

Sll

Ll s21

I
STEP ACTION

I
: s2 : P102
l-3

- 77 -

4. OPERATION

(xi)

Search

Pl ~,=y==
ols2

i ====
El

; = cl s20

SlO

Pl ;. ciilS2 1 u I

Pll t 0 I

P21

SlO

s20

If the [F8] (FUNC) shown below:

key is pressed

in the stale shown

above,

a pop-up

menu

is displayed

as

l-7
Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 Search COPY Move mAin List
I I

Ells3

El Sll

s21

Press the (Fl]

(Search)

key.

A pop-up

menu

is displayed,

as shown

below:

Pl ===========

uls3

F6

Toe

jP7180ttoln

-78-

4. OPERATION

Then, press the [Fl]

(Step)

key.

Another

pop-up

menu is displayed,

as shown

below:

Pl

.xb

La
SI

search

string:%Ai

Position
Toe Bottom

Enter the step number The system

to be searched through

for (S20, for example), the part subsequent

then press the <Enter>

key.

starts searching

to the cursor.

Fl F2 ;: F5

Se Co F1 ",; ;: Li %:

(xii)

Copying

or moving

an element key.

Press the [F8] (FUNC)

Pl =========== f IYISZ I L_) SlO I 1-J s20

Pl I t

Pll t

P21

-79-

4.

OPERATION

When the [FBI (FUNC)

key is pressed,

a pop-up

menu

is displayed

as shown

below:

Pl PI========= Search Copy

Move

Fl F2
F3

F4 F5 :

mAin List

Press the (F2) (Copy)

key.

The system

prompts

the operator

to enter a start point.

Pl =========PI

I
L71s2 cl
SlO

I
Ll s20

Pl
i......+

Pll
1

P21

Specify

ACTION : Start position

l-2

Posltion

the cursor

to the desired > key.

start point (position prompts

2-3 in the example to enter

shown

below),

then

press the <Enter

The system

the operator

the end point.

l-t
i

Pl ===========

I
cl s10

I
17 s20

13JS2

Pl +

Pll t ACTION : End position

P21

Specify

2-3

-8O-

4.

OPERATION

Position

the cursor

to the desired

end point (position prompts

3-4 in the example to specify

shown

below),

then

press the < Enter > key.

The system

the operator

a copy destination.

Pl ===PIIP===I

SpeciEy

ACTION End position

: 3-4

Position

the cursor

to the desired

copy destination

(position

4-3 in the example

shown

below),

then press the < Enter > key.

The specified

part is copied.

t
==I=====

ACTION

: PlOO 4-3

When a part is copied,

The S address The P address

is not copied. is copied.

Assign a free number. change the address.

If required,

-81

4.

OPERATION

(xiir) Returning

from the ZOOM

destination configuration

to the program screen,

configuration

screen

(MAIN). follow the

To return to the program procedure below.

displayed

when editing

was started,

The system

assumes

that the editing is suspended.

of the step sequence

subprogram,

from which the [ZOOM] The edited subprogram

key was pressed,

is not saved in the source

program

file.

Press the [F8] (FUNC)

key.

(t

Pl t==========

I
UlS2
Pl i t 17 SlO

I
u s20

Pll t

P21

After pressing

the [F8] (FUNC)

key

I+

Pl ===========

After pressing

the [F4] (MAIN) key

EDIT(LADDER/STEP

SEQUENCE)

RC~(~TEP SEQ) [A:YFLYDATAYSFC~~] PROGRAM:(STEP SEQUENCE DEMO PROGRAM)

LEVEL1 a PO(fOl u PO008 n]POO21 . t~jPO101

LEVEL2 0 PO002 fl PO009 cl PO022

LEVEL3 n PO004 n PO014 n PO024

u 0 0

PO005 PO015 PO025

0 PO006 fl PO016 fl PO026 . . a]PO406

PO007 PO017 q ]POO27 . . u]PO407

0 0

c-1 PO202

01PO304

tT]]PO405

-82-

4. OPERATION

Following

keys are useful in this screen.

Function

key

Other keys

[ MAIN [ CHANGE
(ZOOM

] :Displaying
configuration

the subprogram screen

< Page up >

: Displaying

previous

screen

< Page down > : Displaying

next screen

] :Creating J :Modifying

a new subprogram a subprogram

Screen

display

U]P200

The subprogram program which

which

is being

edited

is displayed. numbers for which

If the [ZOOM] are arranged the [ZOOM]

key is pressed

to nest the in is

to a certain they are

depth,

the subprogram The subprogram

from the left in the order key was pressed first

nested.

displayed

at the left end.

I0
following

PO008

(ii

PO009

c~] PO014

PO015

fl

PO016

PO017

Subprograms mark:

referenced

by the subprogram

that

is currently

being

edited

are listed

with the

:
subprogram subprogram

0
cl]

: :

Ladder

Step sequence

(xv) Checking

the syntax key.

Press the [CHK]

It

Pl

cl162
Pl

I
II
SlO

Ll

I
s20

Pll t t

P21

-84-

4. OPERATION

When the [ZOOM]

key is pressed, the figure pointed by cursor decides the type of subprogram

which is to be edited.

Figure cl

Meaning of the figure Step sequence subprogram subprogram subprogram

Subprogram

to be edited

Ladder subprogram Ladder subprogram step sequence subprogram

01
n1 t

Initial step sequence block step sequence Transition

Ladder subprogram

(xvii) End of modifying Press the [ESC] key.

Pl ==I======== Save(update) Quit Edit Rename, save Optimize I h quit

Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 I

b quit

Menus

Menu Save Quit Edit End End

Editing Updated

Result of editing

Display Optimized Not optimized

Discarded Continued

Continue

Rename
optimize

End I Continue

Updated I Optimized and continued

Optimized I Optimized

-86-

4. OPERATION

4.5.2.3
l

Symbol & comment editing

the cursor

Moving

< t
<Shift>

>, < +

>, CT

>. <

1 >

Moves Moves

the cursor the cursor

to another to another

field to be edited. position within the field to

+ <t>,<-+>

be edited.

Entering When

a comment a front-end

in Japanese processor for Japanese containing word input is used, a comment can be entered characters characters in is

Japanese. compiled

When a comment (an object

kana characters

or m-type

alphanumeric alphanumeric

file is created),

all the kana characters

and m-type

are replaced

with spaces.

(1) Start

[Operation] 0 Select [SYMBOL] (symbol and comment) from the editing menu.

The following

symbol

and comment

editing

screen

appears:

RDDRESS SYMBOL

COIL_COMWENTB88BBBBB/8BBOBBlL RELRV CONMENI COIL COHNENT RELQV COliNENl-fl COIL C6NNENTki

Xlwm3.8

SYMBOL-A'

Fig. 4.5.2.3

- 87 -

4.

OPERATION

(2)

Entering

a new symbol

and comment can be added at an address to which no symbol or comment is

A new symbol assigned.

and comment

[Operation] m Select [ADD] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

An input window

opens

on the screen.

t
Address field

t
Symbol field Relay

t
COmmenl

t
Coil comment field

Enter an address

in the address

entry field.

$9 The cursor

is positioned

to the symbol

entry field

Enter symbol

data.

45) The cursor

is positioned

to the relay comment

entry field.

G9 Enter relay comment

data.

@I The cursor

is positioned

to the coil comment

entry

field.

(9

Enter coil comment

data.

@I The entered

data is stored,

clearing

the previous

address,

symbol

data, and comment

data

from the window.

When data.

no symbols

and comments

are entered,

the system

is automatically

set to receive

new

(3) Editing

a symbol

and comment

A symbol

and comment

assigned

to an address

can be edited

[Operation] (1) If the system is set to receive new data, select (QUIT] to exit from that state.

Move

the cursor

by pressing

the < + >,

< + >, < ? >, or < 1 ) key and edit the data
the < Shift > key press the -z t) or < + >

To move key.

the cursor

withln

a field, while

pressing

- 88 -

4. OPERATION

(4) Moving a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be moved to another address.

[Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the comment to be moved.

Select

[DELETE].

The following

message

appears

on the screen.

Comment

data copied

to paste buffer

Place the cursor

at the place the comment

is to be moved.

Select

[PASTE]

(5) Copying a comment

A comment assigned to an address can be copied into another address.

[Operation] Ct> Place the cursor on the comment to be copied.

8
0

Select

[COPY].

The following

message

appears

on the screen.

Comment

data copied

to paste buffer

Place the cursor

at the place the comment

is to be copied.

Select

(PASTE].

(6) Searching for a symbol or address

[Operation] 0 Select [SEARCH] on the symbol and comment editing screen.

The following

input window

appears

on Ihe screen.

SEARCH

CO Enter the symbol

or address

to be searched

for and the data number.

-89-

4.

OPERATION

6% The system cursor

searches

for the symbol data.

or address

and the data

number

in that order.

The

is moved

to the searched

(7) Deleting

a symbol and/or comment

(a) Deleting both a symbol and a comment

[Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the NO field.

Select

[DELETE].

Both the symbol

and the comment

are deleted

(b) Deleting either a symbol or a comment ]

or COMMENT field

[Operation

@ Place the cursor on the SYMBOL

Select

[DELETE].

Only the selected

symbol

or comment

is deleted.

(c) Deleting two or more symbols and comments

[Operation] 0 Place the cursor

simultaneously

at the top of the range to be deleted.

Select message

IAREA]. appears

The

entrre

line

is displayed

in reverse

video,

and

the

following

on the screen.

Selectrng

the area

Move the cursor

to the end of the range to be deleted.

Select

[DELETE].

All the data displayed

in reverse

video

is deleted.

(8) Terminating

the symbol and comment editing

[Operation] 0) On the edit screen, select [END] or press the < ESC> key

The following

message

appears

on the screen:

Fl
F2 F3

Save (update) Quit Edit

8 quit

Specify

a desired

option

and return to the edit menu

-9o-

4. OPERATION

(9) Editing

screen

+Symbol entry number CRT/MD1 can display ( SYMBOL

/ Total

--) Coil comment size (byte) CRT/MD1 can display / Total I

EDIT
+YYMBOL

COMMENT

PMC-RB4

<O>[A:vFLYDATAYRB4

NO.

000001/000003 ADDRESS SYMBOL

I

COIL_COMMENT 0000030/00000090 RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT I AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB cccccccccccccccc

(Motel)

00001 X00000.0 AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA 00002 X00000.1 BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB 00003*X00000.2 CCCCC 1 I*' means a symbol data which can be displayed

I I I I AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA-AAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB-BBBBBBBBB ccccccccc-ccccccccc-ccccccccc on CRT/MDI.

,;

..j

2 s;e#tfl

3 .::.#@A : 4

ADD

5 :;;:,:i$ .,...I 6 &TE.. , ,; ,;.,.:I ., :: .a &$&i I,.:: 9 ;..&&&" ,c, &$' '.. .., :. .. .
are displayed with turning at this point in ladder

Note

1)

It is the indicator. diagram editing

Symbol/comment

screen.

(10) Searching
Search

by a part

of strings for specified field, LINE NO./ADDRESS/SYMBOURELAY or COIL

function

is active

COMMENT. Especially strings. 1) Press [SEARCH] and the pop-up menu apears changes to specify strings for search. you can find relay/coil comment, which is too long, by specifing a part of data

Furthermore,

the display

of function-key

as the undermentioned.

I1
2)

NO.

AORS

3 SYMbQL 4 RELAY

.&tl,.

,. : .: .: 8

,I

1. ,:I. 9 1...... .: .

,o

:. ,,

Input strings

and specify

the data kind for searching

by function-key.

A part of strings

is available

only in case of [RELAY]/[COIL].

3)

If search

is success,

cursol

moves

to the found place.

-9l-

4. OPERATION

4.5.2.4

Message editing
can be displayed on the CRT/MD1 screen of the CNC, using the DISPB is created as

An arbitrary message instruction described (SUB below.

41), which is one of the function instructions.

Such a message

(1) Types

and quantity

of characters

that can be used data vary lrom one CNCPMC model to another, as

The types of characters listed below.

usable in message

Characters CNCPMC JIS levels 1 and 2 PMC-Rf33RB4/RB5/RB6/ RC3IRC4 F18 F15B Power Mate (A : Some characters PMC-RA3 PMCNBINB2 n X Full-size

that can be entered Half -size katakana Alphanumeric characters

hiragana

F16

0 0
X

0 0 0 0
LAUUtH.)

0 0 0 0
_----.

PMC-PA3 cannot be drsplayed.

. . . ._ -.--. -. I hey cannot be checked by t-API

The half-srze kana and alphanumenc keys on the keyboard.

characters

can be entered

using the kana and alphanumeric text can be edited is limited

Similarly to symbols and comments, input FEP (front-end processor).

Japanese-language

usrng the Japanese-language as follows:

The number of characters

1) When only full-size Japanese-language characters are used 2) When only half-size kana characters are used
3) When only alphanumeric characters are used

: : :

62 characters 127 characters 256 characters

(2) Edit procedure The edit method language describes that can be used varies between half-size characters) can be the CNCiPMC used and model in which Japanese models. characters This section (excluding other

the procedure

common

to all models

(only alphanumeric

are entered),

using the PMC-RC4

as an example.

(a) Startup [Operation ]

(1) Select [MESSAG]

from the edit menu.

-92-

4.

OPERATION

The following

message

data edit screen

appears.

EDIT

W&AGE) NSSAGE

_~

IO ADDRESS

___001 AOO.0 1234567890ABCOEFCHIJUMOPWSTllWYZ1234567890AlKDEFGHIJKlM~ST UVWXYZ1234567890AKDEFGHIJKUR(DFQRSTUYWXYZ

002 AOO. I

003 A00.2

004 A00.3

Fig. 452.4

(a)

Message

Data Edit Screen

(b) Input

[Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered

Key in the desired

message

data

(c)

Modification

[Operation] (11 Place the cursor on the message address where message data is to be entered.

The character

cursor

moves

on to the message

and blinks there.

Place the cursor

at the location

where

modification

is required,

using the cursor

keys.

@iI Key in the desired

characters

to modify

the message

data.

Press the <Enter

> key.

(d) Search

[TOP]

[BOTTOM]

[Operation] 0) On the message screen, select [TOP] or [BOTTOM].

The cursor

moves

to the start or end message

address.

-93-

4. OPERATION

(e) END
[Operation) 0 On the edit screen, press [END] or < ESC >.

The following

message

appears.

Select

one of the above

items,

and return to the edit menu.

452.5
The address

I/O module editing

of each module in the I/O unit IS set and deleted as described below.

(1) Startup

[Operation]
0 Select [MODULE] (l/O module) from the edit menu.

The following

I/O module

edit screen

appears.

ADDRESS x0000
x0001

GROUP

BASE SLOT

NAME IDl6C lD16C

ADDRESS YOODO
YDOOI

CROUP

BASE SLOT

NME

x0002 x0003 x0004 x0005 X0006 XODDI x0008 x0009 XOOIO x0011 x0012 x0013 x0014 x0015

YODOZ YDDO3 YDW YOOOS vooD6 vooo7 YOOOB YOOO9 YOOIO YODll YDD12 YDD13 YOOl4 YOO15

Fig. 4.5.2.5

(a)

I0 Module

Edit Screen

-94-

4. OPERATION

EDIT II/O ICHANNEL 11 1 ADDRESS xoool x0002 x0003 x0004 x0005 X0006 x0007 XGQOE xOiw9 x0010 XOOII x0012 x0013 x0014 x0015 GROUP i 0 0 0

MDDULE) BASE SLOT 0 i 0 0 Do 00 ii 01 NAUE

PX

\B& ADDRESS YOoilO YOoill YOoO2 YGilO3 YooO4 Yooo5 YOOo6 YOoO7 YOOo6 YOO09 YOOIO YOOll YOO12 Yoo13 YOol4 YOOIS GROUP BASE SLOT NAUE I

xoooo

ux ux
x(1 XI

Fig. 4.5.2.5 (b)

I/O Module Edit Screen (models in which more than one cl annel can be set) (only for models in which more than one channel can be set) .

(2) Channel
(I)

switching

To switch to the next channel:

[Operation] 0
(ii) Select

[NXT.CH].
to the previous channel:

To switch

[Operation)
0 (3) Setting (Operation] 0 Place the cursor on the start address when a module is to be set.

Select [PRV.CH].

Key in the module

address

in the following

format:

GROUP.BASE.SLOT.NAME

(Note 1)

The module or l/O unit.

name

that can be specified [HELP]

may vary depending the module names

on the model

of the PMC in

Selecting

can display

that can be displayed

the NAME field.

(Note 2)

The I/O unit MODEL-B GROUP BASE SLOT

is allocated a group

as follows: in the configuration.

: : :

Specify

number

Must be fixed at 0. Specify power the unit number ON/OFF information of the I,0 Unit-B. Alternatively, set to 0 if

## is to be allocated.

4.

OPERATION

[Input item] COUNTER DATA TYPE specifies whether the format of a counter value used with the CTR

This parameter

function instruction is to be binary or BCD.

lnitral value

0 : BINARY

Setting

0 : BINARY / 1 : BCD

LADDER

EXEC (ladder execution time) specifies an incremental setting reduces ladder processing scan time, time for the first and second ladder thus achieving high-speed ladder

This parameter levels. execution. This

Initial value

100

Setting range

1 to 150

The table below indicates ladder execution ms.

I time status during an execution

penod of 8

First and second level processing

time

Note
l l l

however,

that increased

ladder execution

time on the first and second

levels

reduces the following processing times: PMC screen display time Language program processing time

Ladder processing time on the third level

LANGUAGE As the

EXEC RATIO program and PMC screen display have the same priority, this

language

parameter
l l l

specifies the percentage

of the following processing times:

PMC screen display time Language program processing time Processing time of third-level Ladder program cyclically.

While the PMC screen is displayed, a language program can be executed

Initial value

50

Setting range

0 to 99

-99-

4. OPERATION

LANGUAGE This

ORIGIN specifies the start address of the link control statement data of a

parameter program.

language

Initial value

000000

Setting

range

Address area

in the language

program

storage

I
is no language program,

I
OOOOOOH.

When there

specify

OPERATOR

PANEL

(connectinq whether in this

an FO machine a machine parameter,

operators operators

panel) panel DVDO is used with the FSO. where the

This parameter When YES

specifies

is specified panel panel, is actually

specify

the

addresses transferred

operators operators

connected,

an address

for key images transferred

from the panel.

and an addresses

for LED images

to the operators

itial value

0 : NO

Setting

0 : NO 1 1 : YES

KEY DI ADDRESS Specify the start address connected. (PMC address) of the external DI where the operators

panel is actually

Settrng

range

X0 to X127,

Xl000

to X1019

ii)

KEY DO ADDRESS Specify the start address connected. (PMC address) of the external DO where the operators

panel is actually

Setting

range

YO to Y127,

YlOOO

to Y1014

iii)

KEY BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Specify programs. Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set. the start address (PMC address) of key images referenced by user

iv)

LED BIT IMAGE ADDRESS Specify programs. Usually an arbitrary internal relay area is set. the start address (PMC address) of LED images referenced by user

- loo-

4. OPERATION

4.5.3 4.5.3.1

Printout Overview
program can be printed out.

A sequence

(1) Compatible This software

printers is usable with the printers listed below.

EPSON

VP1 000 (default

setting)

NEC PR201H FANUC PRINTER

(Note)

To use a NEC PR201H

derails. see Section

and FANUC

PRINTER,

a program

modilication

is required.

For

4.5.3.6.

(2) General

flow of operation for printout. IOffline [PRINT] <F2> I (Specifyoutput

t [SETUP]

Fig. 4.5.3.1

Operation

Flow of Printout

- 101-

4. OPERATION

453.2
Printing

Starting and ending printing

is performed according to the following procedure.

SYSIEM PRRAWETER SYMBOL 8 COMWFNI LROOER OIRGRRH STEP SEOUENCE OIRGRRH I/O HOOULt HESSRGE CROSS REFERENCF LIST BII ROORESS MRP [OPTION1 INOm1 IOPTIONI '"PTIONI 8% 'ml1 rurlION1

Fig. 4.5.3.2

Drawing

Output

Menu

(Operation] ci, Set the desired print format by pressing F2 [SETUP]. (See Section 4.5.3.4.)

b,

Set the desired

output

items.

(See Section

4.5.3.3.)

CZ Start printing

by pressrng

Fl (PRINT].

Press F9 [BREAK]

to suspend

printing.

C!

Press FlO [END]

or the < Esc > key to terminate

the print menu

display.

Note 1) Note 2)

Perform

steps iI> and 8

only when the settings

must be changed.

Some

print formats starting

that cannot

be set in step 0) may be set by editing For details, see Section 4.535.

the setting

file before

FAPT LADDER-II.

-102-

4. OPERATION

453.3

Output item setting

as described below. More than one item can be on the model of the PMC.

Items to be output to a drawing are specified specified at a time.

Some set items may not be displayed, depending

(1) Specifying

output

of each

data item

Specify whether

a data item is to be output, by pressing the < 7 > key or < 1 > key after

positioning the cursor with the < c > key or c + > key on the drawing output menu screen.

(2) Option

specification position the cursor to the desired screen will appear. To set the

When specifying a data item for which options are available, option, then press the < Enter :, key.

The option specification

option, enter the desired value, then press the < Enter > key.

(3) Detail a)

of each data time

Title printing The data of the title is printed.

b)

Parameter

printing is printed.

The data of the system parameters c) Symbol printing The symbol comment

data is printed.

:\DRTF!\SflWPLE

1 PRINT 1 ,rn 8 r~coIL/RLLl

SYMBOL

STRRT LINE NUMBER END LINE NUMBER APPOINT COWHENT

FlB

( ESC 1

END

Fig. 453.3

(a)

Symbol Print Option Menu

- 103 -

4.

OPERATION

i)

Option (symbol printing)

. .

When

printing symbol/comment

data,

specify

an output

range.

When

0 is

specified as the print end line number, all data up to the last line is printed. Comment [RELAY] [COIL] [ALL] specification

: Prints relay comment data. : Prints coil comment data. : Prints both relay comment data and coil comment data.

d)

Ladder diagram printing A ladder diagram is printed.

r--

END

_J

Fig. 4.533

(b)

Ladder Print Option Menu

i)

Optton (ladder diagram printing) The output unit, net range, page break, and cross-reference of a ladder

diagram

to be printed is output

are specified. as a list file, the unit of printout must be specified as a

If a diagram module.

If 0 is set as the output continues If a page every up to the last net. break is specified,

end net when

a range

of nets is specified,

printing

a page

break

is made

in the ladder

diagram

at

new file or subprogram. is specified, (Fig. 4.5.3.3 (h)) the ladder diagram is accompanied with a

If a cross-reference cross-reference. Relay information [SYMBOL] [RELAY COMMENT]

: Prints symbol data. : Prints relay comment data.

- 104-

4.

OPERATION

e)

Printing of step sequence figure Step sequence figure is printed i) Option (Step sequence figure printing)

:\DtllA\SRWPLE

I 1 oRLLn5m5l r~/vEsl

STEP SEDUENCE PAINT PRINT UNIT MODULE NM SUE-PRDGRRM NUMBER

FlB

t tsc

END

,-a3333momm Fig. 4.5.3.3 (c)

-__Step Sequence Print Option Menu

PRINT UNIT Specify whether a step sequence figure will be printed for a single subprogram or all subprograms. When printing a figure for a single subprogram, specify the subprogram name for MODULE NAME.

SUB-PROGRAM

NUMBER

Specify whether subprogram number Pxxx will be printed for each step. f) I10 module printing The I/O module data is printed.

9) Message printing
The message data is printed.

\DRTR\SRMPLE

- --I

MESSRGE

PRINT

RDDRESS RRNGE STRRT ADDRESS tND ADDRESS

rn

18 I FSC I

END

Fig. 4.5.3.3 (d)

Message Print Option Menu

- 105 -

4. OPERATION

i)

Option

(message

printing) to be printed is specified.

The range of messages

h)

Cross-reference A cross-reference

list printing list is printed

Fig. 4.5.3.3

(e)

Cross Reference

List Print Option

Menu

i)

Option CHECK Check DUPLICATE multiple WRITE to a coil and counter). multiple use of same number functional

writing

instruction APPOINT Specify

(ex. timer, ADDRESS

the range of printing

address.

It can be specified

as below.

Table 453.3 Address ALL Initial letter of an address Bit address Byte address specification mode

Cross-Reference Example of keying in ALL

List Address

Specification Address to be output

I I All addresses

Y
Rl .O x10

IAll addresses
I Specified Specified (including

having

a specified only

initial letter

bit addresses byte addresses bit addresses)

Address

range

FlO.O-F12.7 X2.3-END (Note 1)

All addresses All addresses

in a specified

range address

after a specified

(Note

1)

When

an address

specification

is made,

addresses P.

are output

in the sequence: therefore,

X, Y,
all

F, G. R, A, C, K, D, T, variable subsequent addresses are output.

address,

In this

example,

Y and

-106-

4. OPERATION

APPOINT Specify

COMMENT the kind of comment data

RELAY COIL

Print Relay comment. Print Coil comment.

ii)

Bit address

map map is printed.

The bit address

.\DAlA\SRMPLE

BIT ADDRESS MAP PRINT OUTPUT RDDRESS RPPDINT RDDRESS

FIB

I FSC

FND

Fig. 4.5.3.3

(f)

Bit Address

Map Print Option

Menu

iii)

Option

(Bit address address

map)

Output ALL

All available (Including

addresses Not used which

are printed. addresses.) are used in a sequence program are printed.

USED

The addresses specifications the range

Address Specify h) Cross

of outputting

addresses.

For details,

refer

Fig. 4.5.3.3

(f) in

Reference.

-107-

4.

OPERATION

(1)

Printout

example

by F2[SETUP]

(print menu)

<graphical

mode printout > Initial step

<ASCII I Sl : Pl + PlOO c-L1 * s210 : PlOl + P150

mode printout > f Initial step

Pl PlOO + c-L1 0 s210 fP160 Divergence of selective sequence cDivergence of simultaneous I sequence 0 S217 -Convergence of simultaneous sequence Step 4 ( Label Transition

Transition Label

e + P160

Divergence

S211

S215

s211

: P151 + P152

; S215 : P161
+ P162

of selective sequence t-Divergence of simultaneous sequence S217 : P165 f-Convergence of simultaneous sequence
4

* s212 : P153 + P154

; S216 : P163 + 164 44

Step

Convergence

of selective sequence Block step

Convergence

El*

SlOOO

of selective sequence Block step

: P2000
+ P102

Jump

->Ll

Jump

(2) Printout

example

by SUB-PROGRAM

NUMBER

[NO/YES]

-z Not print sub program number > l-

< Print sub program number >

AlSl
PlOO c-L1 0 5210 i-f P160 /j+i

1
Fig. 4.5.3.3 (i)

Pl

Sub program number

PlOO +=-Ll l--J s210

P160

Example of Printout of Step Sequence

Diagram (l/2)

- 109-

4. OPERATION

(3) Printout

example

of more than one page.

El

Cl

0 t
I

tt d
Cl Cl cl
tttll

q r-l-l
cl cl cl cl
22 element (28 element)

Size of one page

tttt

cl

cl

cl

cl

14 element

Note)

The maximun element count for printing without sub-program number is given in parentheses.

(l/3)

q
7G-l cl cl t cl ttt vl v2 t Cl VI 0 tt cl J 0 t v2 Cl

cl p=>: 0

<- L>

r5=>-, L

Link number

(33)

< - Number of a sub program

Cl

cl

t
v3

Cl
4= > J (23)

v3 0

= >4 cl

Fig. 4.5.3.3

(I)

Example of Printout of Step Sequence

Diagram (2/2)

-llO-

4. OPERATION

4.5.3.4
Specify

Print format-l:
printer forms

SETUP

menu
as described below.

and a print format

PtlPER SIZE

/ LADDER PRINT

15 INCH/ RSCII 15 INCH/ GRRPHIC

Fig. 4.5.3.4

SETUP

Menu Screen

[Operation

]
F2 [SETUP] menu from the output screen appears. item (e.g., forms size/ladder diagram print format) with the item selection screen.

Select

@I The SETUP @I Position

the cursor

to a desired

< t > or < 1 > key. @I Select 6) Position the item by pressing the cursor
7

the < Enter > key. desired item (e.g., 10 INCHIASCII) by pressing the screen with the < 7 >,

to the

< 1 >,
item

< c >, or -z -+
@ If FlO [END] selection

key, then make the selection after forms selection,

the < Enter 7 key. display returns to the output

is selected

screen.

(1) Forms Specify format

size/ladder a forms

diagram size.

print format specify (GRAPHIC). is indicated by *. whether to print the ladder diagram in character

In addition, format

(ASCII) or graphic specified

The currently

output

format

-lll-

4. OPERATION

4.5.3.5

Print format-2 (AMOFTRP, DAT/* .INF/message

file of this software format shown can be rewritten

file)
using frames a commercially can be changed. -PR201-10 . INF PR201-15 . INF PR201-A4 INF PRlO-A INF PRl5A INF PRA4-A : INF ESC-P-10 INF ESC-P-15 . INF ESCPl O-A. INF ESCPIS-A. INF -FANUC-10. INF available text editor -5

Each parameter that the output

in each of the following DAT the paper name top margin net interval printer model

-AMROFTRP. [Diagram output ]b + 1. 2. 3. 4. Change selection Set the Set the Set the paper

and

-CROSSINF.

DAT

--f

(Setting the cross-reference list output format) 8. 9. 10. 11. 12. 13. Set the guidance Set the Specify Set the guidance Specify Specify output format information output information the output format read/write coil information the linefeed the page break 5. 6. Set the line spacing Set the left margin

-(Message --)
7.

file)

Set the title 01 printout

For these parameter

files, do not change

any item not described

here.

-112-

4. OPERATION

(1) Changing selection.

the paper selection

name

This item makes it possible to change the name of each choice during diagram output format

Name of file to be edited AMROFTRP.DAT

Point of change

Settings

#l O-A = 1O-inch/ASCII #l O-G = 1O-inch/graphic #15-A = 15inch/ASCII #15-G = 15_inch/graphic #A4L-A = A4 portrait/ASCII #A4L-G = A4 portrait/graphic

Arbitrary character string consisting of up to 30 half-size (or 15 full-size) characters

(Note) (2) Settlng

#A4L-A= and #A4L-G =are unavailable in the output to VPlOOO. the top margin

This item makes it possible to specify the top margin of a diagram when it is output.

Name of file to be edited AMROFTRP.DAT

Point of change

Settings

TOPMGL = 0 TOPMG = 0 (for each form)

Decimal number

(3) Setting

the spacing between the LADDER net

By modifying this item, the spacing between the LADDER nets used during diagram printout can be changed in the manner shown below.

NO0003 C 00001 0 HHF

NO0003 C YO.7 00001 NO0004 YO.7 00001 YO 1 D

II

II
YO.0 *00006

NO0004

l 00006

NO0005 E

HHbl)L,,
YO.1

YO.0
+00006 YO.2 +00008 NO0005

YO.7
00001

YO.1

YO.7 00001

-lHHIL-ilF
YO.0 +00006 YO.1

YO.7 00001

YO.2 *00008

When LCNTL = 4

When LCNTL = 5

-113-

4.

OPERATION

File edited AMROFTRP.DAT

Modifications LCNTL = 4 (Set for each sheet) Specify either

Settings 4 or 5 ,

(4) Setting the printer model and print paper

This item
selection.

can

change

the

printer

model

and

print

paper

that

are

specified

during

paper

Name of file to be edited AMROFTRP. DAT

Point of change #l O-A

*.INF that can be set PRlO_A INF PR201_10 . INF ESCPlO A.INF ESC_P_iO. INF FANUC_10. INF PRlO_A .INF PR201_10 .INF ESCPlO A. INF ESC_P_iO. INF FANUC_10. INF PRlS_A .INF PR201_15 .INF ESCP15 A.INF ESC_Pj5. INF PRlS_A .INF PR201_15 .INF ESCP15_A.INF ESC_P-15. INF PRA4_A PR201_A4 .INF INF

Printer

name

Print paper type/print 1O-inch 1O-inch 1 O-inch 1 O-inch continuous continuous continuous continuous

mode

:
C.-FILE =

PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1000 FANUC printer PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000 FANUC printer PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000 PR201 PR201 VP1000 VP1 000 PR201 PR201

form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic form/ASCII form/graphic

1O-inch continuous 1O-inch 1 O-inch 1 O-inch 1 O-inch 1 O-inch 15inch 15-inch 15-inch 15inch continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous continuous

#10-G

C.-FILE =

#15-A

C;FILE #15-G

C-FILE

15inch continuous 15-inch continuous 15-inch continuous 15-inch continuous A4 portrait, A4 portrait,

#A4L-A : (Note) C.-FILE = #A4L-G : (Note) C.-FILE =

cut sheet/ASCII cut sheet/graphic

PRA4_A PR201_A4

INF .INF

PR201 PR201

A4 portrait, A4 portrait,

cut sheet/ASCII cut sheet/graphic

(Note)

#A4L-A = and (#A4L-G

= are unavailable

in the output

to VPIOOO.

- 114-

4. OPERATION

(5) Setting

the line spacing The file to be edited is

This item can specify the line spacing of a diagram when it is output. the one specified according to the descriptions in Section 1.4.4.

Name of file to be edited .INF LPI LDRLPf

Point of change

Settings

(H) (1B) (C) (T20) ; (H) (18) (C) (T15) ;

(H) (18) (C) (T < decimal number > ) ; (H) (1B) (C) (Tcdecimal number >) ;

(6) Setting

the left margin The file to be edited is the

This item can specify the left margin of a diagram when it is output. one specified according to the descriptions in (4).

Name of file to be edited .INF LMARGIN

Point of change

Settings

(H) (1B) (C) (LOOO) ;

(H) (1B) (C) (Lcdecimal

number>)

-115-

4. OPERATION

(7) Setting the title of printout

This item can change the title of a diagram when it is output.

Vame of file to be
edited .PRTOUT. .PRTOUT. JPN. ENG.

Point of change

Settings

@ SYSTITLE (SYSTEM 8 PARAMETER -)

(C) ( <any

character

string consisting (or 30 full-size)

of up to 60 half-size characters > ) ;

@ CMT.TITLE

(-

SYMBOL

& COMMENT

-)

@ LAD-TITLE
(LADDER DIAGRAM -)

@ STEP-TITLE
(STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM -)

@ IO-TITLE
(I0 MODULE DATA -)

@ MSG.TITLE
(MESSAGE DATA -)

@ TIT.TITLE
(TITLE DATA -)

@ CRSTITLE (CROSS-REFERENCE -)

@ BKTITLE
(BIT ADDRESS MAP -)

(Note

1)

These

point of changes

are in the file, ILPRTOUT.

ENG.

(Note 2)

Half-size

katakana

characters

cannot

be used.

(8) Setting the cross-reference

list output format guidance

to be output

lnformatlon
informatron to be output during with no semicolon at the beginning

This item can specify

cross-reference listing. are valid as guidance

characters

as guidance
file, lines

In the CROSSINF.DAT information.

Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT GUIDE =

Point of change

Settings

Any character to 19 bytes

string consisting

of up

-116-

4.

OPERATION

(9) Setting the cross-reference

both step and net numbers the CROSSINF.DAT information.

list output information

information. If In are specified, which is to be printed first can also be specified. at the beginning are valid as cross-reference

This item can specify step and/or net numbers to be output as cross-reference
file, lines with no semicolon

Jame of file to be edited :ROSSINF.DAT NET-INF = STEP-INF

Point of change

Settings

When only the net number is output: = NET-INT STEP-INF = 1 =0

When only the step number is output: NET-INT STEP-INF =0 = 1

When the net and step numbers are output in the stated sequence: NET-INT STEP-INF = 1 =2

When the step and net numbers are output in the stated sequence: NET-INT STEP-INF =2 = 1

(10) Specifying the cross-reference This item enables

numbers. a character In the CROSSINF.DAT

list output format

string to be printed at the beginning of the step and net file, lines with no semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT FORM =

Point of change

Settings

Character

string + %s

(Note)

Only letters in lowercase

are valid as %s.

-117-

4. OPERATION

(11)

Setting

the cross-reference

list read/write

coil guidance

informatlon file, lines with no

This item can set a comment

about coil attributes.

In the CROSSINF.DAT

semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT READ = WRITE =

Point of change

Settings

Character 13 bytes.

string consisting of up to

READ = -1 IWRITE = -( )-

-1 ! I-

-( / )- :

(12)

Specifying

the cross-reference

list linefeed addresses. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines with no

This item can insert a space line between semicolon at the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT NL=

Point of change

Settings

Decimal number

(Note)

In this case, addresses. addresses.)

space lines as many as the specified (If 0 is specified as the linefeed

value plus 1 are inserted line is inserted

between between

count, no space

(13)

Specifying

the cross-reference

list page

break address types. In the CROSSINF.DAT file, lines

This item can specify a page break between with no semicolon al the beginning are valid.

Name of file to be edited CROSSINF.DAT FF=

Point of change

Settings

0 = the page is not advanced

1 = the page is advanced

-118-

4.

OPERATION

Environment

settings for diagram printout - example

1 (settings in file AMROFTRP.DAT)

When 1 is selected as the printout paper

#PAPER = 10-G = 10 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 213 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 L TOPMGL = 0 . TOPMG = 0 . LCNTL = 4 L C-FILE =PRlO_A.INF 4Fl;E = PRTDAT.DMP

Changing the types of printout paper The name is changed from 1:lO inch to l:NEC 10. see Fig. 52(e) in Part I.) *

I #IO-A

Changing the upper margin (The upper margin is set to * 5 characters.) Changing the types of printout paper (The name is changed from * 2:15 inch to 2:EPSON 10. See Fig. 5.2(e) in Part I.)

#PAPER = 10-G #lo-A=NEC 10 LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 2/3 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 5 TOPMG = 0 LCNTC = 4 C_FILE=PRlO_A.INF RF&E = PRTDAT.DMP #lo-G=EPSON 10 LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 10 WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 151120 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 0 TOPMG = 0 LCNTL = 4 C-FILE = ESCPlO_A.INF OF&E = PRTDAT.DMP #15-A = 15 inch/ASCII LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 15 WIDTH = 15 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 16 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 1 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 TOPMGL = 0 TOPMG = 0 LCNTL = 5 C-FILE = PR 15_A.INF yE&l;E = PRTDAT.DMP II #15-G = 15 Inch

When 2 is selected as . the printout paper

e I1 O-G = 10 Inch/graphic LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = IO WIDTH = 10 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/l 20 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 213 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 14 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 0 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 . TOPMGL = 0 * TOPMG = 0 * LCNTL = 4 . C-FILE = PR201_10.INF $Fl;E = PRTDAT.DMP +#15-A=151nch/ASCIl LENGTHL = 11 LENGTH = 11 WIDTHL = 15 WIDTH = 15 PITCHL = 15/l 20 PITCH = 20/120 LINESL = 83 LINES = 55 RATIOL = 2/3 RATIO = 213 GRAMODL = 16 GRAMOD = 16 ANKMODL = 1 ANKMOD = 1 LEFTMGL = 0 LEFTWG = 0 . TOPMGL = 0 * TOPMG = 0 + LCNTL = 4 + C FILE = PR15 A.INF O-FILE = PRT6AT.DMP &ND + #15-G = 15 Inch .

Changing the type of printer * (The printer is changed to EPSON VP1000 and the paper is changed to lo-inch forms.)

When 3 is selected as the printout paper

Changing the spacing between the LADDER nets _ * [The net spacing for the LADDER diagram is widened.)

(Note)

An asterisk (*) indicates data which can be modrfied.

-119-

..

4.

OPERATION

Environment

settings

for diagram

printout

- example

2 (settings

in file PR201_10.INF)

PRZOlH3 CNTINF CRLF FORMF

CPI

*
* *

CANCEL LDRCPI LPI LDRLPI LMARGIN RMARGIN LDRCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET I .

(H)(W(C)(T20); (H)(W(C)(T15); (H)(W(C)(LOOO); (H)(W(C)(/O7W (H)(W(C) (50014); (H)(W(C)(K); (H)(W(C)(H); . .

Setting the spacing between lines (Line spacing is set to 25.) I 1

Setting

the left margin is set to 5

(Left margin characters.)

PRZOlH3 CNTINF CRLF FORMF

( I~~I~~j"A): .

CANCEL CPI
LDRCPI LPI LDRLPI LMARGIN RMARGIN LDRCHAR JPNSET JPNRESET 3

(H)(W(C) (Q); (H)(W(C)(T25); (H)(W(C)(T15); (H)(W(C)(LOO5) (H)(W(C)(/O7B) (H) (1B) (C) (JO014 (H)(W(C)(Q (H)(W(C)(H);

U-W$ (H) (1B) (C) (H) ;

. , . i;

(Note)

An astensk

(*) indtcates

data which can be modified.

- 120-

4.

OPERATION

Environment
l Sample

settings setting

for diagram

output

- example
file

3 (sample

setting

1 of the CROSSINF.DAT

file)

of the CROSSINF.DAT

: GUIDE=STEP No./NET NET-INF=2 STEP-INF=l FROM=S%s/N%s READ=-1 I- -I/IWRITE=-()-(/INL=l FF=O ;

No.

: :

0 Sample

cross reference

output

[A:\FLADDER\SAMPLE]
l l l

Cross reference Symbol Comment

***

STEP NO./NET
Address x0.0 -II----#-

PAGE 1 No.

: S00045/N00009 S00088/N00020 : S00050/N00010 S00077/N00029

S00049/N00012 SOOO94/NOOO2 S00054/N00012

S00053/N00013

S00082/N00017

x0.1 --it-#

S00059/N00015

S00065/N00017

YO.0

Double

writing

--O--CD-:

S00045/N00009

S00128/N00062

S00256/N00098

RO.0 --It--+-

--@-

: S00009/N00003 S00022/N00010 S00047/N00019 : SOOOO2/N00001

S00012/N00008 S00024/N00012 S00074/N00032

S00014/N00009 S00033/N00015 S00079/N00035

S00015/N00010 S00045/N00017

- 121-

4.

OPERATION

Environment
l

settings setting

for diagram

output

- example
file

4 (sample

setting

2 of the CROSSINF.DAT

file)

Sample

of the CROSSINF.DAT

: GUIDE=Step number NET-INF=O STEP-INF=l FROM=S%s READ=read WRITEwrite NL=O FF=O ;

0 Sample

cross

reference

output

(A:\FLADDER\SAMPLE] *** Cross reference

*** Step number

PAGE 1

Symbol Comment Address x0.0 : 500045 SO0049 SO0053 Read

SO0082 SO0065

SO0088 SO0077

SO0094

x0.1 Read YO.0

Write

: SO0050 : SO0045 : SO0009 so0047 : soooo2

SO0054 SO0128 SO0012 so0074

SO0059 SO0256 SO0014 so0079

Double

writing

RO.0
Read Write

SO0015

SO0022

SO0024

SO0033

SO0045

- 122-

4. OPERATION

4.5.3.6

Changing the printer specification

of installation, the default printer is set to EPSON VPlOOO.

Upon the completion

(1) Changing
described installed

the printer specification

below. (In the following

lo NEC PR201
change the setting file by means is drive of the procedure is example, the floppy disk drive A, FAPT LADDER

To enable output to an NEC PR201 printer,

under the C: \ FLADDER directory,

and the file is changed

from the DOS prompt.)

[Operation] OCopy the AMROFTRP.PR system floppy file from the APPENDIX directory of Volume 5 of the FAPT

LADDER-II

disks to the FAPT LADDER-II

install directory.

Example:

C: \ CD FLADDER C: \ FLADDER

< Enter > A: \ APPENDIX \ AMROFTRP.PR C: < Enter >

> COPY

@I Delete

the AMROPTRP.DAT

file from the FAPT LADDER-II

install directory.

Example:

C: \ FLADDER

> DEL

AMROPTRP.DAT

Enter >

0 Change

the name of the AMROFTRP.PR

file to AMROPTRP.DAT.

Example:

C: \ FLADDER

> RENAME

AMROFTRP.PR

AMROPTRP.DAT

< Enter >

Note)

To reenable output to the EPSON VP1000 AMROFTRP.PR with AMROFTRP.ESC.

printer,

perform

steps @ through

0,

replacing

(2) Changing

the printer specification (4).

to a FANUC printer

For details, see Section 453.5

Note)

FANUC Please

PRINTER

is connected

to a serial port with RS-232-C mode from DOS prompt before

cable. starting FAPT LADDER-II by

set the communication command. When connected C:/ > MODE

the following (Example)

to a serial port COMl. < Enter >

COM1:4800,N,8.2

-123-

4. OPERATION

4.5.4 Compilation
During PMC. RAM compilatron, Uncompiled for the PMC. an edited programs source cannot program is translated into an object file executable by the or and

be transferred be performed

to the ROM writers in one of two

(PMC writer modes:

or FA writer) mode

Compilation (except

can

normal

condensed

mode.

PMC-PAB.)

Source program 6

I
mode program can be compiled in condensed mode. in condensed mode, mode. As a result, condensed mode area can be allocated. Normal mode Condensed Ladder

----)

Transferred and PMC

to the ROM writers

Condensed

A source

When

a ladder object

with the same file is smaller

number than that

of steps is compiled created rn normal

the size of the created

has the advantages

listed below:

A larger C language

mode

Ladder Object file

C language

t C
language

Time required

for compilation

is reduced.

Time required

for transfer

from the personal

computer

to the PMC is reduced.

A ROM module

with a smaller

capacity

may be used.

- 124-

4. OPERATION

On the other hand, condensed

mode has the restrictions described

below.

<iI

Memory

map changes

(area expansion)

are likely to occur when

instructions,

symbols, in In

comments, condensed

and so forth are added when a ROM format file generated mode is transferred

by compilation

to the PMC and edited with the built-in editing function.

this case, the user needs to pay attention to possible overlap between C language area.

the ladder area and

ROM format file

.

Ladder

&
.,. .:.

. ..

,......

Overlap (A C language program map change is required.)

C
language

b,

A ROM format file generated a ROM format file generated

by compilation in condensed by compilation in normal mode.

mode cannot be compared

with

Changing the order of subprograms

When a program is compiled, to a single ROM subprogram file.

the source program,

subdivided into subprograms, are arranged

is converted order of

Within the ROM file, subprograms The order in which subprograms

in ascending

numbers.

are displayed on the edit screen of the may be changed compiled, after the source

built-in programmer

function of the PMCRB4

or PMC-RC4 decompiled,

program has been uploaded to FAPT LADDER,

and downloaded.

4.5.4.1
(1) Start

Start and terminate

[Operation]

0 @

Select [compil] (compile) from the offline menu. The compile screen appears.

Compile
Source

PMC-RB4
name

[C:~CFLADDERY

program

Output

to

ROM

format

file

SYMBOL 6 COMMENT NET COMMENT

[F6] (F7]

YES POINTERS

ONLY

EXEC

DOS

OEND

Fig. 4.5.4.1

(a)

Compile Menu Screen

-125-

4. OPERATION

General

Flow of Operation

for compiling

Offline menu

I
Fig. 4.5.4.1 (b)

Offline

menu

I
Operation and Screens

Compiling

General

(2) Compile
(a) Normal mode compile processing is always performed in condense mode.

With PMCPA3,

[Operation]

Select Compile

Fl [EXEC]. processing is performed in normal mode.

0
(b) Condense mode

[Operation]

Select Compile

F8 [CONDNS]. processing is performed in condense mode.

0
(3) Displaying Pressing object The file. results of compile the results F2 [MAP]

of compile

processing of compile processing displays a memory map for the

after the completion

processing

are

displayed or warning

by pressing has been

F3 [ERROR] Moreover,

on

the

compile of

screen, compile

regardless processing

of whether are output

an error

output. below.

the results

lo a text-format

file, as described

C:YDATAYSAMPLE

t Output the compile result in two passes. tttC# PASS1 ##tilt MESSAGE SYMBOL LEVELl.NLA (00111net)tNet No. Ladder program exists beyond END1 instruction. in each LEVELZ.#LA subprogram. Pl.#LA PZ.#LA There is no SP instruction at the top of the subprogram. #Wt## PASS2 #tl#t

Compile completed

Error count =00002 Warning count =OOOOO

Fig. 4.5.4.1. (c) Compile result

PASSl: PASS2:

Convert to object Syntax check

- 126-

4. OPERATION

If many

errors

have

occurred, or by printing

those

errors

can be easily

identified

by viewing

the relevant

file

wtth the text editor

out the file. using a utility function. (See Section 4.5.9.)

The results of execution

can also be displayed

Example:

When

the program directory:

shown

below

is compiled,

the following

files are output

lo the

C:VDATA Execution

result file SAMPLE.ERR

Map file SAMPLE.MAP

Compile Source program name

PMC-RB4 :C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[C:yFLADDERSr'

..::_':'::'.:$,: .:il':.",:'.' ::::I::' :,;:.:<::y::jj qij!::,:; .j: .:.(.,,:, . . '.:j:.. .." 5. ,.',::.':,,.: ;,:.:. '.. . . . Compile Rormal End ,.; :,..,..

Compile completed

error count=000000

warning count=000000

EXEC

2HAP

3ERROR
Fig. 4.5.4.1

5
(d) Complile Completed Screen

OEND

(4) DOS command You can call MS-DOS If you want to terminate shell from FAPT LADDER this, key in the command by pushing as bellow F9 (DOS) at MS-DOS key. command line.

vA:\>EXITl

(5) Termination [Operation] 0 Select [END] or press the < Esc > key.

@I The screen

drsplay

returns

to the main menu

screen.

- 127-

4. OPERATION

4.5.4.2 Compile options

These options initial value can be changed option set-up.) at the Program option set-up.

(Refer to 4.5.7 Program

(1)

F6 [SYMBOL] Select whether output symbols or not output which the symbol & comment data to ROM format (7bytes file. or more file. symbols) and

However.the

can not be displayed to them never output

on CRT/MD1 to ROM format

the coil comments

assigned

YES: The

(Default

setting) can be displayed to them are output on CRT/MDI. on CRT/MDl(Gbytes to object file. or less symbols) and the coil

symbols

which

comments

assigned

They can be displayed

"NO"

No symbol/coil Any symbol

comment

is converted

to object

file. on CRT/MDI.

and coil comment

is not displayed

(2)

F7 [NETCMT] If Net comment (Note2) is output is used to object in ladder program, you can choose whether Net comment pointer

file or not.

POINTERS To edit LADDER, However, the

ONLY ladder

: (Default
program

setting) by CNC built-in editor and decompile the data by FAPT

select ladder

this setting. size gets larger because Net comment pointer is output to object file.

"NO"
format

Any Net comment file is saved. decompile

pointer

is not output

to object

file. In this case,

ladder

size in the ROM

However,

the object

file makes

its net comment

data information

lost.

Note 1)

Net comment personal Compiled Only output Net

has its own

character

information

only

in a source

program

on the

computer. ROM format comment file does not include pointer( = information any net comment of net characters. position.) can be

comment NOP.

to ROM format

file as an functional helps

instruction

This Net comment ROM format file

pointer that

to restore on CNC

net comment built-in editor

date at decompiling and uploaded to

the FAPT

is edited

LADDER.

-128-

4. OPERATION

4.5.4.3
This function It enables The

Password set function

is supported only in the FS15B16/18/21 during compilation. ladder programs from option. being displayed to 4.5.7 or edited Setting on the program -B.

a password

to be added

password

can be used

to prohibit

CRT/MDI. options.)

This function

requires

to be set the program

(Refer

(1) Password

types
types. of up to 8 alphanumeric characters. consists

There are two password Each password

We
Password Password

Use
Password Password to allow display to allow display on the CNC and editing on the CNC

(R) (RAN)

(2) Password setting

(compile)

When no password

Goto@.

When password After compilation

RW & R, RW or R [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to specify

whether

to use a password.

Do you

enter

password?

(Y/N)

To set a password,

press l-lY I
to set a password, press

+ If password
If password +Goto@.

RW & R or R go to 0. RW go to 8.

If it is unnecessary

N l-l

- 129-

4.

OPERATION

The password

(R) set screen

appears.

Enter password

(R)

Enter a password.

A password Uppercase

that can be used is a combination and lowercase letters

of 8 or less letters

and/or

numerals. (If a lowercase

are not distrnguished

from each other.

letter is entered,

it is assumed to use space,

to be uppercase.) kana, kanji, and special characters (such as *, #, and @).

It is impossible
Some character

strings are unusable. string is entered character as a password, string. on the screen. any valid password + is specified, use of a an error message is displayed.

If one such character

In such a case, use another An entered If the password key

is not displayed is pressed

<Enter>

before

password

is not specified.

If password If password

= RW&R go to @. = R go to @.

When

< Esc > is pressed,

an attempt

to specify

a password

is discontinued.

+
@I The password configuration screen appears.

GotoO.

Verification

(R)

You will be prompted password was entered the

to enter correctly.

the same

password

as entered

before,

to ensure

that your

When

password

entered

this

time

matches

one

that

was

entered

before,

it is

accepted. When they do not match, You are allowed When the message twice. to specily a password + If password = R is specified. (RW) set screen --* is discontinued. Password mismatch is displayed.

to retry entering

< Esc > is pressed,

an attempt

GotoO. Go to @.

The password

appears.

Enter

password

(R/W)

01

Enter a password A password Uppercase

(RW). that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or numerals. (If a lowercase

and lowercase

letters

are not distinguished

from each other.

letter is entered, It is impossible

it is assumed to use space, strings

to be uppercase.) kana, kanji, and special characters (such as

l , #. and @).
is displayed.

Some

character

are unusable. string is entered character as a password, string. an error message

If one such character

In such a case, rrse another

- 130-

4. OPERATION

An entered If the

password key

is not displayed is pressed

on the screen. any valid password + Goto@. is rejected. is specified, use of a

-z Enter >

before

password

is not specified. the attempt to specify

When

c Esc > is pressed,

a password -+

Go to 0.

The password

confirmation

screen

appears.

Verification

(R/W)

(9

You will be prompted password When was entered the

to enter correctly.

the same

password

as entered

before,

to ensure

that your

password

entered

this

time

matches

one

that

was

entered

before,

it is

accepted. When they do not match, You are allowed the message twice. to specify a password + is rejected. Password mismatch is displayed.

to retry entering

When

c Esc > is pressed,

the attempt

Go to 0.

@l Compilation

begins.

4.5.5
During printed

Decompilation
decomprlation, out. from the PMC or is read from ROM is object out. Such data must be decompiled file data. before Data in the object file a ROM format lile is translated into a source program that can be edited or

Data that is uploaded cannot out. be edited

or printed

it can be edited

or printed

(Note)

To decompile (See Section

a password-protected 4.5.4.)

object

file,

it is necessary

to enter

a password

- 131-

4. OPERATION

4.5.5.1
(1) Start

Operation

[Operation] 0 Select [DECOMP] (decompile) from the main menu.

The decompile

screen

appears.

Decompile Source program name

PMC-RB4 :C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[C:\FLADDER\

Output

to

Source

Program

SYMBOL h COMMENT [F4] YES Merge Duplicated symbol definition [F5] MEMORY

CARD DATA

(effective)

EXEC

MERGE

5SYMBOL6

OEND

Fig. 4.551

(a)

Decompile

Menu Screen

(2) Decompiling

[Operation] 0 Select [EXEC] on the decompile screen.

Decompilation

is performed

and the result is displayed.

-132-

4. OPERATION

(3) Decompiling
Upon the completion the object The result screen, file. of decompiling can be displayed by pressing the F3 [ERROR] key on the decompile of decompiling, pressing the F2 [MAP] key can display the memory map of

regardless

of whether

an error or warning

has occurred.

If many errors

have occurred,

the error file can be viewed

or printed

using a text editor. (see Section 4.5.9).

The result of decompiling

can also be displayed

using the utility function

(Example)

When the program

shown

below

is decompiled

:
are output to directory C: \ DATA.

Result file SAMPLE.ERR

and map file SAMPLE.MAP

Decompile Source program name

PMC-RB4 :C:\DATA\SAMPLE

Decompile

normal

en8

Decompile

completed

error

count=000000

warning

count=000000

EXEC

MAP

3ERROR

MERGE
Fig. 4.5.5.1

SSYMBOL
(b) Decompile end Screen

OEND

(4) Termination [Operation] 0 8 Select [END]. display returns to the main menu screen.

The screen

4.5.5.2 Decompile option

(1) Merge

In case source

the existent program

file is specified

for output

source

program

when

decompiling,

the existent file. in source

is deleted

and new source to merge

program

is created

with the contents

of object

In this case program

it is possible

the Ladder

in object

file with the SymboVCommnet

by specifying

the undermentioned

function-key.

-133-

4.

OPERATION

Decompile Source program name

PMC-RB4

[C:\FLADDER\

: c: \DATA\SAMPLE

Output to source program SYMBOL h COMMENT Merge Duplicated symbol definition

[F4] YES (FS] MEMORY

CARD DATA

(effective)

MERGE

5SYMBOL6

P
Menu Screen

OEND

Fig. 4.5.5.2

Decompile

(a) F4 [MERGE] This specification decides whether to merge the symbolicomment by NO or YES

1) "NO" :
The existent source file. of F5(SYNBOL] in this condition. program is deleted and new source program is created with the contents There of object

is no display

2) YES

: (Default

setting) in source program object is merged with that in object file. As for the other

The symbolkommnet data except Just after

symbolicomment, this specification, either

file is effective. will be displayed to specify which symbol

FS(SYMBOL] in source program

definition

is effective,

or in object

file, when

they are in conflict.

(b) F5 [SYMBOL] F5[SYMBOL] This will be displayed decides when YES symbol is specified definition for F4(MERGE]. source program or object file is

specification

which

in either

effective

when they are in conflict.

1) SOURCE
The symbol

DATA definrtton rn source program is effective.

2)

MEMORY The symbol

CARD DATA definition

: (Default

setting)

in object

file is effective.

- 134-

4. OPERATION

(c) The combination

Object

of F4[MERGE]

and F5[DUPADR],

and its result.

file COIL-COMMENT(30byte)

*c-

- Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYHBOL(Cbyte)

x0.0

xxxxxx
YYYYYY

xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx
YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

R1.4

Source

program RELAY-COMMENT(16byte) AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBB COIL-COMMENT(30byte) AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

- Symbol/Comment data ADDRESS SYMBOL(16byte) x0.0 Y2.3 Y4.7 AAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBB YYYYYY

-+(i)

The result of "MERGE = NO" Source x0.0 R1.4 program xxxxxx YYYYYY xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

*(ii)

The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol DATA".

Source

definition

= MEMORY

CARD

program xxxxxx BBBBBBBB YYYYYY BBBBBBBBBBBBBB xxxxxxxxxxxxxxx BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

x0.0 Y2.3 Y4.7

+(iii)

The result of "MERGE = YES" and "Symbol . . Source program AAAAAAAAAA AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA x0.0 BBBBBBBB BBBBBBBBBBBBBB Y2.3 YYYYYY R1.4

definition=SOURCE

DATA".

AAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAAA BBBBBBBBBBBBBBBB YYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYYY

-135-

4.

OPERATION

4.553
To decompile

Password
a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter a password.

Set password Both password (R) and (RAN)

type

Password Password

type to be entered (R/W) (R/W) (R)

I
@

Password

(R/w)

I
[EXEC] is selected, the following

Password Password

After discompilation

password

entry

screen

appears.

Enter password

(R)

Note)

If an R/W password up, password displayed.

has been set is

(R/W)

When the valid password If the newly discontinues. (You are allowed When entered

is entered,

discompilation an error

begins. message is displayed, and processing

password

is incorrect,

to retry entering

twice.) to start discompilation is rejected.

-z Esc > is pressed,

the request

-136-

4. OPERATION

455.4
When

Outputting to split files

the results of decompilation are output to a source program, they are split into units of

subprograms

and output to different files.

For details, see Section 3.4.2.

Object file

PO0 1.#LA Subprogram (Ladder) Pl

POO2.#SS Subprogram P2 (Step Sequence)

P003.#LA Subprogram (Ladder) P3

The END instruction is not included in the source program. The instruction is automatically when the program is compiled. added

-137-

4. OPERATION

4.5.6
There

Input/Output
are three types of inputioulput operations, as described below.

1) ROM read/write operation by the ROM writer (PMC or FA writer). 2) Transfer with the PMC RAM via an RS-232C interface.

3)

Input/output Adapter

between

PMC RAM and a memory

card or floppy

disk (FD) via a Floppy

Cassette

or Handy

File, respectively.

[Operation] 0 Switch cable. off the personal (See Appendix computer 8.) and input/output unit, and connect them via an RS-232-C

@I Start FAPT LADDER. 0 Select [l/O] (input/output) from the main menu.

@I The input/output

menu appears.

Table 4.56 Input/output ROM writers (PMC WRITER, FANUC FANUC FANUC FANUC Series Series FA WRITER) 1618/20 (PMC-R destination

Baud Rate Setting Baud rate setting 4800 (bps)

series)

48OOl9600

15B (PMC-NB)

F-D Mate mini (PMC-OC) Power Mate-MODEL D (PMC-PAlIPA3)

4.5.6.1

I/O port setting

sets up ports according to the values in the following data files.

FAPT LADDER

1)

IBM PC/AT version

FLIO - AT.DAT So, a text editor can be used to change set values in the files.

These

files are in text format.

-138-

4. OPERATION

2)

Contents (effective

of the FLIO_AT.DAT data section only)

DATA-BLOCK
PMC-WRITER FA-WRITER PMC-L PMC-M PMC-M (TT) PMC-M (AXIS) PMC-MMC PMC-MMC PMC-N PMC-P PMC-OA PMC-M (I/O) PMC-M (l/O. TT) PMC-M (I/O. AXIS) PMC-N (I/O) PMC-RB PMC-RC PMC-RAl PMC-RA2 PMC-RBP PMC-RA3 PMC-RB3 PMC-RC3 PMC-PA1 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC PMC-NB PMC-R04 PMC-RC4 PMC-RB4 PMC-RC4 (AXIS)

= IO-PORT-SET
=COMl 48.

N. 8.2 N. 8.2

=COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMi =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMi =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl =COMl

:48.N,8.2 .48, r48.N.8.2 : 48. N. 8. 2 : 48, N. 8, 2 ~48.N.8.2 r48.N.8.2 y96.N.8.2 48. N. 8. 2 : 96, N. 8. 2 : 48. N. 8. 2 .48, N. 8.2 .48. N. 8. 2 : 96. N. 8, 2 : 96, N. 8. 2 96. N. 8. 2 96. N. 8. 2 96, N. 8. 2 96. N. 8. 2 : 96, N. 8. 2 : 96. N, 8. 2 : 96, N. 0. 2 : 96, N. 8. 2 : 96, N. 8, 2 : 96. N. 8. 2 : 96, N. 8. 2 : 96, N. 8. 2 : 96, N. 8. 2 : 96, N. 8. 2 : 96. N. 8. 2

(STEP~SEO) (STEP-SEC))

=COMl =COMl

Entity on the left-hand Entity on the right-hand Only the

side of each equal sign ( =) : Device side of each first parameter equal (port sign (=) number)

: Represented
and second

in the format parameter

of each rate)

MODE can be

command. changed.

(baud

- 139-

4.

OPERATION

4.5.6.2
ROM format PMC model,

ROM writers (PMC writer, FA writer)

data is written as indicated to ROM installed in Table 4.5.6.2. in the PMC. ROMs which can be used depend place it in remote mode. on the

When using the FA writer,

Table 4.5.6.2 PMC model PMC-RA3 PMC-RB3 PMC-RC3

ROMs Usable

with Each PMC Model Usable ROM

lM-bit lM-bit

ROM ROM/ROM module B (note 1)

ROM module

A, B, C, and D

(1) Read

[Operation]
Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the l/O menu screen.

Select

Fl : (READ].

Enter the name of a source

program

name

containing

read data.

Read operation

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When read operation

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

(2) Write

[Operation 1
Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the l/O menu screen.

Select

F2 : (WRITE].

Enter the name of a source

program

name

to be written.

Writing

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When writing

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

- 140-

4. OPERATION

(3) Verification

[Operation] 0 Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the I/O menu screen.

Select

F3 : [VERIFY]

Enter the name of a source

program

name to be verified.

Verification

is executed.

During operatron,

the Indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

When verification

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

(4) Blank

check

[Operation] 0 Select Fl : [FAWRT] (FA Writer) or F2 : [PMCWRT] (PMC Writer) on the I/O menu screen.

Select

F4 : [BLANK]

(blank check).

Blank checking

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks.

@I When blank checking

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END

is output.

(5) Termination
[Operation] @ Select FlO : [END].

The screen

display

returns

to the main menu screen.

(Note

1)

When

writing

1Mbit

ROM

for

PMC-RB3 terminates

with

FA writer,

ID

ERROR

will

be

displayed

on FA writer. PMCRA3,

But writing

normally. data to and from EPROM.

(Note 2)

PMC except

RB3, RC3 not transfer

-141-

4. OPERATION

4.5.6.3

Transfer to and from PMC

(1) Transfer to and from PMC-R series/PA3/NB/NB2KJC

Data can be transferred serially via RS-232-C.

FAPT LADDER

7 9600 bps14800 bps

FS16/18/15B -Power Mate-D/F/H, 1 F-D Mate mini

9600 bps14800 Upload 9600 bps14800 Comparison

bps

bps

Baud rate settinq

for FS16/18/158,

Power

Mate-D/F/H,

and F-D Mate mini

(1) Download [Operation]

(i> Q, Select Select name. *c3) Press the < SYSTEM > key of the CNC. [PMC], II/O), [HOST], and [EXEC) in this order. F3 : [PMC] on the VO menu (download) screen. on the PMC menu screen to display the source program

Fl : [DNLOAD]

t(4) Press the CNC soft keys Press the < Enter > key. Downloading is executed.

During operation, normally,

the indication

EXECUTING END

blinks. is output.

When downloadlng

terminates

the indication

NORMAL

(2) Upload
If the PMC-RC3RC4QCNBNB2 can be used. data types When used, uploading language data (C language) other than Ladder PMCs, the programs one or comparison can be is executed from one of these and ALL

of two

(LADDER

or ALL)

specified.

LADDER

have

following

meantngs:

LADDER ALL

Sequence Sequence

program program

only and language data (C language)

-142-

4.

OPERATION

Specify

either data type in step 6I of the operation

described

below:

[Operation] 0 Select F3 : [PMC] on the I/O menu screen. the source program name.

@ Select

F2 : [UPLOAD] on the PMC menu screen to display

> key of the CNC. [l/O]. [HOST], and (EXEC]

*@ Press the <SYSTEM

*G?JPress the CNC soft keys [PMC]. 0 Press the <Enter> key.

in this order.

Select

either

LADDER

or ALL with cursor.

(?I

Uploading

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECUTING

blinks. ,

@I When uploading

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END is output.

(3) Comparison
[Operation] 0 Select F3 :[PMC] on the I/O menu screen.

Select program

F3 :[COMPAR] name.

(comparison)

on

the

PMC

menu

screen

to display

the

source

*O Press the c SYSTEM

> key of the CNC.

$0

Press the CNC soft keys

(PMC],

[l/O],

[HOST],

and [EXEC]

in this order

Press the <Enter

> key

6)

Comparison

is executed.

During operation,

the indication

EXECtJTlNG

blinks.

When comparison

terminates

normally,

the indication

NORMAL

END is output.

(4) Termination

[Operation] 0 Select [END]

The screen

dtsplay

returns

to the main menu

screen

(Note)

In the operations on the CNC.

above,

an asterisk

prefixed

to a circled

number

represents

an operation

-143-

4. OPERATION

(5) CRT/MD1 and DPUMDI

of the Power procedures above). Mate-F

of the Power Mate-D have the CRTiMDl screen. screen and the DPL/MDI When the CRT/MD1 screen. Series The NC

The NC of the Power Mate-D/H

for data input/output

has only the DPLIMDI

screen

is used, the ((1) to (4) are different

are the same as those with the PMC-R

When the DPLIMDI

screen is used, the procedures Series. is used, perform downloading,

for data input/output

from those with the PMC-R When the DPLIMDI screen

uploading,

and

comparison

as

described below:

(a) Press the < DGNOS (b) Press the <READ (c) Follow procedures

> key on the DPL/MDI

screen and select the diagnostic data screen screen.

> or <WRITE

> key on the DPLIMDI

(1) to (4) described

above on the personal computer.

4.5.6.4

Memory card

card

interface

in the personal

computer

and memory

A object file compiled

in a personal computer

can be converted

to a memory card format file, and The PMC card in

output to a memory card via a memory card interface installed in the personal computer.

program on the memory card can be sent to the RAM of the CNC by inserting the memory the memory card interface in the CNC. By reversing the procedure,

programs can be transferred

from the CNC RAM to the memory card.

- 144-

4.

OPERATION

(1) PMC program transfer from the personal computer to the CNC [Operation]
Install a memory card interface in the personal computer.

F3 : Select

[COMPILE]

and compile

a source

program.

Return

to the main menu,

and select

[l/O] (input/output)

from it.

Select

F5 : [M-CARD]

(memory

card) from the input/output

menu.

Fl F2 F3

KEY KEY KEY

FR WRITER PWC WRITER PHC Handy Clle Henorv Card BFICKUP END

F-5 KEY FS F6 KEY KEY

F18 KEY

Fig. 4.5.6.4

(a)

InputIOutout

Menu

Select

[WRITE]

(write

(programmer

- > memory

card)).

l/O MQBRY

CARD)

Fl KEY

WRITE ( PROCRAMER READ ( PROCWR

J Memry Card ( Memory Card

) )

F:!

KEY

FIO KEY

END

Fig. 4.5.6.4

(b)

Memory

Card Input/Output

Screen

- 145-

4.

OPERATION

Convert the file from source program to memory card format. Specify the following items for execution.
l

Name of the source program Display the source program name. Name of the memory card file Specify the name of a memory card file (accessible via a memory card interface in the CNC) to be created by conversion, and the drive where the memory card is inserted.

WHITE ( Programx Source program name

) Merry

Card

: C : YDATAWMFLE

Memory Card FILE NAME : D: YSAMPLE. #BF (Specify the MEMORYCARD drive)

Fig. 4.5.6.4 (c)

Input/Output

(to MC) Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

-146-

4. OPERATION

The following the memory

l

two methods card interface

can be used to insert

the memory

card output

in step @ into

in the CNC and read programs of the PMC and the desired filename

on the memory

card.

Using the I/O function Specify M-CARD,

READ,

or

file

number then

at press

DEVICE, soft key

FUNCTION,

and FILE NO. on the PMC I/O screen, programs

respectively,

[EXEC]. Sequence

are read from the memory

card file created

in step 0.

PMC l/O screen

-~~ PMC l/O PROGRAM CHANNEL = 1 = M-CARD DEVICE ::FtJNC:T~I.Oti = READ DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. = ( #NAME ) [ EXEC I[CANCELI[WRITE I[ READ I[COMPARI MONIT STOP

Using the BOOT SYSTEM

at power-on

time from the memory card by using the BOOT

Each CNC can read the sequence SYSTEM at power-on time.

program

Refer to manual

of each CNC for the operation.

-147-

4. OPERATION

(2)

PMC program
PMC programs

transfer

from

the CNC to the personal to a memory card, using

computer a memory card interface in the computer, CNC. the

are written card

When the memory PMC programs

is inserted

in a memory

card interface as ordinary

in the personal DOS files.

on the memory

card can be accessed

[Operation

J
M-CARD, WRITE, DATA KIND, and the desired filename (omissible) at DEVICE, soft LADDER, Sequence and FILE NO. on the PMC l/O screen, programs are output to the memory. respectively, then press

Specify

FUNCTION, key (EXEC].

PMC l/O screen

PMC

I/O

PROGRAM

MONIT

STOP

CHANNEL = 1 = M-CARD DEVICE FHNG:TIiON: = WRITE DATA KIND = LADDER FILE NO. = ( #NAME 1

/ [ EXEC

I[CANCELl[WRITE

I[

READ

I[COMPARI

The following

operations

are performed

on the personal

computer

side.

Install a memory

card interface

in the personal

computer.

Select

[IO]

(input!output)

from the main menu.

Select

F5 : [M-CARD]

(memory

card) from the input/output

menu,

(See Fig. 4.5.6.4

(a).)

61

Select

[READ]

(read (programmer

<- memory

card)).

(See Fig. 4.5.6.4

(b).)

Convert to source
l

the PMC programs program format

output

to a memory

card in step 0

from memory the utility.

card format

by specifying card file

the following

items and running

Name of the memory Specify the name

of the conversion

source

memory

card

file written

to the memory

card, and the memory

l

card drive in which the memory program

card is inserted.

Name of the source Display the source

program

name.

- 148-

4. OPERATION

4.5.6.5

Handy file + 3.5 floppy disk (MS-DOS format)

to Handy File format and output to a via a

If a object file compiled on a personal computer is converted 3.5 floppy disk (DOS format), the PMC to the CNC. program

can be read into the RAM of the CNC

Handy File interface connected (1) PMC program

This operation can be reversed.

transfer

from the personal computer

to the CNC

[Operation] Compile a source program.

Select [l/O] (input/output)

from the main menu.

Select F4 : [FDCAS]

(Handy File) from the input/output menu.

(See Fig. 4.5.6.5 (a).)

Select [WRITE]

(write (programmer

->

Handy File)).

FI F?

KE\ KEY

WRITE READ

( (

Programer Programner

Handy File) Handy F i I e)

Fig. 4.5.6.5

(a)

FDCAS

Input/Output

Screen

4. OPERATION

Convert the source program to Handy File format by specifying

running the utility.
l

the following items and

Name of the source program Display the source program.

Name of the Handy File format file Specify the name to be assigned to the Handy File format file (accessible File) to be generated by conversion, by the Handy

and the 3.5 disk drive to which the file is output;

5 floppy disk cannot be used.

WRITE ( Programer Source program neme

> Handy File

)
C:YSAMPLE. #SF

: C: YDATAYSAMFLE drive)

Handy File File name (Specify the floppy dish

Fig. 4.5.6.5

(b)

Input/Output

(to FDCAS)

Screen

The following operations are performed on the CNC side.

Connect the CNC and Handy File, and insert the 3.5 floppy disk generated the Handy File.

in step @ into

(2) PMC program

transfer

from the CNC to the personal computer

[Operation] 0 Connect the CNC and Handy File, and output the PMC program to a 3.5 floppy disk (DOS format).

The following operations are performed on the personal computer

side.

Select [I.01 (input/output) from the main unit.

(31 Select F4 : [FDCAS]

(Handy File) from the input/output menu.

@I Select [READ]

(read (programmer

< -Handy File)). (See Fig. 4.5.6.5

(a).)

- 151-

4.

OPERATION

Convert source
l

the PMC program program

on a 3.5 floppy the following file

disk (Handy

File format)

generated

in step 0

to

by specifying

items and running

the utility.

Name Specify floppy

of the Handy the program

Frle format name

output

in step 0,

and the 3.5

floppy

disk drive

where

the

disk is inserted. program program.

Name of the source Display the source

READ

I Prograr

I~ Handy File

Handy File File naw (Specify the floppy disk Source program naiw

: C : YSAMPLE. #SF drive) : C :YDATAYSAMPLE

Fig. 4.5.6.5

(c)

InputlOutput

(from FDCAS)

Screen

Decompile

the source

program

file after conversion,

and the resultant

file will become

able

to be edited

on the personal

computer.

-152-

4.

OPERATION

4.5.6.6
This backup program Please

Backup of user program

function can back up the source the backup source program, which the system uses, to another source

and can restore use this function

program. program under editing or under debugging.

when you back up the source

tl t2 FlB

KEY KtV KEY

BACKUP txSlORl END

Fig. 4.5.6.6

(a)

Backup

Menu Screen

(1) Backup

[Operation] 0 Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.

Select

Fl : [BACKUP]

from the backup

menu.

Enter a backup

program

name,

and press

(EXEC].

BRCKUP (SOURCE

PROGRRH ->

RRCKUP PROGRAM)

BRCKUP PROGRRW NW

mrmm3m3amm3mnm
Fig. 4.5.6.6 (b) Backup Screen

-153-

4.

OPERATION

@ When backup terminates

(2) Restoring

normaly,

the NORMAL

END

message

is displayed.

[Operation]
@I Select [BACKUP] from the input/ output menu.

(3

Select

F2 : [RESTOR]

from the backup

menu.

Enter a backup

program

name,

and press (EXEC].

RLSIORC (SOURCE PROGRRH (- BRCKUP PROGRRH) BRCKUP YROGRRH NRWF

Fig. 4.5.6.6

(c)

Restoring

Screen

@I When restoring

terminates

normaly,

the NORMAL

END

message

is displayed.

-154-

4. OPERATION

4.5.7

Setting program options

enables the setting of options for each function.

This function

Specified

data is stored

for each source

program.

[Operation

j
the cursor to the function for which options are to

Using the < J > or c T > key, position be set.

On the setting

screen

for each

function,

select

an item by positioning

the cursor

with the

< l > or < T > key, then change

the setting

with the et>

or < -_$> key.

.\DRTA\SFlnPLE

Fig. 4.57

457.1

Compile
function options options as described below. These options, when set, are

The user can set the compile used as the initial values

of the compile

for the off-line

function,

or are used

for compile

processing

performed

with the on-line

functions.

For details

of each option,

see Section

4.5.4.

(1)

Condense This option specifies whether condense mode is to be used for compile processing.

(2)

Symbol This option specifies whether to output symbol or comment data to an object file.

(3)

Net comment This option specifies whether to output net comment data to an object file.

-155-

4. OPERATION

(4) Password
This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compile time.

VW
[RW&R]

Does not display

the dialog

box.

(Password

setting

is disabled.)

Displays password

the

password

(RN) box.

setting

dialog

box

as well

as the

(R) setting

dialog

Fw [RI

Displays

only the password

(RAN) setting

dialog

box.

Displays

only the password

(R) setting

dialog

box.

Fig. 4.5.7.1

-156-

4.

OPERATION

4.5.7.2

Decompile
function options function functions. 4.5.5. as described decompile below. options, These options, when set, are

The user can set the decompile used as the initial values processing For details performed

of the off-line

or are used for the decompile

with the on-line see Section

of each option,

(1) Symbol

merge specifies whether to merge source program data and object file symbol/comment

This option

data at decompile

time.

PJOI [SOURCE]

. T

Does not merge Gives source prionty

symbol

and comment data when

data. duplicate addresses file. exist in the

to the source

program

and the symbol

data of the object

[MEMORY

CARD]

Gives

priority

to the object

file data when

duplicate

addresses file.

exist

in

the source

program

and the symbol

data of the object

IDecomDilel ~~INO/SOURCE~I

Fig. 4.5.7.2

-157-

4. OPERATION

4.5.7.3

Modifying program option initial values

is to be created, below. the initial value

(OPTION.CNF)
can be modified by means of

When a new program the procedure

of each option

described

[Operation]
Using the text editor, II is installed. open the OPTION.CNF file under the directory where FAPT LADDER-

Find the section starting with #).

corresponding

to a model

subject

to initial value

modification

(that is. a line

Example:

#32;(RA3)

for PMC-RA3 for PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)

#4l;(Rl34_STEP)

Note)

A section attempt

having

a line

beginning

with

a semicolon

(:) contains

legend

data.

Any

to modify

such a section

is ignored.

Find the subsection a line starting

corresponding

to a function

subject

to initial

value

modification

(that is,

with ).

Specify

a new value

for the option

whose

initial value

is to be modified.

Table 4.5.7.3 Subsection COMPILE condense Option 0: 1: Performs mode. Performs mode. Setting compile compile and function processing processing in normal in condense

symbol (Symbol/comment)

0: 1:

Does not output symbol/comment data to the object file. Outputs symbol/comment data to the object file. Does not output net comment data to the object file. Outputs net comment data to the object file. Does Sets Sets Sets not set a password. a password (R/W) and password a password (RMT). a password (R).

netcmt (Net comment)

0: 1:

password

0: 1: 2: 3: 0: 1: 2:

(R).

DECOMPILE

symbol-merge

Does not perform merge processing. Performs merge processing with priority given to source program data. Performs merge processing with priority given to object file data.

Note)

Never

attempt

to modify

the values

of options

that are not listed

in the above

table.

Otherwise,

the system

may malfunction.

-158-

4. OPERATION

4.5.8 4.5.8.1

Mnemonic editing Conversion of a source program to a mnemonic file

file that can be edited with any standard text editor.

A source program is converted to a mnemonic

[Operation] 0 Select [MNEEDTJ (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic

menu screen appears (Fig. 4.5.8.1

(a)).

FI KEY : F2 KEY : F3 KEY : FIO KEY :

SOURCE PROGRAM-) WEUINIC FILE MNEWNIC FILE ) SOURCE PROGRAM EXECUTEUSER BATCH FILE END

Fig. 4.5.8.1(a)

Mnemonic

Menu Screen

Select [MNECNV]

(conversion to mnemonic).

-159-

4.

OPERATION

@I The mnemonic

conversion

screen

appears

(Fig. 4.5.8.1(b)).

I) SOURCEPROGRAMNM(E 2) WEMUNIC FILE NAME 31 CUNVfRTADI)TA KIND SELECTIUN (0 { ; : yqgl PARAMETER (3 4) MODE SwBULLCMMENr : 4 , 5 . 6 : LADDER : I/U MODULE MESSECE P-C

: FUR

Fig. 4.5.8.1

(b)

Mnemonic

Conversion

Screen

Specify
l

the following program

items: name program to be converted.

Source Display

the name of the source file name

Mnemonic Specify

the name

of Ihe mnemonic

file to which

a source

program

is converted.

Up to

40 characters
l

can be specified. selection to conversion. All data files can be specified or specific data

Data conversion Specify

data files subject

files can be selected.

l

Mode Specify < +

(setting setting

item selection) items. Select items from the table below, using the -z t > and

> keys.

- 160-

4. OPERATION

:OR - P-G

P-G output Converts

format

data is converted. message to code format is converted. to Japanese-language (Note 2).

the text of a Japanese-language data, which may include

lapanese anguage :omment (Note)

Comment Converts format

kanji characters, message

the text of a Japanese-language

(Note 3). data, which may include address symbols kanji characters, and comments, is converted. and function instruction

IJLL - OPTIONS

Comment Data names Data

including treated including

as comments all instruction

is converted. sections, operand sections, and comment

sections Converts format .ABEL/ SUB-PROGRAM Data

is converted. the text of a Japanese-language message to Japanese-language

(Note 3). is converted JMPC, and the jump destination (label) of a function used instruction is not

(JMPB,

CALL, step

SP, or another number of the

instruction) converted instruction setting.)

in a sub-program data used does

highlighted. agree

The

mnemonic section

with other

setting.

(The function

in the sub-

program Converts format

does not agree with the other the text

of a Japanese-language

message

to Japanese-language

(Note 3).

(Note 1) (Note 2, 3)

The item

specifying mode

Japanese system.

language

comment

conversion

cannot

be selected

on an English Format message

displayed editing.

on the code

or Japanese-language

input

mode

screen

during

Select

[EXEC]

upon completion

of item specification.

Source

program

is converted

to a mnemonic

file.

An error conversion

message screen

is displayed appears when

if <Enter>

is pressed

after

conversion.

The

mnemonic

< SPACE > is pressed

after conversion.

-161-

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.2
A mnemonic program

Conversion of a mnemonic file to a source program

text file edited in a certain format using a atandard computer version text editor is converted to a source

that can be edited

with the personal

of FAPT LADDER.

(Operation] Select [MNEEDT] (mnemonic editing) from the main menu.

The mnemonic

menu screen

appears.

Select

[SRCCNV]

(conversion

to a source

program).

The source

program

conversion

screen

appears

(Fig. 458.2).

I)

WEMONIC

FILE PROCRAM

NAMT NAME

2) SOURCE

Specify
l

the followlng

items:

Mnemonic Specify specified.

file name the name of a mnemonic file to be converted. Up to 40 characters can be

Source Display

program

name program to which a mnemonic file is to be converted.

the name of the source

Select

[EXEC]

upon completion

of item specification.

Mnemonic

file is converted

to a source

program

An error program

message conversion

is displayed screen

if

c Enter> when

is pressed

after

conversion.

The

source

appears

-z SPACE > is pressed

after conversion.

-162-

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.3

Mnemonic file format

available text editor is to be converted to a source

If a mnemonic file created using a commercially

program, the mnemonic file must be in the following format. (1) Identification code codes that each begin with %.

The mnemonic file defines data with four different identification

ID code %@A %@E %@O to 5 % only

Description Beginning of ALL-format data End of ALL-format data Beginning of unit-format data End of unit-format data

The unit-format data mentioned above varies from one PMC model to another as listed below. I PMC model Unit-format data R series/PAS/QC/NB/NB2 Parameter Title Symbol & comment Ladder Message l/O module
%@O %@l

%@2 or %@2-C (Note 1) %@3 %@4 % @5

Note 1) %@2, and %@2-C

% @2 %@2-c : :

correspond to source format types as follows:

FORMAT-A/B FORMAT-C This means that, as part of conversion type code is performed. and %@2-C) to

FAPT LADDER-II uses FORMAT-C only. a mnemonic file, conversion used. to %@2-C to a source program, however,

For conversion can be

both type codes (%@2

-163-

4.

OPERATION

(2) Linefeed code

Control ignored. character LF (OAH) is defined as a linefeed code. Control character CR (ODH) is

(3) Reserved

symbols
This special
l

cd

character

is reserved

for use in ladder data section a semicolon

data.
to separate are treated program, ladder data from a as a comment. a semicolon and

A semicolon comment.

is used in the ladder Characters that follow

When a mnemonic a comment @

file is converted

back to a source

that follows

it are not generated. for use in ladder and l/O module data. from ladder

r:j

This special
l

character

is reserved

A colon data.

is used in the ladder data section Data that precedes is also from used a colon is treated

to separate

a net number

as a net number. data section to separate a colon a channel as a

A colon number channel

in the

l/O module Data that

I/O module

data.

precedes

is treated

number.

(4) Control The

character character $ is used as control character in the mnemonic file. file. Every dollar

dollar

character

in the sentence

must be described

as $$I

in the mnemonic

(a) Symbol

and comment

data

(f)

Description Describe Describe

of address the address the address

and symbol data and the symbol strings in a same line. describe after address data

data to top of line and the symbol or horizontal tabulation character

strings

with blank character

as delimitter.

R0200.0

UNIT - 3 - POWER

-164-

4.

OPERATION

@ Description of relay comment and coil comment

Describe the relay comment The first string between next string between and coil comment after address defined in (1). And two single quotation marks after mark $1 is relay comment.

two single quotation marks is coil comment.

I $1 KEEP POWER ON

KEEP UNIT-3

POWER

ON

Blank character

or horizontal tabulation character Mark of comment data line (only $1) by double

When relay comment single quotation marks.

is not used, a part of relay comment

must be described

$1

INITIALIZE

OF SEQUENCE

Note)

Every single quotation

mark in the relay comment file.

and coil comment

string must be

described as $I + in the mnemonic

(b) Ladder data

Description of net comment The net comment data is specified by ( and ) characters.

31

Designation Designation

of new page (for ladder diagram printing) of new page for ladder diagram printing must be described file. as $P or $p in

the mnemonic

(for ladder diagram printing)

-165-

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.4

Sample mnemonic files (single-format)

(a) Parameter 0 PMC-PA3:RA3!Rf34!RB4 (STEP)IRBSIRBG

%@ 0 2 3 4

BINARY1 NOJ. PMC-RB41

2. Counter 3. Whether
4.

dala type an operators

(Binary panel is used

or BCD) (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

PMC model

(PMC-RA3/PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ) PMC-PAYPMCRB5/PMC-RB6)

81 [EOBI (Note)
When specifying the YES in Item 3 above LED address, (whether

an operators address, and

panel is used), LED image

specify as

KEY address,

KEY image

address

follows:

(3
@ PMC-RB3

YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO

ROOlOl

%@ 0 1 2 3 4 7 BINARYJ. NOi PMC-RB31 1001

Counter Whether data type an operators panel (Binary is used (PMC-RB3) time or BCD) (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

PMC model Ladder execution

(100% (fixed))

%l IEOBI (Note)
When specify address specifying the KEY YES in Item LED 3 above address, (whether KEY an image operators address, panel and is used), image

address,

LED

as follows:

3 YES X0000

YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

-166-

4. OPERATION

PMCRC3IRC4IRC4

(STEP)

se
2 3 4 5 7

1
2. Counter
3. 4. Whether data type an operators (Binary panel is used or BCD) (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

BCDl ND1 PMC-RC41 000000 1001

PMC model

(PMCRC3/PMCRC4/PMCRC4 (STEPSEQ))

5.

Start address

of language

program

link control

statement

data

%l IEOBI
7. Ladder YES execution in Item LED time 3 above address,

(0 or 800000 (hexadecimal)) (1 to 150%) (whether KEY an image

to SFFFFF

(Note)

When specify address

specifying the KEY

operators address,

panel and

is used), image

address,

LED

as follows:

3 YES X0000

YOOOO ROOOO ROOlOl

PMCQC/NB/NB2

se
2 3 4 5 6 7

0 1 BCDl NOi PMC-QCJ 000000 501 1001

6. Percentage of language time 2. 3. 4. 5. Counter Whether data type an operators (Binary panel is used or BCD) (YES: Used, NO: Not used)

PMC model Start address of language

(PMC-OC/PMC-NB/PMC-NB2) program link control statement data

(0 or 200000 (hexadecimal)) program execution

to 2FFFFF

sl [EOBI
(Note) If YES

time

(1% to 99% 1

7. Ladder execution

(Always

100%)

is specified

in item

3 (whether

an operators

panel as follows:

is used),

specify

the

addresses

of KEY, LED, KEY image,

and LED image

3 YES X0000 YOOOO ROOOO ROOlO1

-167-

4.

OPERATION

(b) Title (common to all models)

%@ '01 02 03 IO4 ~05 '06 '07 '08 109 ~10 I% 1

11
MACHINE MACHINE CNC PMC EDITION PROGRAM DATE PROGRAM ROM REMARKS1 WRITTEN OF 7 PMC TOOL TOOL NAME1 NO.1 NO.1 DRAWING PROGRAMING1 DESIGNED BY1 BYi NO.1 BUILDER NAME1 NAME 1

PROGRAM

[EOB]

(c) Symbols and comments

(common to all models)

%@2-c R0200.0

rp UNIT-3-POWER

Symbol

$1 'KEEP POWER ON'

'KEEP UNIT-3 I
Relay comment

POWER ON'
Coil Comment

R0200.1

UNIT-2-ACT 'KEEP UNIT-4 $$POWER$'

-Control

$1 *$'PowER$$' R0300.0 $1

ON'
code

'KEEP POWER ON' OPEN-FRONT

'KEEP INIT-

POWER ON'

PO008

$1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' LO100 $1 " 1

% IEOBI

INITIALIZE 'INITIALIZE
no Relay comment

OF SEQUENCE'

-168-

4.

OPERATION

Q) FULL- OPTIONS

%@3

1
SUB 71 Pl ; SP

NOOOOl:

r)1

Symbol r

Relay comment 1

;(SUBPRl :

) "SUB PROG. NO.O1"

[SUB PROGRAM

DATA NO.Ol] 1 Coil comment LOOl" 4-_1 no Comment no Relay comment LOOl" 1

N00002:

RD SUB

x0.0 68 LlOO

;(XADRSl ; JMPBJ ;(LABELl ;

) "JUMPB LABEL

[LABEL ~ooooi] I1

N00003:

RD SUB

x0.1 73 LlOO

;(XADRSI ; JMPCJ ;(LABELl ; ; LBL ;

) "JUMPB LABEL ) 1

[LABEL ~ooool] 1 1 )l

N00004:

SUB

69 LlOO

;(LABELl

[LABEL ~ooooi] 1 1

N00005: N00006:

SUB SUB

72 71 P2

i- SPE ;

spl
) "SUB PROGRAM DATA NO.l"l

N00007:

RD DEC

RO.0 DO 21 DO.0 72 64

; (SPlOOO ; (RADRSOO : (DADRSOI

1 1 1
)

WRT N00008: N00009: 81 SUB SUB

1 : SPE 1 : END 1

-170-

4. OPERATION

LABEL/SUB-PROGRAM

8@3

Address

Relay comment

SUBPRl

SP

SUBPRl r

;<Pl
Symbol

> SUB
-

PROG. N0.01" DATA NO.011 1

Coil comment

; [SUB PROGRAM RD JMPB XADRSl LABEL1 ;<XO.O ;<LlOO

> "JIJMPB LABEL LOOl"J.

>l ; [LABEL ~ooool] 1

;<XO.l ;<LlOO ;<LlOOO : > "JUMPB LABEL LOol"1 > [LABEL Looooi] 1 >l

RD JMPC LABEL1 LBL

XADRSZ LABEL1

[LABEL LOOOOl] 1

SPE SPlOOO SP RD DEC

1 ;<P2 RADROO DADR04 ;<RO.O ;<DO > "SUB PROGRAM ' ' NO.l"l

1 1

21
WRT SPE END 01 1 1 DO.0 1

(4

Message

%@
A0

4
0.

1
0

2100020 2101022 NOT 2100020

ATC SPINDLE ON1 EDTOK

DOOR

NOT SPEED

CLOSE1 ARRIVA

AOO.l L SIGNAL

A00.2

KEY

SWITCH

ONJ.

%l IEOBI
0)
I/O module

%@ 5 1
x000

1 1

0 0

1 4

ID64AJ. OD64Bl

YOO8

sl
[EOBI

- 171-

4. OPERATION

458.5

Sample mnemonic files (all-format)

(a) PMC-FIB4 %@A 1 %@O 1 2 BINARY4 3 NO& 4 PMC-RB4 %1 %@l 1 01 MACHINE

TOOL BUILDER

NAME1

-10 REMARKS 1 %1 %@2-c 1 R0200.0 UNIT-3-POWER1 'KEEP UNIT-3 POWER ON'1 $1 'KEEP POWER ON' R0200.1 UNIT-2-ACT1 'KEEP UNIT-~ SSPOWERS' ON'1 $1 'S'POWERSS' R0300.0 1 'KEEP UNIT-4 POWER ON'J. $1 'KEEP POWER ON' OPEN-FRONT1 PO008 $1 'OPEN FRONT COVER' 1 INITIALIZE1 LO100 'INITIALIZE OF SEQUENCE'1 $1 " %
%@3

RD RlOOl.01 OR R120.3 1 AND R1000.2 1 WRT Y2000.4 1 (* Any characters Inscribe the net comment here. A Net comment which are input with personal computer can be used. 1) RD R1OO1.O 1 AND R1000.2 1 WRT Y23.4 1 form feed position (in Ladder diagram printing) 1* SP l) RD R1O1.O 1 OR R123.4 1 AND R100.21 WRT Y200.4 1 % 1 %@4 1 AOO.0 2100020 ATC DOOR NOT DLOSEJ AOO.l 2101022 SPINDLE SPEED ARRIVAL SIGNAL NOT ON 1 % 1 %@5 1 x000 1 0 1 ID16CI YOO8 1 0 4 OD32A1

1 %@E 1
%

-172-

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.6

The note if the step sequence model

method, mnemonic

function is selected when setting a

When using the step sequence The mnemonic

instructions cannot be coded.

conversion functions need following notes:

1) Programming by Mnemonic Instructions

A step sequence program cannot be created with mnemonic instructions. It is impossible to create a step sequence program with a text editor, or to read the program into FAPT LADDER conversion.

by means of mnemonic-to-source

2) Source-to-Mnemonic
If source-to-mnemonic subprograms step

and Mnemonic-to-Source conversion is executed

Conversions for a step sequence step sequence source program, only ladder being ignored. conversion, then If a to

are converted source

to mnemonics,

subprograms

sequence

program

is subjected

to source-to-mnemonic

mnemonic-to-source

conversion,

the original source program will not be replicated.

3) Source Program Conversion using Mnemonics

A program can be converted by using mnemonics, as shown below:

PMCRC3 1 PMCRC4

J PMCRC4

1 (STEP SEQ)

A program (STEP

for the PMC-RE34 are not able

(STEP

SEC)) cannot

be converted

for use with the PMCRC4 The program can be

SEC)

to use mnemonics

for step

sequence.

converted 3.)

if a ROM file is used, however.

(For details of this conversion,

see the APPENDIX

- 173-

4. OPERATION

4.5.8.7

User batch file execution

can be executed by suspending the execution of FAPT LADDER.

The batch file FLMNE.BAT

A users text editor

own

batch

file generated

by editing

the contents

of the FLMNE.BAT

file with a standard

can also be executed.

Example

The execution

of FAPT LADDER

is suspended variable

and text editor

VZ is activated.

(in this case,

VZ must be defined

in the environment

PATH beforehand.)

[Operation]
Use a standard text editor to create the batch file FLMNE.BAT as follows:

vz

Select

MNEEDT

(mnemonic

editing)

from the main menu.

The mnemonic

menu screen

appears.

Select

([BATCH]

(user batch

file execution).

The following

message

appears:

Execute Add

FLMNE.BAT.

parameter(s)?

[A(Add),

N(Not

add),

S(Stop)]

Specify

A (Add),

and specify

*.HEX

as the parameter.

VZ is activated

and a list of files

with the extension

.HEX is displayed.

To restart

FAPT LADDER,

terminate

VZ.

Press any key.

The screen

display

returns

to the mnemonic

menu

screen.

Example

The

execution

of

FAPT

LADDER

is

suspended. commands

Then,

the

command Create

processor as

COMMAND.COM follows:

is activated

and MS-DOS

are enabled.

FLMNE.BAT

COMMAND

-174-

4.

OPERATION

4.5.9
Selecting functions

Utility
(UTILTY] from the off-line at installation: menu enables the use of the utility functions. The following

are registered

UTILITY Pl F2 F3 F4 DOS f loadat View Linker result

Fig. 4.5.9 (a) Utility Screen

Moving

to the DOS command

line (starting

COMMAND.COM)

<Fl>:

DOS

Data transfer (For details,

between

the P-G and personal 3.4 in Appendix 3.)

computer

(FLOADAT)

c F2 > : floadat

see Section

Referencing

the results

of compile

or decompile

processing

< F3 > : View result

Link function

< F4 > : Linker

and 0

are detailed

below. any desired command 2. as a utility. For an explanation of how to perform this 2.1 of Appendix

The user can register registration,

see Section

(1) Referencing

the results

of compile

or decompile or decompile

processing processing, enabling these

(starting

FLVIEW.BAT) result using file and map file a commercially even before

Upon the completion are created. available editor. These

of compile files are

an execution their reference

of text

format,

By using is terminated.

this function,

however,

files can be referenced

FAPT LADDER

[Operation] 0) Press < F3 > on the utility screen.

Then,

the pop-up the <Enter

screen > key.

shown

below

appears.

These

files can now

be referenced

by

pressing

$P. :.er C .. :.... ..::i..l::>. .j: ..+ The user can specify (.err: Execution result the type of files to be referenced, filei.map: Map file). simply by changing the file name extension

4. OPERATION

(2)

Link

During language required

linking, can

load modules be used only

created with

in the C language

are linked (STEP

with a ROM format

file.

The C is not

PMCRC3RC4RC4

SEQ)IQCINBINB2.

Linking

when the C language

is not used.

U
l

U 1 II
ROM format file
Load modules fn C language

- gig linking and to be performed

Transferred
andPMC

to the ROM writers

(Note 1)

This function this function, and linked

enables an object

on a personal

computer.

In addition, transferred

with to

language

load modules below).

can be separately

on the PMC (dotted

line in the figure

C proqram

development

environment

for PMC-RC

(IRC3IRC4IQCINB)

Personal

computer Link control statement creation tool FAPT LADDER

C language

source

Link control

source Ibject file MCARD file)

Convert (Note 2) W ROM format file

iC286 (compiler)

I ,tt
BND386 BLD386 OJ386 (binder) t (binder) $_ (converter

FANUC library

distribution

)
_ HEX2SREC (Note l)-

c Intel hexadecimal load module

Convert (Note 2) Link _ROM format file -Object file (MCARD file) with C language

--

I-I-

.I

-176-

4.

OPERATION

(Note

l)FAPT

LADDER-II does not allow Intel hexadecimal

load modules

to be linked. Users Manual.

Before

link operation, convert the file format by referring to the HEX2SREC

(Note

2)With

FAPT LADDER-II, file cannot

ROM format files are no longer used. by compile processing alone,

This means that a ROM conversion between an

format

be created

object file and ROM format file being required.

A detailed description is given below.

(4 Uselng method of HEX2SREC

Clanguage load modules created in the development languages indicated above cannot be directly linked. Perform the below operation before linking.

[Operation] @I Execute HEX2SREC.EXE in response to the DOS prompt. Specify as follows:

IA:\FLADDER\APPENDIX>

HEx2sREc

input-file-name

output-file-name

Conversion is performed.

@I Check that specified file names have been created using the DIR command.

Specify an output file name (for example, linking.

SAMPLE.SR)

as the load module file name for

(Note)

When

the extension Output to .SR.

of an input file name

is omitted,

the extension name

.HEX

is is in

assumed. changed

is directed

to a file with the same

but the extension

The specification

of the following files has the same effect

input/output:
HEXZSREC HEXZSREC HEXZSREC HEXZSREC SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE SAMPLE.SR

SAMPLE.SR

SAMPLE.HEX SAMPLE

(b) Converting

between an object file and ROM format file

a ROM format file cannot be created by compiling a source program. the following extra work is required.

With FAPT LADDER-II,

Instead, in the case of link processing,

Before link processing:

Conversion

from an object file (MCARD

file) to a ROM format file

After link processing:

Conversion

from a ROM format file to an object file (MCARD

file)

-177-

4. OPERATION

[Operation] @ Compile the source program (to create an object file).

G3 Select

(I/O) from the off-line

menu.

Press the < F9 > key on the I/O screen.

Then, the l/O (ROM FILE) screen

is displayed.

(Note)

The 110 screen

does

not display

information

relating

to the

c F9 > key,

but the

< F9 >

key can be selected.

Before format object

link processing, file.

select

Fl [WRITE] select

to convert F2 [READ]

the object to convert

file (MCARD the ROM

file) to a ROM format file to an

After link processing, file).

file (MCARD

Fl F2

KEV KEY

WRITE ( Memory Card -> ROM FORMAT FILE 1 AEFlO ( Memory Card <- ROM FORMAT FILE 1 END

F10 KEY

Fig. 4.5.9 (b)

-178-

4.

OPERATION

(c) Starting

link processing

[Operation] @ Press < F4 > on the utility screen.

GZJ Then,

the pop-up

screen

shown

below

appears.

Pressing

the

<Enter>

key displays

the

link screen.

Specify

the model below

to be used for link processing, indicates the correspondence

by changing between

the model

file name. and model file

The table names.

the PMC

models

PMC model

Model

file name (Initial value)

PMC-RC3 PMC-RC4 PMCRC4 PMC-QC PMC-NB PMC-NB2 (STEP SEQ)

f103400. tbl 1104000. lbl fl04200. tbf

1103700. tbl 1103800. tbl fl04300. tbl

The link screen

(Fig. 4.5.9 (c)) appears.

Linker

Load

wdule

f i Ie name file name Edlllan

A:YDATAYC-WDULE.

SR

ROM forut Series

A:YDATAYSAWLE.UEX tool name Progru no

bchlne

NC d WC na.e

Fig. 4.5.9 (c)

Link Screen

-179-

4.

OPERATION

(Note)

If an

invalid model file is spectfted, the status line of the link screen does not display a In such a case, check the following:

model name.

When the newly entered file name is invalid + Enter a valid file name.

When the specified model file is not installed --* Install the model file.

(d) Linking

[Operation] m Specify the load module file name and ROM format file name to link. name must conform to DOS specifications. (--------.
l

The load module file file name program should be name for

Here the load module * *). (Specity an output

specified

with its extension

HEX2SREC.)

Select [EXEC].

(3) Termination

[Operation] 0 Select [END].

The screen display returns to the main menu screen.

4.5.10 Selecting
Selecttng ON-LINE

On-Line Function from Off- Line Function

FUNCTION from the off-line menu enables the use of the On- Line (selected 4.6 On-Line Function.

program) functions.

For details, see Section

(Correct LADDER

a part of the (4) Coversion in the APPENDIX

of a ROM

format

file in the 3.2 Conversion PROGRAM)

from FAPT

3 CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE

[Present] (1) Select appears. ]Off-Line Function] from the initial menu, then select F6 [l/O]. The [l/O] screen

[Correctron] (5) Select appears. [Off-Line Function] from the initial menu, then select [l/O]. The [l/O] screen

- 180-

4. OPERATION

4.6 4.6.1

Online function The outline of Online function Outline

function enables the onscreen computer function monitoring connected are: and modification of ladder an RS232C programs cable. and

4.6.1.1
The signal on-line

statuses

using a personal of the on-line

to the CNC through

The main features

Onscreen

monitoring

of ladder

programs

Online editing

of ladder

programs

Display

and modification

of PMC parameters

Onscreen

monitoring

and modification

of signal statuses

Input and output the PM0

of a program

to and from the PMC (loading

from the PMC and storing

to

Writing to F-ROM

[Note]
The on-line options:

The on-line

monitoring

function

of a step sequence

program

is not supported.

function

can be selected

from the initial

menu

by selecting

either

of the following

two

ON-LINE

FUNCTION

ON-LINE

(SELECTED

PROGRAM)

The two options

are outlined

below:

- 181 -

4.

OPERATION

(1) On-line function outline

(a) ON-LINE Select FUNCTION to load a ladder program from program the PMC to a personal computer and

this option

subsequently

monilor

and modify

the ladder

and signal statuses.

- FAPT LADDER-II Select ON-LINE

, FUNCTION. is loaded from

,----

CNCiPMC

A sequence program the PMC (automatic). Ladder monitor

1 Sequence
I

program

(RAM) ON

1
I

Sequence

program

(RAM)
I

01
1 Sequence

7 Power program

On-line function *IB, Diagnosis . lnputioutput (Loading from or storing to the PMC, writing to FROM) Communication (Communication with the PMC)

(F-ROM)

1
I

J @

File storage

-182-

4. OPERATION

(b)

ON-LINE

(SELECTED

PROGRAM) selected using [PROGRAM SELECT] on the initial

Select this optron to store a program

menu of the PMC and to monitor and modify the ladder program and signal statuses. This function enables computer. This function enables the ladder monitor/online edit function to be applied SELECT]. to a relay a ladder program, held by the PMC, to be loaded into a personal

comment or net comment

of the program selected by [PROGRAM

- FAPT LADDER-II

1, (SELECTED

CNUPMC

Select ON-LINE PROGRAM).

0
A sequence program held on the PMC is compared with the sequence program specified on the personal computer (automatic). < If the programs do not match > Select one of the following monitoring methods: . Loading of the program from the PMC . Storing of the program to the PMC . Respecifying the program on the personal computer Continuing or stopping the processing Ladder monitor Sequence r

Sequence

program (RAM) 1 Power ON program (F-ROM)

@1
1 Sequence

t
program (RAM)

On-line function . Diagnosis 2@ . Input/output (Loading from or storing to the PMC. writing to FROM)

. Communication
with the PMC)

(Communication

File B

. Relay comment . Net comment

L

- 183-

4. OPERATION

4.6.1.2

Starting the on-line function

(1) Specifying the on-line function

To

use the on-line

function,

select

ON-LINE

FUNCTION

or ON-LINE FUNCTION

(SELECTED or ON-LINE see the

PROGRAM) on the initial menu screen. The operation of the function (SELECTED PROGRAM) partly depends on whether ON-LINE For details is selected. of the subsequent operation,

description of the function to be used.

RBO(STEP SEQ)

[ C:YDATRYSAWLE I
Version 01.0

ROBE-9201-3503

Press [TABI key to move the cursor and press [ENTERI or [SPRCEI key to select.

bff-Line Function

I I

On-Line Function On-Line (selected orogram)

Exit

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (a)

(Note)

Before attempting to use the on-line function,

connect all cables and set up the PMC.

Before selecting the on-line function, see Section 4.6.2, Preparation.

- 184-

4.

OPERATION

(2) Selecting ON-LINE

If ON-LINE screen to appear.

FUNCTION is selected, performing monitor the following displayed, function steps causes select key. the ladder function monitor either

FUNCTION

With lhe ladder menu or by pressing

screen

a desired

from a pull-down

the corresponding

[Displaying

the ladder

monitor

screen] Related section

Select

ON-LINE

FUNCTION.

Communication (automatic) &

with the PMC is executed.

. .

.. . . .

See Section

4.6.6,

Communication.

A program

is loaded

from the PMC (automatic). onlv when required.)

See Section Loading

4.6.5.1,

(This step is executed J The ladder subproaram monitor screen J Select a subproqram.

from the PMC.

. . .

..

. .

.. .

appears

(automatic).

. _. . . . .
screen appears.

. .

J
The ladder monitor

1
Ladder sections.

See Section

4.6.4.1,

monitor.

The screens

are outlined

below.

For details,

see the corresponding

-185-

4. OPERATION

(a) Communication Selecting

with the PMC ON-LINE FUNCTION dialog box) to appear causes the online below. monitor Communication screen (SET

COMMUNICATION starts automatrcally.

as shown

with the PMC

Try

to

connect

with

PllC

0000 0000

F7 Splist

FB Search

F9 Symbol

Fl@ Seting

Fig. 4.6.1.2

(b)

(Note)

If communicatron COMMUNICATION Check

falls. click the (PARAMETER] dialog box. The 4.6.6,

button

in the SET parameter settings appear.

communication Communication.)

the settings.

(See Section

- 186-

4. OPERATION

(b) Loading After

from the PMC with the PMC starts normally, the SET COMMUNICATION dialog A

communication automatically

box closes program

and the LOAD loaded

FROM PMC

dialog

box is opened

in its place.

is automatically

from the PMC.

Lid
-Transfer . LADDER data

ftom

PNC

..,

type 0 ALL

Fig. 4.6.1.2

(c) is to be used, loading from the PMC can

(Note)

When the most be skipped. Displaying

recently

monitored

program

(c)

the SUBPROGRAM is loaded appears.

dialog

box (Ladder

monitor

function) dialog box for the ladder box as

Once a program monitor described [Operation] il, 8 Posrtion function below:

from the PMC, the SUBPROGRAM Specify the subprogram

to be monitored

in the dialog

the cursor

to the desired key.

subprogram

by pressing

the

< t > or < 1 7 key.

Press the <Enter>

The ladder

diagram

for the selected

subprogram

appears.

LEVECl LEVEL2 PO0001 PO0002 P00010 PO0011 PO0021 PO0022 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR (OPEN LEFT DOOR (GRIP WORK PIECE (PUT WORK PIECE ) ) ) )

... ..,.,; :,.,: ,:., , ,. ,. :. : . j .:

MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWIIT-Rl MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWIIT-Ll

PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND PUT DOWN A WORK MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2 MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

(CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) (CLOSE LEFT DOOR )

Ok

11 Cancel]

Fig. 4.6.1.2

(d)

- 187-

4. OPERATION

(b) Decompiling If ON-LINE input/output following

a selected (SELECTED function

program PROGRAM) on-line is selected after a program the program is obtained using the the

of the

function,

but before

is decompiled,

message

appears:

IMemory

card

format

file

has

been

updated.

Decompile

it

? (Y/N)

To use the on-line For details,

function

for the program 1.

obtained

using the input/output

function,

type Y.

see Appendix

6)

Selecting When

a monitoring communication

method with the PMC starts normally is compared below after ON-LINE (SELECTED If

PROGRAM) the programs Select

is selected,

the selected the dialog

program

with that held on the PMC.

do not match, function.

box shown

appears.

a desrred

[LOAD]

: : : :

A program is overwritten.

is loaded

from PMC memory

and the selected

program

[STORE]

The selected replaces

program

is stored already

to the PMC.

The selected

program

the program program program already

on the PMC.

[SELECT] [CONTINUE]

The selected The selected

is modified. appears on the ladder monitor screen, but

the program monitor [END]

on the PMC is not replaced. correctly.

Note that ladder

display

is not performed terminates.

The on-line

function

N:E-3160 1 Load

Selected 1 Load
Store

program from
to

is

not

same.

PMC program PMC program

memory. memory.

IStore)

Select IDisregard] 1 Quit 1 Disregard Quit

program. difference. function.

(e)

On-Line
Fig. 4.6.1.2

(Note)

If the selected above appears.

program

does not match for example,

the program

on the PMC the dialog is modified

box shown by means

This occurs,

when a single program edit functron. for a program the subprogram

of off-line

editing

or by using an internal monitor not function

When the on-line dialog box does

is started Instead.

that is loaded selection

or stored,

the

appear.

screen

appears

immediately.

- 189-

4.

OPERATION

(4) Displaying The on-line

status line.

the PMC status (icon)

functron indicates the current

PMC statuses,

using

Icons

at the right

end of the

(a) Display

positions

and types of icons

Displayed of icon
1. File 2. Diagnose 3, l/o 4. ~OmWniCakiOn

position

I t t 000 r

Fig. 4.6.1.2

(f)

PMC alarm The following

status icon indicates whether the PMC is in the alarm state.

Yellow : Alarm exists on PMC

Gray : Alarm not exiits on PMC

Fig. 4.6.1.2

(g)

(2,

Ladder

executron

status whether a ladder program is running.

The following

icon indicates

Program on PMC is running.

Program on PMC is stopped.

Fig. 4.6.1.2 (3) PMC communication The following status whether

(h)

icon rndrcates

a communication

link with the PMC is established.

Fig. 4.6.1.2

(i)

-190-

4. OPERATION

4.6.1.3

Menus
figure shows the menu configuration of the on-line function. For details of each

The following function,

see the corresponding

sections.

On-line

function

-1

I. File

File save Off-Line -E Exit Function

-_; !. Diagnose

Ladder

Monitor

(on-line

Editor)

PMC Status Signal Status Timer -I-

PMC Parameter

PMC alarm RUN/STOP System

status

I:

Counter

Keep relay Data table control Data table

the ladder

Information

Load from PMC Store to PMC 4. Communication F-ROM write Communication

Fig. 4.6.1.3

Menu Configuration

4. OPERATION

4.6.2

Preparation
attempting to use the on-line function, make the following preparations:

Before

Connect

the PMC to the personal

computer

via an RS232C

cable.

(4.6.2.1)

($1 Check

and set the parameters

for the PMC.

(4.6.2.2

to 4.624)

4.6.2.1
Connect Specify

Connecting the cable

one end of the RS-232C the selected cable to the COMl dialog function. or RS232-2 parameter port on the main board of the PARAMETERS to RS232-1, of the FOR 1 or COM2 port of the personal box, called from the SET computer.

port in the PARAMETER dialog box of the on-line

COMMUNICATION Connect CNC. ONLINE the other Specify

end of the cable selected screen port

to the RS232-1 in the CHANNEL When

the

MONITOR

of the PMC.

the cable

is connected specify

specify

for CHANNEL.

When the cable

is connected

to RS232-2,

2 for CHANNEL.

192-

4. OPERATION

4.6.2.2
The

Parameter
parameters screen. for

screen for on-line monitor

the orvline monitor are set using the PARAMETERS FOR ONLINE screen

MONITOR causes

Pressing monitor

the [MONIT) screen

then [ONLINE] to appear.

soft keys on the PMC menu

the on-line

parameter

PARAMETER

FOR

ONLINE

MONITOR = ,. .,.

MONIT

RUN

CPU ID RS-232C CHANNEL BAUD RATE PARITY STOP BIT TIMER 1 TIMER 2 TIMER 3 MAX PACKET

= &Q/NOT
=

USE

= 300/600/1200/2400/4800~ih%tti/19200 = *ONE/ODD/EVEN = 1 BIT/%.'&S = 0 = 5000 = 15000 SIZE = 1024

RS-232C=INACTIVE

EMG ST

INIT

Fig. 4.6.2.2

(a)

[Note] 1.

When screen page,

using

the g-inch

CRT

screen,

the PARAMETERS To switch from

FOR ONLINE the current page

MONITOR to another

is displayed use the <Page

using Up>

two pages. or <Page when

Down > key. is set on the PARAMETERS FOR

[Note] 2.

The CRTMDI ONLINE

is necessary screen.

the parameter

MONITOR

- 193-

4. OPERATION

4.6.2.3

Modifying parameters

Some of the parameters can be modified by the cursor on screen moved by the cursor keys, and some of them can modified by entering number or characters with the cursor on them. [INIT] Soft key [INIT] initializes all these parameters to the default value. have to modify any initial parameters, BAUD RATE parameters at least. however, In most case, you dont and you should confirm the CHANNEL

[Note] 1. The parameters CHANNEL,

can be set at Parameter parameters 2. A modified operating. are independent parameter After

BAUD

RATE,

PARITY

and STOP dialog hoc.

BIT

must

correspond with the parameters used by On-Line Function of FAPT LADDER, which dialog box of Communication of the parameters And these used in [LOJ screen which can be monitor driver next starts USE for the RS-232C This

changed on [SPEED] screen. becomes valid when the on-line specify NOT modifying a parameter,

parameter to stop the on-line monitor driver. operation validates the modified parameter.

Then, restore the setting to USE.

4.6.2.4

Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function

When using the on-line function to connect a personal computer to the PMC, first start the on-line monitor driver that provides the communication parameter on the parameter monitor driver. Setting function of the PMC. The setting of the RS232C the operation monitor driver. of the on-line The driver screen of the on-line monitor controls starts the on-line

USE for the parameter

occupies the line specified in the CHANNEL parameter and enters the wait state. PMC and personal computer can be connected. When the on-line monitor driver starts, the status indication from INACTIVE TO STAND-BY. RS232C = INACTIVE 1 RS-232C = STAND-BY Conversely, setting the RS232C : 21 : 0

In this state, the

at the bottom of the screen changes

parameter to NOT USE stops the on-line monitor driver. to the personal computer. Another input/output

In this can

state, the PMC cannot be connected use the RS232C

function

line connected to that channel only after termination to the personal

of the on-line monitor driver. If the parameter monitor is pending, computer, the on-line

Once the on-line monitor driver stops, the status indication is set to NOT USE while the PMC is connected STOPPING is displayed as the status. The following statuses can be displayed:

changes to INACTIVE.

driver stops as soon as the personal computer is disconnected.

While disconnection

- 194-

4. OPERATION

Status indication INACTIVE STOPPIMG The on-line The on-line computer STARTING STAND-BY CONNECTED

Status of the on-line monitor monitor driver driver

monitor

driver

is not operating. is waiting for the personal

to be disconnected. for the on-line driver driver monitor driver is in progress.

Start processing The on-line The on-line computer.

monitor monitor

is operating. is connected to the personal

NO OPTION TIMEOUT ERROR

The reader/punch The connection The connection STAND-BY)

interface

function

is not supported. of a time-out (Same error. status as

was lost because terminated

DISCONNECTED

normally.

NO CONNECTION

The cable

is not connected.

[EMG ST] Pressing whether terminated the ]EMG ST] soft key immediately is currently established. stops the on-line this key condrtions. monitor if the driver irrespective cannot of be

the connection normally

Use

connection

because

of abnormal

communication

[Note] 1.

If USE is specified monitor on-line driver monitor

as the control automatically occupies cannot

parameter when the

of the on-line

monitor

driver, turned

the on-line on. The other

starts driver

the CNC

is subsequently

line while

it is operating.

In this state,

inputioutput 2.

functions

use the line. is operating, the following functions cannot be used:

While the on-line [PMCLAD], [IO],

monitor [EDIT],

driver

[SYSPRM].

4.6.2.5

Starting and stopping the on-line monitor function (Only for Power Mate-H)
monitor function to connect function a personal computer to the PMC, first start the or stopping the driver,

When using the on-line driver that provides

the communication

of the PMC.

When starting

It is necessary

to set either

of the following

parameters.

Parameter Parameter

screen

for on-line

monitor

(PARAMETERS

FOR ONLINE driver driver

MONITOR)

RS-232-C

= USE NOT USE

: :

On-line On-line

monitor monitor

is used. is not used.

[Note]

The CRT/MD1 ONLINE

is necessary screen.

when

the parameter

is set on the PARAMETERS

FOR

MONITOR

Bit 6 of parameter

No. 0101 in the Power

Mate-H

4. OPERATION

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2

#f

#6

#6 = 0 : On-line

monitor monitor

driver driver

is not used. is used.

1 : On-line
When either

of the following

conditions

consists,

the driver

is started.

0
l

Parameter

RS-232-C

is USE. in the Power Mate-H is 1

Bit 6 of parameter

No. 0101

[Note] 1.

The on-line

monitor

driver

occupies

the line while it is operating. cannot line, use the line. to display the above-

In this state, other input/output If other mentioned 2. input/output parameter functions

functions use the

it is necessary driver.

and stop the on-line driver is operating,

monitor

While the on-line

l l

monitor

the following functions

functions

cannot

be used.

[PMCLADJ, [EDIT],

[l/O),

[EDIT],

and [SYSPRM]

on CRT/MDI.

[SYSTEM

PARAM],

and (I/O] functions

on DPLIMDI.

4.6.3 4.6.3.1

File File save

modified function. with online editor or transferred from PMC will be lost unless executing this

A program File save

(1) Menu

position Save program dialog box, pull down

To activate menu.

[ 1, File] menu,

and select

[File save]

on the

Il.

File Fiie

,s& .... ... Off-Line Exit

Function

Fig. 4.6.3.1

(a)

-196-

4. OPERATION

(2) diaglog box view

Program

name
I SAMPLE c

C: Y DATA%

Source program name saved, is displayed.

to be

Save program

Close diaglog

box

Fig. 4.6.3.1

(b)

(3) Operation

(a) Pressing @

the [OK] button a new program name box closes.

When specifying The program

is saved

and the dialog

@I When specifying A dialog

an existing below,

program prompting

name the operator to specify whether the program is to

box, shown

be overwritten [OK] [CANCEL]

appears,

as follows: is overwritten. is not overwritten. The dialog box appears again.

: :

The program The program

Overwrite

this program

Fig. 4.6.3.1

(c)

- 197-

4.

OPERATION

When

the contents

of an edited

program

have not been

preserved

by selecting

F7

[UPDATE] The

on the on-line edit function (See Section 4.6.4.1, operation becomes invalid.

Ladder monitor.) as shown below.

File save

A dialog box appears,

Press the < Enter > or -z Esc > key to close the dialog box.

IN.E -

3158

Ladder

diagram

has

been

modified.

Fig. 4.6.3.1

(d)

(b) Pressing the [CANCEL]

button

The specified file is not saved, and the dialog box closes.

4.6.3.2
The Off-Line Function.

Selecting Off-Line Function from On-Line Function

function can be selected from the On-Line function. For details, see 4.5 Off-Line

(1) Menu

positlon Function, pull down [I. File] menu, and select [Off-Line

To use Off-Line menu.

Function] on the

4.6.3.3

Exit

This function is used to finish On-Line Function.

(1)

Menu

position

Pull down [ 1. File] menu, and select [Exit] on the menu.

1.

File File Exit Fig. 4.6.3.3 (a) save Function

Off-Line

- 198-

4. OPERATION

(2) Dialog

box view

Are

you

sure

you

want

to

exit

Fig. 4.6.3.3

(b)

(3) Operation (a) Push [OK] button. Online function ends lnitfal Menu appears. For details, see Section (4.6.4.1 Ladder Monitor)

When

modifications

made

with online editor have not yet saved

by executing

File

save operation, the following dialog box appears.

fl

Source program name to be

I

saved, is displayed.

Save

changes

? pq

Fig. 4.6.3.3

(c)

[Yes] [No]

File save is executed The modifications ends.

and On-Line Function ends. and On-Line Function

: :

by on-line editor is canceled

[Cancel]

Cancel to [Exit]

- 199-

4.

OPERATION

When

there

are on the

any

modifications editor. this

which File

have save

not

been

preserved is canceled.

by

cF7> And the

[UPDATE] following

online

operation

dialog

box appears.

Ladder diagram has Sure to quit ?

been

modified

Fig. 4.6.3.3

(d)

[Yes]

The modifications ends.

by on-line

editor

is canceled

and On-Line

Function

[No]

Cancel

to [Exit].

4.6.4

Diagnose
menu contains the menu Items as shown below.

12. Diagnose]

Lddder

Monitor

PMC Status Signal Status + PMC Parameter PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

for for for for for for for

Ladder Monitor/Online Editor window PMC Status window Signal status window sub-menu of PMC Parameter windows PMC alarm message dialog box RUNSTOP the ladder dialog box System Information dialog box

-2oo-

4.

OPERATION

1.

File

[Level

Signal Status + PMC Parameter PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder
L

NET

00001-00006

DO I ROOOO.O

-IL
SUB END1 1

DO

SUB END2

'SUB END

64

F7

FB

F9

FlO

SpLisl Search Symbol

Setinc

<Shift > + s + F8 S-Se1

Fig. 4.6.4.1

(a)

- 202 -

4.

OPERATION

(b) Ladder

monitor

function lists the operations performed by the ladder monitor function.

The table below

Moving

the cursor

to the

selecting

a subprogram

Symbol

Displaying the symbol or comment defined at a specified address Switching between ladder monitor and on-line editing, switching between symbol display and comment display

F9 : [Symbol]

(e)

Setting

FlO : [Setting]

(f)

(c)

Selecting A ladder

a subprogram program

(F7 [SpList]) and edited in units of subprograms. This function is used to

is monitored

list existing

subprograms

and to select

the subprogram

to be displayed.

- 203 -

4.

OPERATION

@I Subprogram Pressing program

list display

screen causes a window to be displayed, a cursor key as shown or the below. > key Select then the the

F7 (SpList]

to be displayed

by pressing

<Page

c Enter > key.

[Note]

The on-line

monitoring

function

of a step sequence program

program

is not supported.

The subprogram

of a step sequence

is not selected.

Sub*program

,list-

rJimLZ LEVEL2 PO0001 PO0002 SPOOOlO PO0011 PO0021 PO0022 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR (OPEN LEFT DOOR (GRIP WORK PIECE (PUT WORK PIECE (CLOSE RIGHT ) ) ) ) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Rl MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Ll

PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND PUT DOWN A WORK MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2 MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

DOOR) )

(CLOSE LEFT DOOR

Fig. 4.6.4.1

(b)

Display

information information appears on the subprogram screen

The following

LEVEL1 LEVEL2
Ladder (No mark) Step Sequence (S mark) -

PO0001 PO0002

(OPEN RIGHT DOOR) MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Rl (OPEN LEFT DOOR) MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWITH-Ll (GRIP "OR; PIECE) PICK UP ~A WORK ON THE STAND

_IpPOOOIO1

I
Symbol Sub-program No. Fig. 4.6.4.1 (c)

I
Coil comment

(d) Searching

for data (F8 [SEARCH])/Entering

the search

data (<Shift

>

+ <F8>)

ii>

Searching A search

for data (F8 [SEARCH]) for a net starts when the < FB> key is pressed after the search data has

been entered. If the < F8> key is pressed without specifying any search data data, a search is made for

the data set specified A search can be made

in (.a below, for several

Entering types

search

(see (b)). below:

of data, as described

- 204

4. OPERATION

@Address/symbol Searching Searching for an address: for a symbol: instruction address symbol + < F8> + <F8> Example) Example) X0000.0 SYMBOLI + < F8 > + < F8 >

lFunctional
Searching

number/name S + functional-instruction-number Example) + < F8 > Sl + < F8 >

for a number:

Searching

for a name:

functional-instruction-name

+ < F8 > Example) ENDI + < F8 >

lNet number:
0 Entering search data (< Shift >

net-number

+ < F8 >

Example)

IO + < F8 >

+ < F8 >) by means for identical box appears. press the c Tab > key. To change the setting, of operation data, 0, described above, While can this

Data for which a search be registered. function is active,

is to be made search dialog item,

To repeatedly the following

use this function.

To position

the cursor

to another

press the < 7 > or < 1 > key.

;earch Data xoooo.o]

. Data

Kind ADDR/SYMBOL WRT-COIL FUNCTION NET-NO

. @ @ 0 J

Fig. 4.6.4.1

(d)

.SEARCH

DATA

Enter the search

data:

address, instruction number

symbol, name, (number

net number, functional only, without

functional instruction S)

.DATA

TYPE

Select

the type of the search

data.

- 205 -

4. OPERATION

(e)

Displaying a symbol (F9 [SYMBOL]) This function eF9> displays the symbol or comment defined at a specified address. When

is pressed, the following dialog box appears.

Address Symbol

Relay

Comment

1 1

Fig. 4.6.4.1

(e)

ADDRESS

: : : :

Enter

the

address

of

the

symbol

or

comment

to

be

displayed. SYMBOL The symbol at the specified address is appears. The relay comment The coil comment at the specified address appears. at the specified address appears.

RELAY COMMENT

. COIL COMMENT
(f)

Setting a function (FlO [SET]) This function includes the following:

. LADDER

MODE:

Switching editing

between

ladder

monitor

and

on-line

For details of the on-line edit function, see (2) line editing in this section.

On-

. SYMBOL

& COMMENT

DISPLAY:Selecting

the

address

display

mode

in ladder

monitoring or on-line editing Three types of data can be displayed: address,

symbol, and relay comment. FUNCTION PARAMETER: Selecting functional displayed When the < FlO > key is pressed, the dialog box shown below appears: key. To change the setting, press whether the parameters are to of be

instructions

To move the cursor to another item, press the <Tab> the < t > or < 1 > key.

- 206 -

4.

OPERATION

Dpisplay
- Ladder Mode @Ladder Monitor

satking

OOnline

Editor

-Symbol

6 Comment

Display

l Symbol
(1 Address 0 0 Relay Comment & Address & Address & Symbol Relay Comment (3 Symbol

(7 Relay Comment

Fig. 4.6.4.1 (f)

(2) On-line editing

To select the "OnlineEditor" screen, down menu. select [Ladder monitor] setting from the 12. Diagnose] puffIn the then press F10 : [Setting). The Display dialog box appears.

dialog box, select [OnlIne Editor].

-Ladder

Mode @Online Editor

(1 Ladder Monitor

-Symbol

& Comment

Display

l Symbol
0 Address (3 Relay Comment 0 Symbol 6 Address 6 Address 6 Symbol

(3 Relay Comment 0 Relay Comment

Fig. 4.6.4.1

(g)

- 207 -

4. OPERATION

(b) On-line editing On-line editing operations (1)

modification c Delete 7, again

number

+ cF6>

_ine deletion

deletion

\let, line, element

<Ctrl>

+ <Fi

nsertion

- 209 -

4.

OPERATION

On-line

editing

operations

(2)

ursor movemen

e cursor

up or

the cursor

to the left

<4->,

<+>

Symbol

Displaying the symbol or comment defined at a specified address Switching between ladder monitor and on-line editing, switching between symbol drsplay and comment display, etc. Updating the ladder program

F9 : (Symbol]

See (l),
Ladder monitor.

Setting

FlO : [Setting]

See (I),
Ladder monitor.

3thers

F7 : [UPDATE] < Shrft > + < F7 >

(i) 0 (i) @I

Restortng the ladder program to the state existing prior to editing

(c) Changrng To change The

the input mode the input mode on the edit screen, Input mode is displayed at the use the following bottom mode right keys. of the screen. When

current

corner

nothing

is displayed,

it indicates

that overwrite

is selected

(default).

Insert mode Key Function

: : :
mode :

-c Insert Z
When inserted a contact or coil is entered posrtion. mode. in this mode, the contact or coil is at the cursor

Cancel

Press the <Insert

> key in insert

~8 Delete Key

< Delete >

-210-

4. OPERATION

Function

: :

When the line connect position is deleted.

function

is used in this mode,

data at the cursor

Cancel

Press the < Delete > key in delete

mode.

(d) Input Contact/Coil To input a contact <Enter > key. element is added to the ladder diagram. The following keys are used for or coil. register the input element in the key input line, then press the

The registered this operation:

[Keys used for registration] 0

Set +
Key Function

t: :
<Fl Set 4 > + k t_ at the input line. an address and

An addressed pressing

is input to the key input line by entering

the < Fl > key.

Set Key

---I

i t: : <Shift > + < Fl >

Set --I +

Function An addressed pressing

/ +

at the input line. an address and

/ I--

is input to the key input line by entering

the <Shift

> and < Fl > keys.

Set Key

: :

<F2>

Function An addressed pressing

Set e
u key.

at the input line. is input to the key input line by entering an address and

the <F2>

Set
Key

+
: :
<Shift Set e e > + <F2> at the input line. is input to the key input line by entering > and CF2> keys. an address and

Function An addressed pressing

the <Shift

6) Set
Key

-(S)-

: :

-z Shift > + < F3 >

Set -(S)-(S)at the input line. is input to the key input lrne by entering an address and

Function An addressed pressing

the < F3 > key.

G3 Set
Key

-(R)-

: :
the

< Shift > + < F3 >

Set -(R)-(Ft)at the input line. is input to the key input line by entering keys. an address and

Functron An addressed is pressing

< Shilt 7 and < F37

-2ll-

4.

OPERATION

Select Key Function

Contact/Coil

: :

<TAB>, Select <TAB

<Shift> Contact/Coil > changes

+ <TAB> at the input line. Contact/Coil in the input reverse. in the order indicated below: line to the forward

direction.

< Shift > + -Z TAB > changes and coils are displayed

The contacts

Change Key Function

address

only address Change + < Enter > address on ladder diagram without changing input line.

: :

The contact

or coil at the cursor

position

is modified.

[Input @

Key] Input ContactCoil

Key
Function

c Enter > Write ContactCoil which is set at input line to ladder diagram.

(e) Connect/delete

line

Input - Key Function <F4> Input horizontal horizontal line. line. If In the delete mode, delete Contact/Coil or

(2) Entering Key Function

I <F5> A vertical delete ltne IS entered to the right of the cursor position. In

mode,

a vertical

line is deleted.

(f)

Inserting

a net, line, or element

(1)

Inserting Key Function

a net

: :

<Ctrl> inserts

+ Fl [Netlns] a single blank net after the net at the cursor position.

-212-

4. OPERATION

Inserting Key Function

a lrne

: :

< Ctrl > + F2 (Lilns]

Inserts a single blank line under the line to which the cursor is positioned.

Inserting Key Function

an element

: :

< Ctrl>

+ F3 [Elmlns] at the cursor position.

Inserts a single blank element

(g) Cut and paste function

CO Specifyrng Key Function

a range

: :

< Ctrl>
Specifies means i) ii)

+ F4 [Select] the range to be cut or copied. procedure: to the first net in the desired and < F4 > keys. range. .at the The range is specified by

of the following the cursor <Ctrl>

Position

Press the bottom

(SEL is displayed

right corner

of the screen.) range. is explained in @I

iii)

Position Cutting

the cursor to the last net in the desired and copying of a specified net range

or @I below. Cancel

Press the < Ctrl > and < F4 > keys in range

mode.

Cutting Key Function

a net

: :

<Ctrl>

+ F5 [Cut] When cut a net range portion is specified, in the the specified buffer for net range subsequent

Cuts a net. is cut. pasting. The

is saved

Copying Key Function

a net

: :

<Ctrl> Copies

+ F6 [Copy] a net into the buffer for subsequent range pasting. When a net

range is specified,

the specified

is copied.

GO Pasting Key Function

a net

: :

cCtrl> Writes buffer.

+ F7 [Paste] a net that was previously cut or copied and saved into the

-213-

4. OPERATION

(h) Cursor 0 Move cursor Key Function Up/Down

: :

<T>,<l>
Up/Down press cursor, When press < 1 > at the top of the screen the screen scrolls. or < 4 > at the bottom of the screen,

r3

Move cursor Key Function

to Left/Right

: :

<c>
Move

, <+>
cursor to the left/light. the cursor < -+> When pressing moves < +> at the left end and right end.

of the screen, When moves pressing

to one line above

at the right and left end.

end of the screen,

the cursor

one line below

At the top.bottom

of the screen,

the screen

scrolls.

Move to thww top of ladder Key Function

: :

-z Home >
Move cursor to the top of ladder

Move cursor Key Function

to the bottom

of ladder

: :

<End> Move cursor to the bottom of ladder.

Previous Key Functron

page

:
:

< Page Up >

Go to the previous page.

@iI Next page

Key Function

:
:

-c Page down >

Go to the next page

(i)

Others

6)

Update Key Function

: :

<F7> Update the modrfication to the ladder diagram on PMC.

Note)

When the [UPDATE] Before permitted. executing

function lhrs

is used, the ladder check whether

program

on the PMC is modified. of the ladder program is

function,

modification

-214-

4. OPERATION

@I Undo Key Function

: :

< Shift > + < F7 >

Restore ladder diaggram just before the last update < F7 >

Note) 4.6.4.2
PMC

Applying

the [Undo]

function

causes

the effects

of editrng

since the last update

to be lost.

PMC Status window

window displays the status of program on PMC.

Status

(1) Menu

position PMC Status window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC Status] on

To activate the menu

2. Diagnose d Ladder Monitor

PMC Statue-

. +

Signal Status PMC Parameters PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

(2) Window

view

!iEkq ***/**
l
*a**/** PMC TYPE PMC-*'* SCAN1 CUR MAX NIN
Oms 7

-Series/Edition -Series/Edition

of PMC of ladder

Editing

Card

-Connected

PMC type

Current

Oms -Maximum Oms-Minimum

scan time scan time scan time

Date/Time oo/oo/oo oo:oo:oo

-Month/Date/Year 7Hour:Minute:Second

Fig. 4.6.4.2

(a)

-215-

4. OPERATION

4.6.4.3 Signal Status window

Signal Status window displays the status 01 stgnals on PMC in real time. You can examine the

signal status of any PMC address,

and you can also change

the signal status on this window.

(1) Menu

position Signal Status window, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [signal Status]

To activate on the menu.

\/ Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Statue PMC Parameters PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

--f

(2) Window When

view [SIGNAL STATUS] is selected, the window shown below appears.

(a) Window

view without

symbols

: Signal Status ,, ,,.. ,;, ;, ..,,, ,,,

0 0 0 0

,. 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

. ... ,.,,.; ., : 01 : 80 : 00 :lC : 00 :oo

: AA

ROOOOO ROOOOl R00002 R00003 R00004 R00005 R00006 R00007 R00008 R00009

1 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0
Fig. 4.6.4.3

0 0 1 0 0 1 0 0 0
(a)

0 0 1 0 0 0 1 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0

: 55 : 00 : 00

-216-

4.

OPERATION

(b) Window

view with symbols

Cursor

,-&WORK1 0 ROOOOl R00002 TOOL1 R00003 R00004

t 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0
1

0 0 0
1

-OFF0 0 0 0 0

-ONf. 0 0 0 0

f' 0 0 0

PMC Address Byte symbol Fig. 4.6.4.3 (c) Function keys: (b)

Hexadecimal

expression

F4
Symbol or

F8 Search

FlO Wrt On or

Fig. 4.6.4.3 (3) Operations

(c)

Basic operation Cursor keys c Page up >: < Page down > <TAB >!< Shaft > + <TAB > Move cursor. Move address

Function

area on window. kind of address.

Skip to next/previous

c Enter >

Alternate signal status. <Enter > key turns the signal status ON whrch was OFF, and turns OFF which was ON. c Enter > key is effective only when the write-protection is unlocked. < F4 > Display/Hide Search symbols. (address can be symbol).

[ Symbol]:[Adress)
address

+ [Search] < F8 > cFlO>

address

[Wrt On];[WrtOff]

Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlock.

-217-

4. OPERATION

(Warning)

Signal extreme serious applies,

status care.

changes Signal

and PMC parameter status results changes and

changes PMC system,

should parameter

always

be made can

with have it

changes

and unforeseen

on a control used.

and on the process that these

to which

if they are improperly

It is recommended

functions

not be

used with people

near the equipment.

(Note)

Attempts sequence repeatedly, addresses,

to change programs,

some

signal

statuses

may

fail.

At an external

address

to

which write to F

the CNC,

MMC,

l/O Link and other

l/O devices writes

the signal status cannot the MMC to M addresses,

be changed. and external

(The CNC repeatedly 110 devices

to X addresses.)

(4) Message

Message Sure to modify ?

Meaning You tried to change attempt is intended, cancel change.

and countermeasure

signal status although write-protected. If the answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to

4.6.4.4 PMC Parameter

PMC 0 @ 0 6I 6) Parameter sub-menu consists of the menu items for the windows below.

Timer window Counter window

Keep relay window Data table control Data table window window

To display Parameter]

the Parameter from the menu.

submenu,

display

the [2. Diagrose]

pull-down

menu,

then select

[PMC

The submenu

can be displayed

by pressing

the

< + > or < +>

key with the cursor

positioned

to

[ PMC Parameter]. !. J Diagnose Ladder Monitor PMC Status

Signal Status PMC Parati&ei PMC alarm status

Tf@rl

.,

......

Counter

RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

Keep Data Data

relay table table

control

-218-

4. OPERATION

(Warning)

When

changing

a signal

status

or PMC parameter,

extreme

care

is necessary. incorrectly,

If

the function the machine

for modifying may

the signal status or PMC parameter Avoid using the

is applied

act unpredictably.

function

if personnel

are

present

near the machine.

(Note)

If you can not write PMC parameter, For the detail, please

it might

be protected. manual.

refer PMC programing

(1) Timer Timer

window window displays address, the contents of PMC Timer address. You can examine for TMR instruction. the contents

of PMC Timer

and you can also change

the values

(a) Menu posrtion To active the menu. window. Timer Then window, sub-menu pull down appears [2. Diagnose] which contains menu, item and select [Timer] [PMC Parameter] on

which

activates

Timer

12.

Diagnose

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Sicinal Status i*Timet: . PM; Eiara,,tert' PMC alarm status Counter RUN/STOP the ladder Keep relay System Information Data table control Data table

,. I

(b) Window 0

view view without

Window

symbols:

Ti er 1.
2. 3. 4.

:
TO0020 TO0022 TO0024 TO0026 TO0028 TO0030 TO0032 TO0034 TO0036 TO0038
(a)

.: . .. ,.: ,.:..,
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

TOO000
TO0002 TO0004

600000
0 0 0 0 0 0

11.
0 ~ 12.

13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19.

TO0006 TO0008 TOO010 TO0012 TO0014 TO0016 TO0018

5. 6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

1000

0 120.
Fig. 4.6.4.4

-219-

4.

OPERATION

Window view with symbols:

ker

. TOO010 TO0012 TO0014

: 0 0 0

*1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

T%OOOO TO0002 TO0004 TO0006 TO0008

600000 0 0 0 0

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

ONE SECOND TO0016 1000 TO0018 0

Byte symbol PMC Address

Fig. 4.6.4.4 0 Function keys: (b)

F4 Symbol or F4 Adress 1---TFig. 4.6.4.4 (c) Operations The following table lists the operations supported (c)

F8 Search

ii

FlO Wrt On or FlO WrtOff

II

by the [TIMER]

window.

Basic operation Cursor keys Move cursor. Move address

Function

c Page up >, -z Page down > number + <Enter >

area on window.

Change timer value. Enter new timer value in milli-seconds. You can enter new value only when the write-protection is unlocked. The valid timer values are : O-3,145.680 ms for timer No. l-8 o-523.280 ms for timer No. 9-150 Display/Hide symbols.

[SymbolJ/[Adress]

< F4 >

- 220 -

4.

OPERATION

Basrc operation address + [Search] < F8 >

Function Search address (address can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K, and D. at the Timer window. When C, K or D address is specified to search, Timer window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window.

number

+ [Search]

< F8 > < FlO >

ISearch

timer address

by timer number.

[Wrt On)/[WrtOff]

Unlock write-protectionIRe-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor IS yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

(d) Message

Message Sure to modify ?

Meaning

and countermeasure write-protected. Otherwise, answer

You tried to change timer value although If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. [No] to cancel change.

(2)

Counter Counter contents

window window displays the contents of PMC Counter address. the values You can examine the

of PMC Counter

address,

and you can also change

for CTR instruction.

(a) Menu posrtion To actrvate Counter Then window, sub-menu pull down appears 12. Diagnose] whrch menu, and select [Counter] [PMC Parameter] which activates

on the menu. Counter

contains

item

window.

!.

Diagnose

r/ Ladder Monitor PMC Status Sianal Status

P&K Parameteif
PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

Timer Cotinter Keep relay Data table Data table

control

-221-

4.

OPERATION

(b) Window When 0

view [COUNTER] is selected, the following window uppears.

Window

view without

symbols

,.,

..

+ati 141: .,., ;.. ,.,.:; .;.: .... :.::.; ....

.
.

.Y:

,.: ..

,.,.

., ....
.: :.

..

No.

Address cooooo coooo4 COO008 coo012 COO016 c00020 COO024 COO028 COO032 COO036

Preset/Current lOta/ 256/ O/ o/ O/ O/ O/ 36/ O/ o/ 347 129 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Fig. 4.6.4.4

No. Address 11. 12. 13. 14. 15. 16. 17. 18. 19. 20.
(d)

Preset/Current

1.
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

9. 10.

c00040 coo044 COO048 COO052 COO056 COO060 COO064 COO068 c00070 COO076

o/ o/ o/ o/ o/ o/

o/ o/
o/

o/

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Window

view with symbols:

Cursor

n ;eic
No.

:;:

,:

2.

:.:: :_.::,_;

,:.:,;

::

..,

Address c00020 TO0024 COO028 COO032 COO036

Preset/Current O/ O/ 36/ O/ O/ 0 0 0 0 0

pzY_, cooooo

WORK COUNTER lOOO/ coooo4 COO008 coo012 COO016

Symbol Counter

347 129 0 0

6. 7. 8. 9. 10.

I
@I Functton

2. 3. 4. 5.

256/ O/ O/

J_

l
number

and Address Fig. 4.6.4.4

Current counter Preset counter

value value

(e)

keys :

F4 Symbol or

F8 Search

FIO Wrt On or

Fig. 4.6.4.4

(e)

-222-

4.

OPERATION

(c) Operations The table below lists the operations supported by the [COUNTER] window.

Basrc operatron Cursor keys Move cursor. Move address

Function

< Page up > I c Page down > number + c Enter >

area on window. only when the

Change timer value. You can enter new value write-protection is unlocked. The valid counter values are : O-65,535 for binary counter O-9,999 for BCD counter Display/Hide symbols.

(Symbol]/(Adress] address + (Search]

< F4 > < F8 >

Search address (address can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the Counter window. When T, K or D address is specified to search, Counter window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window. Search counter address by timer number.

number

+ [Search]

< F8 >

[Wrt On][WrtOff]

< FlO >

Unlock write-protectionIRe-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

(d) Message

Meaning

and countermeasure

You tried to change counter value although write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to cancel change.

(3) Keep relay window Keep relay window displays the status of PMC Keep relay address. You can examine the

signal status of PMC Keep relay address,

and you can also change

the status of Keep relays.

(4 Menu position
To activate Keep relay window, Then pull down (2. Diagnose] which contains menu, and select relay] (PMC which Parameter] activates on the menu. sub-menu appears item [Keep

Keep relay window. !. / Diagnose Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status PMC Paramtrtojt PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information

-+

Timer Counter Kaf3p relay Data table Data table control

- 223 -

4.

OPERATION

(b) Window

view

~Address

c I.+
I
F

7 ,.,

Cursor Keep .: 1 Y.
0 0 @l&y :...:: .:I..

,.

KOOOOO KOOOOl K00002 K00003 K00004 KOO005 K00006 K00007 K00008 K00009

_IL
0
0 0 0 0

.. ..

:
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

.,.
,, .. ::

.:I,

.,

..i.,..

:..
.,.

,.

. ,j

0 0

0 0

0
0

1
0

KOOOlO KOOOll K00012 K00013 K00014 K00015 K00016 K00017 K00018 K00019

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0
0 0

0 0 0 0
0 0

0 0 0
0 0 0

0 0 0
0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0
0

0 0 0 0
0

0 0 0
0 0

0 0 0

0 0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (g)

@I Function

Keys :

F8 Search

FlO Wrt On

Fig. 4.6.4.4 (c) Operations

(h)

Basic operatron Cursor keys Move cursor. Move address

Functron

< Page up > i < Page down > < Enter >

area on window.

Alternate slgnal status. <Enter> key turns the signal status ON which was OFF, and turns OFF which was ON. <Enter> key is effective only when the write-protection is unlocked. + [Search] < F8 > Search address (address can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K, and D, at the Keep relay window. When T, C or D address is specified to search, Keep relay window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window. Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

address

[Wrt On]i[WrtOff]

< FlO>

- 224 -

4. OPERATION

(d) Message

Message Sure to modify 7

Meaning You tried to change attempt is intended, cancel change.

and countermeasure

signal status although write-protected. If the answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer [No] to

(e) Data for PMC control

software software. operation of the On-line function are

Some keep relay data are used by PMC control In this manual, the addresses related to the

described. For the detail, (The addresses PMC control please refer PMC programming I* do not effect manual. of the On-line function but used by

marked

the operation

software.)

#7

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2
l

#l

#O

DTBLDSP

MEMINP

PRGRAM

LADMASK

#7 #4

DTBLDSP MEMINP PRGRAM LADMASK

: Can not display

data table control signal status. On-line Ladder Editing monitor.

data in PMC parameter.

0 0

: Can not change : Can not activate

#l #O

and the functions

in I/O menu.

1 : Can not display

#7 *

#6

#5

#4

#3

#2
l

#l *

#O FROM-WRT

#O
(4)

FROM-WRT

: Displaying

F-ROM

write dialog

box when exiting

On-line

editing.

Data table control window

Data table control window displays the informations attributes. of Data groups for PMC Data table address. You can examine the Data group and you can also change the attributes

on this window.

(a) Menu position

To activate Parameter] control] Data table control menu. Data window, pull down (2. Diagnose] which menu, contains and select item (Data (PMC table on the Then sub-menu appears window.

which activates

table control

-225-

4.

OPERATION

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information Timer Counter Keep relay Dhta table control"~. ::' Data table

(b) Window view 0 Window view with symbols

:
Cursor

D&ta
JO.

tabLe control. Type

byte

5 Format Hex Dee Dee Dee BCD

,. : ....... .:..: . .

Start address

Number + 8000 10 20 100

Protection on off off off

0

1. DATA-TABLE-TOP 2. DO0050 3. TOOL-TABLE 4. DO0200 5. BCD-CONV-TABLE

word word byte word

f: f

I
Start address: symbol of the group Data group number Number

Data size

I
Write-protection

Data format of element (i)

Fig. 4.6.4.4

(?,I Function

keys:

F4 Symbol

F8 Search

FlO Wrt On or FlO WrtOff

-226-

4. OPERATION

(c) Operations The table below lists the operations display (1). supported by the Data table control window. Table of

the data table control

Basic operation Cursor keys

I__

Function

I Move cursor. I
Move address area on window

< Page up > i < Page down > D-address + c Enter >

Change Start address with the cursor on the item. You can enter new address only when the write-protection is unlocked. You can omit the leading character D of the address. Change Number with the cursor on the item. You can enter new number only when the write-protection is unlocked. Format and Protection with the cursor on Change Type, the item. When the cursor is on Type or Format, small dialog box is displayed to choose the item. You can change them only when the write-protection is unlocked.

number

+ < Enter >

< Enter >

Table of the data table control

display

(2).

Basic operatron [New]<Fl>

Function Make new data group. [New] duplicates the data group on the cursor. A hundred data groups can be created at most.

[Delete]

c F2 >

Delete data group on the cursor. You cannot delete groups because one data group must exist at least. Switch to Data table was on is displayed. < F4 z= Display/Hide symbols. window. The data group

all the data

[G.Data]

< F3>

which the cursor

[ Symbol][ address

Adress]

+ [Search I< F8 >

Search address (address can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K and D, at the Data table control window. When T, C, K or D address is specified to search, Data table control window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window. Search data group by data group number.

number

+ [Search] < F8 > < F10 >

(Wrt On]/[WrtOtf]

Unlock write-protection/Re-protect. When the protection is effective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

-227-

4. OPERATION

(d) Messages

Message Sure to modify ?

Meaning

and countermeasure

You tried to change signal status although write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer (No] to cancel change.

(5)

Data Data groups

table table

window window displays the contents data. of PMC Data table address according to Data and

defined

by Data table control the values

You can examine

the contents

of Data table,

you can also change

of Data table on this window.

(a)

Menu position To activate Data table window, pull down (2. Diagnose] which menu, item and [Data select table] [PMC which

Parameter] activates

on the menu. Data table

Then sub-menu

appears

contains

window.

2. Diagnose
d

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Siqnal Status Timer PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Information
Counter

Keep relay Data table control t)atii:tdbl(i :

(b) Window When @

view [Data table] is selected. the following window appears

Window

view without

symbols

:
Data table

..
protected

Group

1 : DO0000

- 007999, F6 FF EC FF D8 FF BO FF 60 FF

8000 bytes.

hexadecimal,

1
00 D8 00 BO 00 00 BO 00 00 00

DO0000 DO0001 DO0002 DO0003 DO0004 DO0005 DO0006 DO0007 DO0008 DO0009

DO0010 DO0011 DO0012 DO0013

DO0014 DO001 5

co FE 80
FD 00

DO0016 DO0017 DO0018 DO0019

Frg. 4.6.4.4 (k)

FB 00 F6 00 EC

DO0020 DO0021 DO0022 DO0023 DO0024 DO0025 DO0026 DO0027 DO0028 DO0029

- 228 -

4. OPERATION

Data group

information:

Group

1 : DOOOO- D07999,
t Area of Data group

8000 bytes,

hexadecimal, t Data format T

rotected

I Data group number

t Number of element and data size

Write-protection

Window

view with symbols

Data group

rnformation
-Data

table.

.,

~Groupl:DOOOOO

- D07999,

8000 bytes, hexadecimal,

protected

DATA-TABLE-TOP -DO0000 .:.. F6 A DO0001 DO0002 DO0003 DO0004

Symbol Address I

DO0005 DO0006 DO0007 DO0008 DO0009

Cursor

FF BO FF 60 FF

DO0010 DO0011 DO0012 DO0013 DO0014

co FE 80 FD 00

FF EC FF D8

Fig. 4.6.4.4 @ Function keys:

(I)

F3 C.Data

F4 Symbol or

F8 Search

FlO Wrt On or

T-1
F4 Adress Ftg. 4.6.4.4 (m)

- 229 -

4. OPERATION

(c) Operations The following Operations table lists the operations supported by [DATA supported window by the [DATA TABLE1 window.

TABLE]

Basic operation Cursor keys -z Page up > J< Page down > <TAB s/c Shift > + c TAB > + < Enter > Move cursor. Move address

Function

area on window. data group.

Skip to next/previous

number

Change data value. You can enter new value only when the write-protection is unlocked. The valid data values are : For details of the values that can be input, see the table of input data values below. Switch to Data table control window. The displayed data group is displayed at top of the window.

(CData]

< F3 >

[Symbol)/[Adress) address + [Search]

< F4 > < F8 >

Dtsplay/Hide

symbols.

Search address (address can be symbol). You cannot search any other address than PMC parameter address, T, C, K and D, at the Data table window. When T, C or K address is specified to search, Data table window is closed and the special window for the address is opened with the address at top of window. Search data group by data group number.

number

+ [Search]

< F8 > < FlO >

[Wrt On]/(WrtOff]

Unlock write-protectionGte-protect. When the protection is eflective the cursor is yellow, and becomes red when unlocked.

Data table

I
Decimal BCD

byte -128 -127 0 - 99 00 - FF

word -32,768 -32,767 0 - 9,999 0000 - FFFF

double-word -2.147,483,648 0 00000000

(dword)

- 2,147,483,647
99,999,999 FFFFFFFF

(d) Messages

Message Sure to modify ?

Meaning

and countermeasure

You tned to change data table value although write-protected. If the attempt is intended, answer [Yes]. Otherwise, answer (No] to cancel change.

- 230 -

4.

OPERATION

4.6.4.5
The PMC

PMC alarm status

ALARM MESSAGE dialog box displays a PMC alarm message.

(1) Menu

position
PMC alarm message dialog box, pull down [2. Diagnose] menu, and select [PMC on the menu.

To activate alarm status]

Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status PMC Parameter

-_)

System

Information

(2) Window

view is selected, the following dialog box appears.

When [PMC alarm status]

ALARM NOTHING

Fig. 4.6.4.5

(a)

(3) Operation Press c Enter >,

< space > or < . > key to close

PMC

alarm message

dialog

box.

(4) Messages
The alarm messages See the manual For details FANUC NB/NB2 same as PMCs are displayed in this window. of PMC for detail of the messages. refer to the following manual:

of messages, PMC Ladder Language

MODEL

PAliPAB/RAlIRA2RA3/RBIRB2/RB3IRB4/RB5/RB6iRC/RC3/RC4~

Programming

Manual

(B-61 863E)

-231

4. OPERATION

4.6.4.6
The ladder

Executing or stopping a ladder program

execulron status can be changed from RUNNING to STOP or from STOP to

RUNNING.

(1) Displaying
To display
then select

the dialog box

the IRUNSTOP [RUNSTOP the ladder] dialog box, display the 12. Diagnose] pull-down menu, the ladder] from the menu.

2. Diagnose 4 Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status -3 PMC Parameter PMC alarm status : ?.g?JNpJ*iiop..f& ::&$&&$f
System

Information

(2)

Displaying

the dialog box

is selected, the dialog box shown below appears.

When [RUN/STOP the ladder]

(a) Ladder

running

state program is being executed, the following dialog box appears.

While a ladder

Frg. 4.6.4.6

(a)

[YES] [NO]

: Stop the ladder program. : Closes the dialog box without

stopping the ladder program.

- 232 -

4. OPERATION

(b) Ladder stop state While a ladder program is in the stop state, the following dialog box appears.

RUN the ladder program

Fig. 4.6.4.6

(b)

[YES] [NO]

Executes

the ladder program.

: Closes the dialog box without executing the ladder program

When executing or stopping a ladder program, special care is necessary, If a

(Warning)

program is applied incorrectly, the machine may act unpredictably. Avoid using the function if personnel are present near the machine.

4.6.4.7

Displaying System Information

version, and etc can be referred

The system software information such as specifications, Menu position System Information on the menu. dialog

(1)

To display [System

box, pull down

12.

Dragnose]

menu,

and select

Information]

2. Diagnose Ladder Monitor PMC Status Signal Status + PMC Parameter PMC alarm status RUN/STOP the ladder System Xnformation

(2)

Displaying

dialog

box the following dialog box appears.

When [System

lnformatton] is selected,

Press -Z Enter >,

< Space > or <. > key to close System Information dialog box

System

Information

FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 Version 01.2 96.01.09 Copyright(C) 1995. FANUC LTD
Frg. 4.6.4.7 (a)

- 233 -

4. OPERATION

4.6.5

Input/Output
provides the following options:

The 13. I/O] menu

1. For the [LOAD FROM PMC] dialog box 2. For the [STORE IN PMC] dialog box 3. For the [WRITE F-ROM] dialog box

(Note 1)

In case

of operating

NC, the screen

display

of NC (Position,

etc.)

might

slow

when

using input/output There

functions

(Load from PMC, Store to PMC, etc.). of NC. It is recommended to using input/output

is no problem

in the operation

functions

while NC is not operating. made by C language executor is displayed, the communication after moving speed to other

(Note 2)

When

screen

decreases. screens

It is recommended etc.).

to use

input/output

functions

(Posrtion,

4.651
A program LOAD when,

Loading from the PMC

held on the PMC can be transferred IS used to transfer to the personal program computer. computer

FROM PMC for example.

a ladder

from the PMC to the personal

using the program

with the on-line

function.

(1) Menu

position the LOAD FROM PMC dialog box, display the 13. l/O] pull-down menu, then

To dtsplay select (Load

from PMC] from the menu.

- 234 -

4. OPERATION

(2)

Displaying Selecting

the dialog ILoad

box the following dialog box to appear.

from PMCI causes

LOad

.. .:,l:.:j.. from pMc . ,\ ....:,. ,. ,......./. .: .....&, .,.....( y,,::...:: ..::.. : ... .::.

- Transfer . 0% I j

data LADDER

type 0 ALL 100% 1

..

_r^

Programs izeindicator

Abort loading Execute loading Close dialog Fig. 4.6.5.1 (a) box

(3) Operation Select a desired button by pressing the <Tab > key, then press the < Enter > key. normally, the dialog box closes automatically. Once the program has been loaded

4.6.5.2
A program Use Store

Storing

to the PMC
computer a ladder is transferred program to the PMC. from the personal computer to the PMC to

held by the personal to PMC to transfer

enable,

for example,

the use of the program

with the on-line

function.

Menu

position the Store to PMC dialog box, display the 13. l/O] pull-down menu, then select

To display [Store

to PMC] from the menu.

-235-

4. OPERATION

(2) Displaying
Selecting

the dialog box

to PMCI causes the following dialog box to appear.

(Store

stag*

tQ

p#fc . ;.
: ,.

.::: .,:.: :: :
.,

,..I

:.j.

..

-Transfer

data

type 0 ALL 100%

f--Load program size indicator

0 LADDER 0%

I
Execute storing

Aborl

storing

I
Close dialog Fig. 4.6.5.2 (a) box

(3) Operation
Select a desired button by pressing the <Tab > key, then press the c Enter > key.
Once the program has been stored normally, the dialog box closes automatically.

(Note)

While enable

Online storing

Edrtor

is in progress,

a program

cannot

be stored

to the

PMC.

To

to the PMC, move

to Ladder

Monitor. is stored will to the PMC but before be lost. 4.6.5.3). When storing the a

If the CNC is turned program program is written

off after an edited to F-ROM, the

program

results

of editing

to the CNC, therefore,

write it to F-ROM

(see Section

4.653
The results

Writing to F-ROM
of editrng by the on-ltne function are written to flash ROM (F-ROM) in the PMC.

(Note)

The results

of rnodificatron

made

using

Online

Editor,

Store

to PMC,

etc. will be lost the modified

tf the CNC is turned results

off before

the results

are written

to F-ROM.

To store

to the CNC. write them to F-ROM.

- 236 -

4. OPERATION

(1) Menu
select

position to Flash ROM dialog box, display the 13. I/O] pull-down menu, then

To display the Write [F-ROM Write]

from the menu.

rri

(2)

Displaying

the dialog

box the following dialog box to appear.

Selecting [F-ROM

Write1 causes

Write.to Flaeh R&l.

Are you sure you want Flash ROM ?

.. . .c. ..

to write

to

IExec/ICancel]

I
Execute Fig. 4.6.5.3 (3) Operation (a)

Close dialog t write

box

(1) Push [Exec] Start to write this dialog @

button. sequence program to Flash ROM and Executing message is displayed on

box. to Flash ROM is completed, Normal Complete message is displayed on this

When writing dialog box.

Cg, Select

[Cancel]

or Press

< ESC > and this dialog

box is closed.

(Note)

The CNC must be placed

tn the state of emergency

stop when writing

to Flash ROM.

-237-

4. OPERATION

4.6.6

Communication
or disconnects a communication link between a personal computer link is established and

This function establishes PMC.

The on-line function can be used only while a communication

between establish

the personal computer and PMC. the communication Selecting [ON-LINE link. FUNCTION]

Before attempting to use the on-line function, therefore,

or [ON-LINE

(SELECTED automatically.

PROGRAM)]

from the initial menu Starting the

causes the communication on-line function.)

link to be established

(See Section 4.6.1.2,

(1)

Menu

position dialog box, display the 14. Communication] pull-down menu,

To display the Communication then select [Communication]

from the menu.

(2) Displaying

the dialog

box

(a) Displaying the Communication

Selecting [Communication]

dialog box

causes the following dialog box to appear:

Communication

communication

Fig. 4.6.6 (a)

(b)

Displaying the PARAMETER Selecting [Param]

dialog box dialog box causes another dialog box to

from the Communication

appear as shown below. Press the <Tab7 a cursor key. key to select the desired parameter, then set that parameter by pressing

-238-

4. OPERATION

Serial port (Choose channel)

Baud rate (Choose one of parameters)

Parity

l
-Stop 01

None bit bit

(3 Odd

(.) Even

2 bit

T-_rl

t Close dialog box

t Close dialog

I
be established connected (See Appendix

T
-

Parity bit

Stop bit

box canceling

modifications

Fig. 4.6.6 (b)

(Note 1)

If the communication points: 0 Is the CNC? e/i, RS-232C cable: RS232C

link cannot

successfully,

check

the following

cable

securely

to both

the personal

compuler

and

. Is the cable an On-Line

(3 Communication parameters

cable?

8.)

Is the cable free of damage?

(baud rate, parity, slop bit) of the on-line function: Do FAPT LADDER If the communication been corrected, and PMC have identical link cannot communication even parameters? problems have

be established the personal parameters

after these

turn off then restart to set communication

computer. until after disconnecting the

(Note 2)

Do

not

attempt

communrcatron Do not termrnate link.

link. the on-line function untrl after drsconnecting the communication

Do not drsconnect
link.

the RS232C

cable

until after disconnecting

the communication

-239-

4.

OPERATION

4.6.7

Examples of operation
provides the followrng two examples of using the on-line function:

This section

Monitoring

a ladder program

held by the PMC

Monitoring

a ladder program

held by a personal

computer

4.6.7.1

Monitoring a ladder program held by the PMC

the RS-232C cable

(1) Connecting

(a) Connect computer.

one

end

of the

RS232C

cable

to the

COMl

or

COM2

port

of the

personal

(b) Connect

the other

end of the RS-232C

cable

to the R232-1

or R232-2

port on the main

board of the CNC.

(2) Setting

the parameters

for the on-line

monitor

on the PMC

(a) Press

the

CNCs

[PMC],

[MONIT], MONITOR

and

[ONLINE] appears.

soft

keys

in

that

order.

The

PARAMETERS

FOR ONLINE

screen

(b) Set the communicatton

parameters.

(See Section

4.6.2.

Preparation.)

(c) Specify changes

USE

for the

RS232C

parameter.

Check

that

the

RS232C

status

Indication

to STAND-BY.

(Note)

If USE is specified

for the parameter, on.

STAND-BY

status

is automatically

selected

when

the CNC is nexl turned

In this case, this operation

is unnecessary.

(3) Starting

the on-line

function

(a) Start FAPT-LADDER C: +r FLADDER

II by executing >fladder II is installed

the following

command:

(When FAPT-LADDER

under

C: y FLADDER)

- 240 -

4.

OPERATION

(b) The

title

screen as shown II.

01 FAPT below.

LADDER-II The initial

appears. menu

After contains

a few the

seconds, and

the edition

initial

menu

appears LADDER

series

of FAPT-

RBI(STEP SEQ)

[ C:YDFITRYSWLE 1
Version 01.0

RO8B-9201-5503

Press [TFIBI key to move the cursor and press [ENTER] or lSPRCE1 key to select Off-Line Function

I I

I
1

On-Line Function On-Line (selected program) Utilltu

I I

I I

Exit

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (c) Select [ON-LINE FUNCTION]

(a)

from the initial menu

(d) The on-line automatically.

monitor

screen

appears

as shown

below.

Communication

with the PMC starts

Try to connect

with

PllC ___

08130 WOO

J/Cancel/I

F7 Spl ist

F8 Search

FY Synbol

FlO Seting

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (b)

-241

4.

OPERATION

(Note)

If

communication

cannot dialog box.

be

established,

select

the

[Param]

button

in

the

Communication subsequently

Check

the setting in the Parameter

dialog box which

appears.

:..

: :.i

;.,:

.::i..:.::.;

:..I..

,,, ,,,, .I.: . . .... .,. .. . . ,.

.\.. . .

w=mwter..
cot42

: :: ... . .:.::>

.,., :.:: ....>:I::.:.::.::.: t.....

,,

is:::..

Channel 0 COMl 0

Stop 01

bit bit

2 bit

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(c)

(e) When

communication

starts

normally,

the

Communication

dialog

box

closes

automatically. PMC

The Load from PMC dialog box appears,

and a program is loaded from the

Transfer .

data LADDER

type 0 ALL

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(d)

(Note)

II the most recently

monitored

program

is used,

the processing is monitored

required

to load the the loading

program can be omitted. time is reduced.)

(If an identical machine

continuously,

4.

OPERATION

(4) Selecting

a subprogram

(a) After shown

a program below:

IS loaded

from

the PMC,

the Sub-program

list

dialog

box appears

as

subiprogram
. . / ., .:. .:

,ii,=t

.. ;

L&v&{1

,., .,., 2

.:...

<::.:

I::;.:

..). ,/,:,

2,.

.,..;

:I; ,:.

;,I:;: ;::;.

LEVEL 2 PO0001 (OPEN RIGHT DOOR ) PO0002 (OPEN LEFT DOOR ) PO0010 (GRIP WORK PEICE ) PO0011 (PUT WORK PIECE ) PO0021 (CLOSE RIGHT DOOR) PO0022 (CLOSE LEFT DOOR )

MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-Rl MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-Ll PICK UP A WORK ON THE STAND PUT DOWN A WORK MOVE RIGHT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-R2 MOVE LEFT DOOR TO LIMIT-SWTH-L2

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(e)

(b) By

pressing

the

< 7 >

or

< 1 >

key,

position

the

cursor

to the

subprogram

to

be

dlsplayed.

(c)

Press the

<Enter7

key.

(d) The ladder

diagram

for the specified

subprogram

is displayed.

- 243 -

4.

OPERATION

Monitoring The Ladder (a) Displaying

action

of ladder window

diagram is displayed window as following.

Monitor

the Ladder

Monitor

1. File

2.Diagnose

3. I/O La&de*

4. Communication Moni&i . :.: NET y::,

. [LEVEL i] DO00 I
DO00

I 1 .:.. .... ,...... :I,; ..;:::, . :::.:;::I:i_:.:-.:-_::i.:il;:~,l: .: .. : ..

00001-00006 ROOOO.l r\ ROOOO.O r\ v

I . SUB END1 1

F7 SpList Fig. 4.6.7.1 (f)

F8 Search

F9 Symbol

FlO Seting

(b)

Monitoring Contacts displayed

contact and coils

and coil status are displayed to Indicate their status: ON (1) or OFF (0). They are

with thick or thin line according ON (1) -1 w --( q __ F )-(S)CR)_ k Thick Thin Thick Thick Thick Thick

to their status as follows. OFF (0) Thin Thick Thin Thin Thin Thin

(c) Moving In the ladder

The area dlsplayed down > on the window key can be moved [Search] by cursor-up/down is useful to jump key and <Page to your up >< Page Function < F8 > directly

destmation.

244 -

4.

OPERATION

(4

Searching

for a net position, number enter the number of the net to be displayed, key F8 [SEARCH]. its address, or

To move to a desired functional instruction

(Sxxx). Then, press function

dialog box the Display

(e)

Openrng Pressing

the Display function

setting

key FlO [SET]

causes

settrng

dialog

box to appear.

biepfay

setting

- Ladder
(1) Ladder -Symbol .

Mode Monitor. 6 Comment Online Display Editor

Symbol

0 Address
0 Relay Comment c> Symbol b Address @Relay Comment & Address cj Relay Comment 6 Symbol

- Function 0 Display

Parameter

1
(g) and check box. Display. The Then, functional press the setting dialog instruction

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(f)

Displaying Position <Enter> parameters

functional the key cursor

instruction to

parameters Parameter

Function the

to close

Display below:

appear

as shown

-OFF+

RST ACT

SUB 36 ADDB

0002 TCNT-1

TCTRL- 1 ---i t

121
0000000001

NXT-TCNT

I
u_ Conlents TCNT-1 of address 1

131

Contents of address NXT-TCNT

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(h)

- 245 -

4.

OPERATION

(b) Checkmg the alarm state

When the PMC enters the alarm state, the color of the PMC alarm icon changes to yellow. dialog box. Should this occur, select Then, check 12. Diagnose] from gray and open the PMC alarm message (For details of icons, see (4),

the details of the alarm state.

Displaying the PMC status (icon) in Section 4.6.1.2.)

v ., .. .

...

. . .\.

&

.::...iMrnt ... : .._., mawage

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(k)

(cl

Checking whether a program is running While a ladder program is running, the icon shown in Fig. 4.6.7.1 ladder program is running, the icon indicated icons, see (4), Displaying in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (I) is visible. When no

(m) is visible.

(For details of

the PMC status (icon) in Section 4.6.1.2.)

Program on PMC

is running.

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(I)

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(m)

To change RUNiSTOP

the ladder

program

execution

status,

select

12.

Diagnose]

then

use the

the ladder dialog box.

(d)

Displaying the communication While communication is visible.

status the icon shown in Fig. 4.6.7.1 (n)

with the PMC is being performed,

When communication (0) is visible.

with the PMC has not been established, (For details of icons, see (4). Displaying

the icon indicated the PMC status

in Fig. 4.6.7.1

(icon) in Section 4.6.1.2.)

iiiiz!l
Communication is active. /
Fig. 4.6.7.1 (n) When changing the status of the communication Communrcation] dialog box. being performed

Communication is not active.

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(0)

with the PMC,

use the 14.

- 247 -

4. OPERATION

(7) Monitoring

signals

(a) Opening Signal Status window

Pull down the 12. Diagnose] window is displayed, menu, select [Signal Status] from the menu, the Signal Status

GO0000

0,.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

GO0001
GO0002 GO0003 GO0004 GO0005 GO0006 GO0007 GO0008 600009

0 0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

0 0
0 0

: :

00 00 : 00 : 00 00

0
0 0 0 i 0

0
0

:oo
:

0
0 0 0

:oo
: 00 : :

00 00

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(p)

and the functions of function keys change as following.

F4 Symbol or F4 III Adress Fig. 4.6.7.1 (q)

F8 Search

FlO Wrt On or

(b)

Searching Address Enter RO.0 and press function key < F8 > (Search], the address ROOOOO is displayed at top

of the window, and the cursor moves onto signal of ROOOOO.O.

Signal ROOOOO ROOOOl R00002 R00003 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Status 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 : : : :
42

00 00 00

R00009

0
Fig. 4.6.7.1

0
(r)

: 00

- 248 -

4. OPERATION

(cl

Displaying Function

symbol key

<F4 > [Symbol]

signal. Symbols

displays defined

symbols for byte

of addresses address

on the window, displayed key

just above just above

the their

corresponding addresses to [Adress]

are also

on the window.

When the symbols

are displayed,

the function

c F4 > changes

which hides the symbols.

byte symbol

bit symbols

:.. ,,.

I CONST ROOOOO ROOOOl 0 0 1 0

. . . 0 0

signal

SPatus

.: y ,.. :I., _)

0 0

0 0

0 0

I -ON1 0

-OFF0' 0

: 42 : 00

IR00004

:oo

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (s)

(d)

Unlocking

write-protection key < FlO> [Wrt On] to unlock The color of cursor write changes protection of the contents yellow. of addresses

Press function displayed key

on the window.

to red from

And the function

< FlO > changes

to [WrtOff].

(Warning)

Signal changes process these

status

changes

should

always

be made

with

extreme

care. system,

Signal

status

can have to which

serious it applies,

and unforeseen if they

results

on a control used.

and on the that

are improperly

It is recommended

functions

not be used with people

near the equipment.

- 249 -

4.

OPERATION

(e) Changing Move signal <Enter> was ON.

r

status in the window to change, a signal by the cursor press keys, <Page key up> and the <Page signal down> status to the change.

the cursor you want

then status

<Enter>

to make

key turns

ON which

was OFF, and turns a signal

status

OFF which

Signa CONST ROOOOO ROOOOl

Stat&s

0 0

L 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

0 0

-ONL 1

-OFF0 0

: 42 : 02

R00004

0
Fig. 4.6.7.1

0
(t)

: 00

(Note)

Some diagram

signals writes

may not change the signals I10 devices

their status even

if you change

them,

because

the Ladder

frequently,

or the signals

are frequently signals

updated

by NC. MMC, MMC on

or the external M-address,

such as l/O-Link: l/O devices

NC writes

on F-address,

and the external

on X-address.

(f)

Enabling Press

write-protection key <Flop

again [WrtOff) The color to re-protect of cursor the returns contents to yellow of addresses from red. on the window And the function

function

from unforeseen key cFlO>

changes.

returns

to [Wrt On).

(9)

Hrdrng Signal Pull down Status

Status

wrndow menu, select [Ladder Monitor] from the menu, then the Signal

the 12. Diagnose] drsappears.

window

(Note)

Non-volatrle window

PMC address

T, C, K and D which

is called

PMC

parameter

has special

to display

and modify

them (see 4.4.5 for detail).

-250-

4.

OPERATION

(8)

Storing

a program edited off before

to flash

memory function is written to flash memory the results of the PMC. of editing If the CNC

A program is turned

using the on-line the program

is written

to flash memory,

will be lost.

(a) Displaying Select 13.

the Write

to Flash ROM bar.

dialog Select

box [F-ROM below. write] from the menu. The Write to

I/O] from the menu dialog box appears message

Flash ROM

as shown

Select

[OK] to store the edited

program.

(The Executing

appears.

.,
Are

:.
you

wrjtc :-korraskl RCIH ..

sure you want to write to

Flash ROM ?

Fig. 4.6.7.1

(u)

After the program

has been stored,

the dialog

box closes

automatically.

(9) Storing
program

a program edited

to a file using the on-line function can be named and stored to a file. The stored

A program

can be decompiled

and edited

using the off-line

function.

(a) Storing a program

Select box appears

to a file bar. Select Then, select [File save]. The Save program. program dialog

11. FILE] from the menu as shown below.

]OK] to store the edited

save

program

Program

name

YFLADDERYSAMPLE piq

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (v) After the file has been stored. the Save program dialog box closes automatically

(Note)

When named

a program PMC-RAM

held in the memory by default.

of the PMC is monitored the program, updated when rename another

or edited,

the program in advance.

is

To store

the program program

The data of PMC-RAM edited.

is automatically

is monrtored

or

-251

4. OPERATION

(J) Ending the on-line function

(a) Ending the on-line function
Select [l. FILE] from the menu bar. A message Then, select [Exit). Select [OK] to end the on-line function. dialog box appears as shown below.

II

Are

you

sure

you

want

to

exit

Fig. 4.6.7.1 (W)

4.6.7.2

Monitoring a ladder program held by a personal computer

using the off-line function to the PMC and subsequently below: execute it,

To transfer a program created

start the on-line function as described

(1) Selecting
used.

a program
from the initial menu. Then, enter the name of the program to be

Select [Program Selection]

RBd(STEP SEQI

[ C:YDFITRYSRlVLEI
Werslon 01.0

ROBB-YZOl-J503

Press [TABI key to move the cursor and press [ENTERI or [SPFICEI key to select.

Off-Line Function On-Line Function On-Line (selected program)

I I

ut I I Itu
Exit

I
I

Fig. 4.6.7.2

(a)

-252-

4.

OPERATION

(2) Starting

the on-fine function

from the initial menu. either of the following messages is displayed. or decompilation is necessary,

Select [ON-LINE (SELECTED PROGRAM)]

If compilation

ISource
Memory

program

has

been

updated.

Compile

it

(Y/N)

card

format

file

has

been

updated.

Decompile

it?(Y/N)

In this case, enter Y to compile

or decompile

the program.

(3) Storing When

the program the on-fine

to the PMC is started, program subprogram the personal with screen computer is automatically held on the If not, connected to the

monitor

PMC, and the selected

programs displayed match. as shown the

is compared selection

a program

PMC.

If the two box is

is displayed.

a dialog

below:

N:E-3160

Selected

program

is

not

same.

71

Load

from

PMC program

memory.

[Stole/

Store

to

PMC program

memory.

-1

Select

program.

IDisregard]

Disregard

difference.

Quit

On-Line

function.

Fig. 4.6.7.2

(b)

In this case,

select

[STORE]

to transfer

the selected

program

to the PMC.

(Note)

The

dialog

box does

shown not match editing

above

appears

when

the

program

selected either

on

the

personal

computer either When dialog appears.

that on the PMC.

This is because edit function,

program

is modified

by off-fine the on-fine box shown

or with the internal is started does with

for example. stored in the PMC selected, the

monitor above

the program Instead,

not appear.

the subprogram

selection

screen

The

ladder

monitor a ladder

and

signal

monitor

can

be

operated

as described

in Section

4.6.7.2,

Monitoring

program

on the PMC.

- 253 -

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

This chapter describes the general messages output by FAPT LADDER-II. and categorized as indicated below: function-name : E-xxxx : error-message Messages are output

L
LL (1) Function name

Error number (four digits)

Category (error, warning, etc.) Name of the processing which caused the error

The processing causing the error is represented by a single alphabetic character. Function name A 6 C D E F G H I J K L N Processing Initial menu and option setting Title editing I/O module editing System parameter editing Ladder diagram/step diagram editing Symbol and comment editing Message editing Printing Compilation Decompilation Mnemonic conversion Input/Output On-line monitor

(2) Message

category The categories are represented

Output messages are classified into the following categories. by single alphabetic characters.

F: Fatal error. The error number is 2xxx. The system can be operated, but processing of the user program cannot be continued because of an error. E: Error. The error number is Sxxx. Processing is continued, but the results will be lost. Alternatively, the processing is stopped.

W: Warning. The error number is 4xxx. Processing is continued. The results will be retained, but cannot be guaranteed.

-254-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.1 A : INITIAL MENU (program name selection, option setting, Oh-Line execution)
5.1 .l Number A:F-2000 A:F-2001 A:F-2004 Fatal error Messsge INSUFFICIENT MEMORY. Contents

1INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE.

THIS DATA CAN NOT BE HANDLED AT THIS VERSION OF FAPT LADDER. SOURCEPROGRAMHASWRONG FILE (S).

A: F-2005

The source program contains an invalid file or does not contain necessary files. Check the source program files.

A:F-2006 A:F-2007 A:F-2008 A:F-2009 A:F-2010

1NOT FOUND XXXX FILE.

NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM. CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE.

1CANNOT CLOSE XXXX FILE.

XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM BROKEN. Error Message ENTER PROGRAM NAME. THE SOURCE PROGRAM DOES NOT EXIST. PMC MODEL FILE IS NOT FOUND.

5.1.2 Number A:E-3120 A:E-3121 A:E-3122

Contents The name of the source program has not been input. Input the source program name.

The specified source program is not compatible with the system. For details of which machine models are compatible, see Section 1.2.2. Some system files (xxxx.TBL) cannot be found. Reinstall the system. The specified source program cannot be created because a directory having the same name already exists. Input another source program name. The specified path does not exist. Check the input source program name. A FORMAT-A/B program was specified when copying a source program. FORMAT-A/B cannot be used with FAPT LADDER-II. Convert the program via a memory card or mnemonic format file. For details, see Appendix 3. File xxxx cannot be read.
I

A:E-3124

CANNOT CREATE NEW PROGRAM XXXX. ILLEGAL PATH OF SOURCE PROGRAM NAME. SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE DIFFERENT.

A:E-3125 A:E-3126

A:E-3128 A: E-31 30 A:E-3131 A:E-3132 A:E-3133

XXXX FILE READ ERROR XXXX FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANL KEY.
1

File xxxx cannot be read. File xxxx cannot be opened. File xxxx cannot be closed. The file cannot be output because there is insufficient free space on the disk. Terminate the system and delete any unnecessary files in the disk to create more free space. The option file (OPTION) has been initialized because Its data was destroyed. File xxxx cannot be created.

XXXX FILE OPEN ERROR. XXXX FILE CLOSE ERROR INSUFFICIENT DISK ERROR.

A:E-3134 A:E-3137

INVALID OPTION INITIALIZED. (XXXX FILE WAS UPDATED.) CANNOT CREATE FILE XXXX.

-25!3-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number A:E-3138
I

Message ILLEGAL SOURCE PROGRAM NAME.

I

Contents

A:E-3139 1 A:E-3140 1 A:E-3143 1 A:E-3144 A:E-3145 A:E-3146 A:E-3147 A:E-3148

lLL;ANLXMyX

SOURCE PRO-

1NOT FOUND FILE. 1CANNOT OPEN FILE. 1CANNOT CLOSE FILE. 1FILE I/O ERROR.
t XXXX FILE I/O ERROR. UNKNOWN PMC SERIES. XXXX FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY.

I 1File xxxx cannot be opened. I File xxxx cannot be closed. ( An error occurred during file access. I

I I

Data cannot be written to file xxxx.

5.2
5.2.1 Number B:E-3020 B:E-3021 BE-3022

B : TITLE EDITING
Error Message
FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY FILE l/O ERROR. HIT ANY KEY Contemts The source program title file (TITLE) cannot be read. Datacannot be writtento the source programtitlefile (TITLE) or control file (CONTROL). An error occurred during file access.

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.3 C : l/O MODULE EDITING

5.3.1 Error Message C:E-3021 C: E-3022 C: E-3023 C: E-3024 C: E-3025 C: E-3026 C: E-3027 C: E-3026 C: E-3030 FILE READ ERROR. HIT ANY KEY FILE WRITE ERROR. HIT ANY KEY INPUT DATA INVALID APPOINTED APPOINTED APPOINTED APPOINTED GROUP NOT EXIST BASE NOT EXIST SLOT NOT EXIST ID CODE NOT EXIST Contents The source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) cannot be read. Data cannot be written to the source program I/O module file (IOMODULE) or control file (CONTROL). Input data is invalid. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input procedure. The specified group does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input value range. The specified base does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the input value range. The specified slot does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] toconfirm the input value range. The specified module does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm the module names that can be specified.

INPUT KEY NOT USED ADDRESS APPOINT ILLEGAL The specified module cannot be used at this address. Check whether the output module is specified at address X and whether the input module is specified at address Y. The specified group, base, and slot have already been assigned modules. Specify different group, base, and slot numbers. The specified channel does not exist. Press F3 [HELP] to confirm which channels can be specified. For I/O Unit-B (xxx:power-on/off information), a slot other than slot 0 cannot be specified. Specify slot 0.

C: E-3032

THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. INVALID CHANNEL NO. APPOINT INVALID DATA, EXCEPT O, IS SPECIFIED AT THE SLOT OF XXX AS l/O UNIT B. Warning Message THE SAME GROUP,BASE AND SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. INVALID DATA, EXCEPT O, IS SPECIFIED AT THE BASE OF I/O UNIT B. BOTH I/O UNIT-A AND UNIT-B ARE SPECIFIED IN THE SAME GROUP.

C: E-3033 C: E-3034

5.3.2 Number C:W4020

Contents The specified group, base, and slot have already been assigned modules. Check whether the same numbers can be assigned for the group, base, and slot. For the I/O Unit-B module, a base other than base 0 cannot be specified. Specify base 0. I/O Unit-A and I/O Unit-B cannot be assigned to the same group. Specify different groups.

C:W4021

C:W4022

-257-

-8SZ-

03 W

ss3tmv 39vw1 ma a31 (01 ssmaav 35ww1 lla A~U (6 ssmaav a31 (8 ss3k4aav ~3n (L :sseJppe t%y~o(lol eql Aweds (800~ JO pesn s! (wed JO)eMdO swwds W!W) 13NVd kiOlVU3dO (9
JW~W u! Es S! (S3A) 1 uWM ss3Haav

HOW3 13NVd kl3lVkl3dO allvANI wa UldNl al1vANl 3114 3114

tzoc-3:a czoc-3:a zzoc-3:a izoc-3:a ozoc-310 JequnN

3niv~ (lOHlN03) aI!4lJW~ JO (VuVklVdSAS) al!l JW -weJed ureisk uJeJ6oJd 03Jnose~ioiue~yM eq iouum eiea (VuvtrvdsAs) w JwmJ~ .peeJ eq louue~ uwsAs UeJEbJd a3Jnos wi ~3y ANV 11~ ~Olj~3 A~W ANV IIH wow3 ebsse~

31l~M av3ti

muwJo3

9Nllla3

td313WWWd

InHlSAS

ps

1sn39vss3vu

klow3

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.5 E : LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE EDITING

5.51 Number
E:F-2100 E:F-2101 E:F-2102

Fatal error
Message CANNOT READ * FILE. CANNOT WRITE * FILE. CANNOT SEEK * FILE. Contents

5.5.2 Number
E:E-3100 E:E-3101 E:E3102 E:E-3103 E:E-3104 E:E-3105 E:E-3106 E:E-3107 E:E-3108 E:E-3109 E:E-3110 E:E-3111 E:E3112 E:E-3113 E:E-3114 E:E-3115 E:E-3116 E:E-3117 E:E-3118
I

Error (at editing ladder diagram)

Message INPUT INVALID Contents

1ADDRESS BIT NOTHING 1RELAY OR COIL NOTHING 1HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL 1VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL 1ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO.
FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL PARAMETER NOTHING LADDER ILLEGAL ERROR NET FOUND RELAY OR COIL FORBIT

I I I I I

1PLEASE COMPLETE NET

ILLEGAL NETS CLEAED ADDRESS BIT NOTHING FUNCTION NOT FOUND

1LADDER BROKEN 1ADDRESS BYTE NOTHING

STACK REGISTER OVER(8BIT) ERR PLEASE KEY IN SUB NO.

E:E-3119 E:E-3120 E:E-3121 E:E-3122 E:E-3123 E:E-3124 E:E-3125 E:E-3126

1PLEASE KEY IN FUN NO.

SYMBOUCOMMENT LARGE DATA TOO

1SAME SYMBOL DATA EXIST

SOURCE PROGRAM OF DIFFERENT FILE FORMAT ILLEGAL SUBPROGRAM NAME TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUBPROGRAM SAME SUB-PROGRAM EXISTS NAME

I
A Format-B program was found to exist when renaming a Format-A program. An invalid subprogram name was input.

THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO ZOOM I********. SOURCE PROGRAM OF ANOTHER FORMAT EXISTS A Format-B program, having the same name as that specified for the Copy/Move to file function, was found to exist during Format-A program editing.

E:E-3127

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number
E:E-3128 E:E-3129 E:E-3130 E:E-3131 E:E-3132

Messacle ILLEGAL SYMBOL PROGRAM OPEN ERROR PROGRAM NOT EXIST NOT EXIST APPOINT DATA SIZE PROGRAM NOT READ

Contents
A value that cannot be used as a symbol was input during symbol editing.

E:E-3133 E:E-3134-7 E:E-3135 E:E-3136 E:E-3137 E:E-3138 E:E-3139

1PROGRAM NOT WRITE

DIRECTORY NOT EXIST

1 LADDER DATA NOT EXIST 1PROGRAM IS OPENED

PROGRAM NAMES LIMIT OVER CAN NOT RENAME LATMP 1 PROGRAM NOT EXIST An attempt was made to perform renaming after editing LATMP with the File function.

5.53 Number
E:E3200 E:E-3201 E: E-3202 E:E3203 E:E-3204 E:E-3205 E:E-3206 E:E-3207 E:E-3208

Error (at editing step sequence) Message

ILLEGAL SOURCE CODE. BUFFER SIZE OVER. NUMBER OF NEST BRANCH TOO

Contents
A read error occurred when reading the specified intermediate code file. An intermediate code exceeds the Edit buffer size. The maximum allowable number of branch nests has been exceeded. The maximum allowable number of branches has been exceeded. The maximum allowable numberof element tables has been exceeded. The step, transition, branch, or line is not continuous. The start sideof the select branch does not agree with its end side. The start side of the parallel branch does not agree with its end side. The sequence In the select branch is other than transition to step to transition. Or, the sequence in the parallel branch is other than step to transition to step. The step line contains an element other than initial step, step, block step, jump (dummy step), and serial move (vertical line). The transition line contains an element other than initial step, step, block step, and jump (dummy step). Insertion is not possible at the specified location. Or, if inserted, the maximum coordinate value is exceeded. A soft key that cannot be changed was specified when changing an element. A horizontal line was specified in place of the closing code of the branch. The label pointed to by JUMP does not exist. The intermediate code cannot be created because it has not been completely checked.

BIG.
NUMBER OF BRANCH TOO BIG. SIZE OF TABLE BUFFER TOO BIG. UNCONNECTED STEP SEQUENCE DIAGRAM. SELECTED BRANCH ERROR. PARALLEL BRANCH ERROR. SYNTAX ERROR.

E:E-3209

STEP LINE SYNTAX ERROR.

E:E-3210 E:E-3211 E:E-3212 E:E-3213 E:E-3214 E:E-3215

TRANSITION LINE SYNTAX ERROR. CANNOT INSERT. CANNOT MAKE DIAGRAM. HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL. JUMP FORWARD CHECK ERROR. CHECK INCOMPLETE ERROR.

-260-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number E:E-3216 1 E:E-3217 E:E-3218 E:E-3219 t--E:E-3220 E:E-3221 E: E-3222 E:E-3223 FEE3224 1 E:E-3225 1 E:E3226

Message CHART SEQUENCE ERROR.

Contents The step line is not properly connected to the transition line.

1CHART START CODE ERROR.

CHART END CODE ERROR. JUMP CLOSE ERROR. HORIZONTAL LINE DUPLICATE ERROR. BRANCH UNCONNECTED ERROR.

1The chart start code does not exist (step).

The chart end code does not exist. JUMP has not been closed correctly. A branch contains two or more left end codes. (Invalid data exists before and after the branch code.) The branch connection is invalid. There is an invalid code before or after the branch start and end codes. The copy destination is invalid.

BRANCH SEQUENCE ERROR. CANNOT COPY DIAGRAMS.

1CANNOT MOVE DIAGRAMS. 1ILLEGAL SPECIFIED POSITION. / STRINGS NOT FOUND.

STEP NUMBER DUPLICATE ERROR. LABEL NUMBER DUPLICATE ERROR. DELETE TEMPORARY NAME FILE.

1The move destination is invalid. 1The specified coordinate value does not exist. I The specified character string does not exist.

I I

I I

E:E-3227 E:E-3228

The specified step number is already in use. Check which step numbers are already in use. I The specified label is already defined.

CANNOT IE:E_3229 E:E-3230 E:E-3231 E:E-3232

I
The temporary file cannot be deleted. The same file already exists, but with a different extension. Data outside the address range is set. No subprogram number is specified. An attempt was made to perform ZOOM for more than eight layers. I

;;E;zWPROGRAM INPUT INVALID. EXPECTED ADDRESS.

E:E-3233 E:E-3234 E:E-3235

TOO DEEP NESTING OF SUE PROGRAM. ILLEGAL FILE NAME. SUB-PROGRAM ALREADY

t--1 E:E-3236 E:E-3237

, ENTRIED. 1CANNOT DELETE PROGRAM. 1CANNOT CHANGE DATA.

The specified subprogram is a file that is currently being edited.

1The intermediate code file cannot be deleted.

Data cannot be converted because it is invalid.

-261-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

55.4

Warning (at editing ladder diagram)

WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO SAVE. E:W4109 THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLEDJF YOU SELECT TO UPDATE/APPEND. THE ZOOM NESTING CONDITION WILL BE CANCELLED, IF YOU SELECT TO OVERWRITE. MACHINE KIND AND INPUT PROGRAM NOT CONSISTENCY ! .

E:W4110

E:W4111

-262-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.6

F : SYMBOL & COMMENT EDITING

5.6.1 Error Number F:E-3100 F:E-3101 F:E-3102 F:E-3103 F:E-3104 F:E-3105 F:E-3106 F:E-3107 F:E-3108 F:E-3109 F:E-3110 1 Message INPUT DATA ILLEGAL. SYMBOL/COMMENT DATA TOO LARGE SAME SYMBO LDATA EXIST NO DEFINITION ADDRESS APPOINTED NOT FOUND DATA ERROR FILE READ ERROR HIT ANY KEY 1FILE WRITE ERROR HIT ANY KEY 1 1DATA SAVE ERROR 1SAME ADDRESS DATA EXISTS. t INPUT ADDRESS DATA. 1ILLEGAL SYMBOL. I 1 I I Contents

5.7 G : MESSAGE EDITING

5.7.1 Number G:E3100 G:E3101 G:E-3102 Error Message ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT *. MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE. THE FOLLOWING DATA OF * WERE DELETED. Contents

-263-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.8 H : PRINTOUT
58.1 Number
H:F-2005 H:F-2066

Fatal error Message

SOURCE PROGRAM HAS WRONG

Contents

FILE(S). ($)
CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE. I

5.8.2 Number
H:E-3100

Error 1 I Message
INSUFFICIENT MEMORY. 1CANNOT OPEN XXXX FILE. 1CANNOT READ XXXX FILE.

Contents
An attempt was made to reserve memory, but there was insuffffient free space. File xxxx cannot be opened. File xxxx cannot be read. File xxxx cannot be found. File xxxx does not exist. The format of file xxxx is invalid.

H:E-3101 H:E-3102

H:E-3106 H:E3107 H:E-3166 H:E-3109

1CANNOT WRITE XXXX FILE. 1OUTPUT FILE NOT DEFINED. WRITE ERROR OUTPUT FILE. INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTE FREE
1

Data cannot be written to the file xxxx. An error occurred upon opening the output file. An error occurred upon writing to the output file. There is insufficient free space on the disk. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space. There is insufficient free space on the disk to pertom crossreference. Reserve xxxx bytes of free space. The maximum allowable number of steps for the ladder diagram has been exceeded. The maximum number of steps that can be printed is 32767. An error occurred upon reading symbol data. An error occurred upon reading a net comment. The symbol data is invalid.

H:E-3110

INSUFFICIENT CURRENT & TMP DISK SPACE NEED XXXX BYTE 1FREE STEP NUMBER (XXXX) OVER.

H:E-3111

SYMBOL & COMMENT FILE READ NET COMMENT FILE READ

I

H:E-3114

SYMBOL 8. COMMENT DATA BROKEN.

5.8.3 Number
H:W-tlOO H:WAlOl H:W-4102

Warning Message
CANCEL PRINTER OUTPUT. CANCEL FILE OUTPUT. SEL SWITCH OFF

Contents
The <BREAK> key was pressed before the completion of printing. The <BREAK, key was pressed during file output.

The SEL indicator on the printer is not lit. Press the SEL button such that the indicator lights.

-264-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.9
5.9.1
Number I:F-2100 I:F-2101 5.9.2 Number I:E-3100 I:E-3101 I:E-3102 I:E-3103 I:E-3105 I:E-3107 I:E-3108 I:E-3109 I:E-3110 I:E-3111

I : COMPILE
Fatal error 1 Message I
Contents

1NOT ENOUGH DISK SPACE 1OUT OF MEMORY

Error Message XXXX READ ERROR XXXX WRITE ERROR XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NAME ILLEGAL. XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM NOT FOUND. XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM FORMAT IS DIFFERENT. SYSTEM PARAMETER READ ERROR. TITLE READ ERROR. I/O MODULE READ ERROR. VERIFICATION ERROR THIS WORD CAN NOT BE USED AS PASSWORD. TRY ANOTHER WORD ONLY ALPHABETICAL AND NUMERICAL CHARACTERS ARE ALLOWED THERE IS AN UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. THERE IS NO COIL IN THE FUNCTIONAL INSTRUCTION WHICH NEEDS THE COIL. SPECIFIED VALUE FOR A PARAMETER OF THE XXXX INSTRUCTION IS OUTSIDE THE RANGE. PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFERENT FROM PROGRAM NAME. AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION. AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION. THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM IS TOO LARGE. LADDER PROGRAM IS BROKEN. LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE.

Contents The source program cannot be read. (This error normally does not occur during compilation.) The compilation results cannot be written. An invalid source program name is specified. normally does not occur during compilation.) Source program xxxx does not exist. does not occur during compilation.) (This error

(This error normally (This error nor-

The source program format is FORMAT-A. mally does not occur during compilation.)

The source file for the system parameter data does not exist. The source file for the title data does not exist. The source file for the I/O module data does not exist. The input password differs from the registered password. Input the password correctly.

I:E-3112

The input password contains a non-alphanumeric ter.

charac-

I:E-3200 I:E-3201

An instruction that cannot be run by the specified program exists. A functional instruction is lacking a required coil.

I: E-3220

An out-of-range tion xxxx.

value is specified in a parameter of instruc-

l:E-3221

The parameter of the subprogram start instruction (SP) contains a program number that does not correspond to the program name. An out-of-range program number or an address other than a program number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx. An out-of-range label number or an address other than a label number is specified in a parameter of instruction xxxx. The ladder program is empty. instruction. Specify the END1 or END2

I:E-3222

I: E-3223

I: E-3250 l:E-3251 l:E-3252 l:E-3253

The size of the ladder program exceeds the maximum size specified for the selected program type. An unrecognizable instruction exists.

Because the first level of the main program takes too long to execute, the ladder cannot be executed. Make the first level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter.

-265-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number I:E-3254

Message THE NUMBER OF DIVISION OF LADDER EXCEEDS 99.

Contents Because the number of second level divisions in the main program exceeds the maximum of 99, the ladder cannot be executed. Make the second level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter. SP is the start instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in the main program. SPE is the end instruction for a subprogram. It cannot be used in the main program. The JMPC instruction performs a jump from a subprogram to the second level of the main program. It cannot be used in the main program. The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from other than the second level of the main program. The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from other than the second level of the main program. A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start of the subprogram. A subprogram must end with the SPE instructiontojndicate the end of the subprogram. No instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram. The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because the SP instruction indicates the start of a subprogram. The END1 instructionis not found at the end of the first level. The END2 instruction is not found at the end of the second level. The END3 instructionis not found at the end of the third level. No instructions can be placed after the END1 instruction because the END1 instruction indicates the end of the first level. No instructions can be placed after the END2 instruction because the END2 instruction indicates the end of the second level. No instructions can be placed after the END3 instruction because the END3 instruction indicates the end of the third level. No instructions can be placed after the END instruction because the END instruction indicates the end of the entire ladder program. END1 is specified for other than the first level. END2 is specified for other than the second level. END3 is specified for other than the third level. The END instruction is specified for the first level. The COME instruction is not specified when the COM instruction, that indicates the start of the instruction control range, is specified.

l:E-3270 I:E-3271 l:E-3272

SP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. SPE INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. JMPC INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE MAIN PROGRAM. CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM. CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED EXCLUDING THE 2ND LEVEL MAIN PROGRAM. THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTtON AT THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM. THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUBPROGRAM. LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION. SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED IN THE SUBPROGRAM. THERE IS NO END1 INSTRUCTION. THERE IS NO END2 INSTRUCTlON. THERE IS NO END3 INSTRUCTION. LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END1 INSTRUCTION. LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END2 INSTRUCTION. LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END3 INSTRUCTION. LADDER PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END INSTRUCTION. END1 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED. END2 INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED. END3 INSTRUCTION USED. CAN NOT BE

l:E-3273

I:E-3274

l:E-3290 l:E-3291

l:E-3292

l:E-3293

I:E-3310 I:E-3311 l:E-3312 I:E-3313

I:E-3314

I:E-3315

I:E-3316

I:E-3317 l:E-3318 I:E-3319 I:E-3320 l:E-3330

END INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED. THERE IS NO COME INSTRUCTION.

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number l:E-3331

Message CALL INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION. CALLU INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION. ANOTHER COM INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE CONTROLED COM INSTRUCTION. COME INSTRUCTION MUST BE THE PAIR WITH COM. COME INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED THOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION. THERE IS NO JMPE INSTRUCTION.

Contents The CALL instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from within the COM instruction control range. The CALLU instruction cannot be used because a subprogram cannot be called from within the COM instruction control range. The COM instruction. that indicates the start of the instruction control range, is specified twice within the range.

l:E-3332

l:E-3333

l:E-3334

The COME instruction, that indicates the end of the instruction control range, is specified when the COM instruction, used to indicate the start of the range, is not specified. The COME instruction is specified to indicate the end of the instruction control range when the end of the range has already been defined as a number of coils. The JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of the jump block, but the JMPE instruction, that indicates the end of the block, is not specified. Another JMP instruction is specified to indicate the start of a jump block before the JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of the first block. A JMPE instruction that indicates the end of a jump block is specified when no JMP instruction,that indicates the start of a block, is specified. A JMPE instruction is specified to indicate the end of a jump block when the end of the block has already been defined as a number of coils. The JMPB instruction does not contain label xxxx that indicates the jump destination. Two or more identical label numbers are found when defining jump destinations with the LBL instruction. Specify unique label numbers. The number of jump destinations defined with the LBL instruction exceeds the maximum allowable number that can be specified for the selected program type. Decrease the number of defined jump destinations. The JMPB instruction cannot be used to jump from a point inside to a point outside the COM instruction control range, or vice versa. JUMP operations can be performed only entirely within the range or entirely outside the range. The step sequence program contains a failed instruction or an instructionthat cannot be used with the selected program type. The parameter of the program stat-linstruction (SP) contains a program number that does not correspond to the program name. Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range step number or an address other than a step number. Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range program number or an address other than a program number. Instruction xxxx contains an out-of-range label number or an address other than a label number.

I:E-3335

l:E-3340

l:E-3341

ANOTHER JMP INSTRUCTION CAN NOT BE USED IN THE RANGE OF JMP INSTRUCTION. JMPE INSTRUCTION MUST BE THE PAIR WITH JMP. JMPE INSTRUCTtON IS DEIECTED THOUGH THE CASE OF THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION. THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED TWICE OR MORE. TOO MANY LABELS.

I:E-3342

l:E-3343

l:E-3350 l:E-3351

I:E-3352

l:E-3353

THE DESTINATION OF JMPB INSTRUCTION IS BEYOND COM/ COME INSTRUCTION. THERE IS AN UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. PROGRAM NUMBER IS DIFFERENT FROM PROGRAM NAME. AN ILLEGAL STEP NUMBER IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION. AN ILLEGAL PROGRAM NUMBER IS SPECIFIED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION. AN ILLEGAL LABEL NUMBER IS SPECIFED FOR THE XXXX INSTRUCTION.

I:E-3400

I:E-3420

l:E-3421

l:E-3422

l:E-3423

-267-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number LE-3440

Message THERE IS NO SP INSTRUCTION AT THE TOP OF THE SUBPROGRAM. THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUBPROGRAM. STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND SPE INSTRUCTION. SP INSTRUCTION IS DETECTED IN THE SUBPROGRAM. THE LABEL OF XXXX IS ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE STEP PROGRAMS. TOO MANY LABELS.

Contents A subprogram must start with the SP instruction to indicate the start of the subprogram. A subprogram must end with the SPE instruction to indicate the end of the subprogram. No other instructions can be placed after the SPE instruction because the SPE instruction indicates the end of a subprogram. The SP instruction cannot be placed within a subprogram because the SP instruction indkates the startof a subprogram. Two or more defined jump destinations have identical label numbers. Define a unique label number for each jump destination. The number of defined jump destinations exceeds the number allowed for step sequence editing. Reduce the number of jump destination definitions. There is no label corresponding to the specified DSTEP instruction. Two or more steps have identical step numbers. Define a unique step number for each step.

l:E-3441

l:E-3442

l:E-3443 l:E-3460

l:E-3461

l:E-3462 l:E-3480

DSTEP INSTRUCTION WITHOUT DLBL. THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS ASSIGNED FOR TWO OR MORE STEP PROGRAMS.

l:E-3570

THE SIZE OF THE MESSAGE DATA The amount of message data exceeds the maximum numIS TOO LARGE. ber of characters that can be specified for the selected program type. Reduce the total number of characters. DATA TOO LARGE. (LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE) The combined size of the ladder program and the step sequence program exceeds the maximum allowable size specified for the selected program type. Reduce the size of the ladder or step sequence program. The combined size of the message, symbol, comment, ladder, and step sequence data exceeds the maximum allowable size specified for the selectecl program type. Reduce the size of any of these data types. The selected program does not contain any subprogram fife numbered xxxx. Create a subprogramfile having this number. The END instruction is placed at the end of the second level when it is followed by a subprogram. Or, the END instruction is placed at the end of a subprogram when there is a subsequent subprogram having a higher program number. There is no label corresponding to the specified JMPC instruction. In the main program, two or more LBL instruction jump destinations have identical label numbers. Define a unique label number for each jump destination. The total number of LBL instruction jump destinations defined in the main program exceeds the maximum allowable number specified for the selected program type. Reduce the total number of jump destinations defined in the main program. Label xxxx, indicating a jump destination, cannot be placed in other than the second level because the JMPC instruction specifies a jump from a subprogram to the second level of the main program. Define label xxxx in the second level. Label xxxx, indicating the jump destination of the JMPC instruction, is within the COM instruction control range. Place label xxxx outside the range.

I:E-3600

I:E-3601

DATA TOO LARGE. (MESSAGE + SYMBOL + COMMENT + LADDER + STEP SEQUENCE) THERE IS NO SUBPROGRAM xxxx. LADDER/STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM EXISTS BEYOND END INSTRUCTION. THERE IS NO LABEL OF XXXX. THE LABEL OF XXXX IS USED TWICE OR MORE. TOO MANY LABELS.

l:E-3620 l:E-3640

l:E-3650 l:E-3651

l:E-3652

l:E-3653

THE LABEL OF XXXX TO REFER EXISTS IN ANOTHER LEVEL.

l:E-3654

THE LABEL OF XXXX EXISTS IN THE RANGE OF THE COM INSTRUCTION.

-268-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.9.3 Number kW-4100

Warning Message THE TITLE DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACE WITH SPACE CODE. ILLEGAL OPPANEL (PARAMETER). PROCEED TO COMPILE USING NO EDITING SUEPROGRAM NOT COMPLETED. HAS WITH Contents The title data contains kana or kanji characters. These characters are replaced by spaces.

I:W4101

Necessary addresses (key address, LED address, etc.) are not set when YES is specified for the system parameter indieating whether the FO operator panel is to be used. The value of this parameter is changed to NO during compilation. There is a subprogram for which editing has not yet been completed. Complete the editing of this subprogram. Twosubprograms haveidenticalnumbers(e.g., Pl.#lAand Pl.#SS). The ladder program is the first to be compiled (Pl.#tA in the above example). Symbols and comments are always output in FORMAT-B.

I:W4102 I:W4103

MULTIPLE SUB-PROGRAMS SAME NUMBER EXIST.

I:W4104

THE SOURCE-PROGRAM IS FORMAT-B. THIS PARAMETER IS IGNORED:SYMBOL/COMMENT THE SOURCE-PROGRAM IS FORMAT-B. THIS PARAMETER IS IGNORED: NET COMMENT THERE IS NO LADDER PROGRAM. LADDER EXECUTION TIME AT THE 1ST LEVEL IS TOO LARGE. THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION OF COM INSTRUCTION IS NOT ALLOWED. THE COIL NUMBER SPECIFICATION OF JMP INSTRUCTION IS NOT ALLOWED. UNUSED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND. THERE IS NO STEP SEQUENCE PROGRAM. THE SYMBOL DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACED WITH SPACE CODE. THE COMMENT DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACED WITH SPACE CODE. COMMENT DATA SIZE EXCEEDS 64KB. SYMBOUCOMMENT DATA IS NOT CONVERTED TO THE MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE. THE MESSAGE DATA WHICH COULD NOT BE DISPLAY ON THE CNC WAS REPLACED WITH SPACE CODE. UNREFERENCED xxxx. SUBPROGRAM

I:W4105

The FORMAT-B data does not include a net comment. Specifying this item has no effect. The ladderprogram isempty. Thisladderprogramisnotoutput to a memory card file. The first level of the main program takes too long to execute. Make the first level smaller, or increase the ratio of the ladder execution time in the system parameter. The end of the COM instruction control range cannot be specified as a number of coils. The specified number of coils is ignored, the end of the range being identified by the COME instruction. The end location of a jump cannot be specified as a number of coils. The specified number of coils is ignored, the end location being identified by the JMPE instruction. The ladder program contains a pointer to a lost net comment character string. This pointer is not ouiqut to a memory card file. The step sequence program is empty. This step sequence program is not output to a memory card file. The symbol data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space.

I:W4200 I:W4201

l:W4202

l:W4203

I:W4204 I:W4400 I:W4500

I:W4501

The comment data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space. More than 65,535 characters have been input as comment data. None of the symbol and comment data is output to a memory card file. The message data contains a special character that cannot be handled by the CNC. This character is replaced by a space. Subprogram xxxx is not called by any program. gram is, however, output to a memory card file. This pro-

l:W4502

I:W4570

I:W4600

-269-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.10 J : DECOMPILATION
5.10.1 Number J:F-2100 DATA:-, SYSTEMx J:F-2101 PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM XxXx MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE. XxXx MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE NOT FOUND. MISMATCHED PASSWORD. XxXx MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE READ ERROR. XXXX SOURCE PROGRAM WRITE ERROR. Error Message THERE IS AN UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION. THERE IS NO SPE INSTRUCTION AT THE BOTTOM OF THE SUBPROGRAM. THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA IN SOURCE PROGRAM EXCEEDS THE LIMIT. ID CODE (l/O MODULE) ERROR.(ADDRESS XXXX) Contents There is a failed instruction or an instruction that cannot be used with the selected program type. There is a subprogram in the selected program that does not end with the SPE instruction. The symbol data size in a selected program exceeded the systemdefined limitbefore the program was executed. The program thus cannot be executed; reduce the symbol data size. An invalid ID code is specified at address xxxx in the l/O module data. The program cannot be executed; prepare a valid memory card file.

Fatal error
Message FUNCTION CODE ERROR. Contents The function code specified in the memory card file does not match that defined in the system. The files function code appears immediately after DATA; the systems function code after SYSTEM. Install valid system data. The program specified in memory card file xxxx does not match the selected program type. Select a valid program. Specified memory card file xxxx does not exist. Create the file. The entered password is invalid. Enter the password correctly. Memory card file xxxx cannot be read. The file is invalid. Data cannot be written to source program xxxx.

J:F-2102 J:F-2103 J:F-2104 J:F-2105

5.10.2 Number J:E-3100 J:E-3101

J:E-3200

J:E-3300

-270-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

510.3 Number J:W4100

Warning Message THE SIZE OF LADDER PROGRAM IS TOO LARGE. Contents The number of steps defined in a subprogram in the ladder program exceeded the maximum number that can be specified for the selected program type. The subprogram is output to the source program. Make necessary corrections by editing the ladder diagram. xxxx net comment pointers do not correspond to any net comment character string. These net comment pointers are not output to the source program. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary. xxxx net comment character strings do not correspond to any net comment pointer. These net comment character strings are deleted. Edit the ladder diagram as necessary. xxxx identical net comment pointers have been found. Character strings are copied so that the same net comment character strings have the same net comment pointers. Step number xxxx is assigned to two or more different steps. Edit the step sequence as necessary. The total number of data items exceeded the system-defined limit when the symbol data merge operation reached the indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx). Data subsequent to this symbol data is not output to the source program. xxxx symbol data items are defined for the same address. Either the source data or the memory card data becomes valid, depending on the setting of the symbol merge option. The symbol character string defined in the indicated symbol data (address: xxxx/symbol: xxxx) is already defined at another address. This symbol data is not output to the source program. The indicated symbol data (address: &symbol: xxxx) was found to be invalid as a result of the IEC-cornpliant symbol character string check. This symbol data is not output to the source program. To output it to the source file, change the setting in the %%%FLSET.CNF file. The symbol data containing symbol xxxx contains an invalid address. This symbol data is not output to the source program. The operator panel specification in the system parameter data is invalid. Processing continues while ignoring the operator panel specification. The R/D extension address cannot be used because the PMC version of PMC-RC is earlierthan 3. Change the PMC version in the system parameter. The header section of memory card file xxxx is invalid. However, processing continues. The file settings have returned to the defaults. The settings in the OPTION file of the selected program cannot be read. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. The option reset function key may be used. Symbol character check is not performed. The settings in the %%%FLSET.CNF file cannot be read. Create a valid file or modify the file settings. When this check is not made, processing may be continued even withoui making the changes.

J:W4101

XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND.

J:W4102

XXXX UNUSED NET COMMENT STRINGS FOUND. XXXX DUPLICATED NET COMMENT POINTER FOUND. THE STEP NUMBER OF XXXX IS USED TWICE OR MORE. THE NUMBER OF SYMBOL DATA EXCEEDS THE LIMIT. (ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)

J:W4103

J:W4104 J:W4200

J:W4201

XXXX SYMBOL DATA AT DUPLICATED ADDRESS FOUND. SAME SYMBOL EXISTS. (ADDRESS XXXX. SYMBOL XXXX)

J:W4202

J:W4203

ILLEGAL SYMBOL. (ADDRESS XXXX, SYMBOL XXXX)

J:W4204

SYMBOL DATA ADDRESS ILLEGAL (SYMBOL XXXX) ILLEGAL OPERATOR PANEL (SYSTEM PARAMETER). PROCEED TO DECOMPILE USING NO. THIS MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE IS NOT FOR EXPANDED R/D ADDRESS. XXXX MEMORY CARD FORMAT FILE ILLEGAL. OPTION READ FAILED. SE-I-I-ING HAS CHANGED INTO DEFAULT.

J:W4300

J:W4301

J:W4800 J:W4900

J:W4901

%%%FLSET.CNF READ FAILED. SYMBOL CHARACTERS ARE NOT CHECKED.

-271-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.11 K : MNEMONIC CONVERSION

5.11 .l Fatal error Number
K:F-2006 K:F-2001 K:F-2006 K:F-2097 K:F-2100 KF-2101 K:F-2102 K:F-2103 K:F-2104 K:F-2105 K:F-2106 K:F-2107 K:F-2108 K:F-2109 K:F-2110 K:F-2111 K:F-2112 K:F-2113 K:F-2114 K:F-2115 K:F-2116 K:F-2117

Message
INSUFFICIENT INSUFFICIENT MEMORY. DISK SPACE.

Contents

NOT FOUND XxXx FILE. NOT FOUND XxXx SOURCE PROGRAM. FILE I/O ERROR. 1SET-UP FILE BROKEN. I

1ILLEGAL OPTION(S).
INSUFFICIENT PARAMETER(S).

I
Required system or functional instruction parameters are not specified. The functional instruction contains more parameters than are required.

TOO MANY PARAMETERS. ILLEGAL OPTlON-SPECIFIED FILE.

1ILLEGAL IDCODE.
EXPECTED TERMINATOR. PMC SERIES IS DIFFERENT FROM SOURCE-PROGRAM. EXPECTED IDCODE. ILLEGAL PARAMETER(S). CREATE TEMPORARY FILE(S) IN CURRENT DIRECTORY. NOT SPECIFIED ENVIRONMENTAL VARIABLE TMP. ILLEGAL NAME OF SET-UP FILE.

1NOT FOUND SET-UP FILE. 1EXPECTED /PC OPTION.

XxXx EXECUTABLE FILE NOT FOUND.

I I I

1INPUT DATA ILLEGAL.

-272-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.11.2 Number K:E-3100 K:E-3101 K:E-3102 K:E-3103

Error
Message XXXX FILE CANNOT EXECUTE. XXXX SYMBOL 8 COMMENT DATA BROKEN. CANNOT BE HANDLE DATA TYPE %@2-C. CANNOT CONVERT FILES OF THE PMC SERIES SET UP THE SYSTEM. ;;Z;OT OVERWRITE EXISTING A bit address is specified in the byte address parameter of the functional instruction. A byte address is specified for the basic instruction. An output module is specified as the input addressof the I/O module data. An input module is specified as the output address of the I/O module data. A parameter prohibited address is specified as the address parameter of the functional instruction. The mnemonic of extended symbol %@2-C is converted when %%%FLSET.CNF is a FORMAT-A/B file. Contente

K:E-3104 K:E-3105 K:E-3106 K:E-3107 K:E-3108 K:E-3109

CANNOT SPECIFY BIT ADDRESS OF PARAMETER. CANNOT SPECIFY BYTE ADDRESS ON BASIC INSTRUCTION. CANNOT SPECIFY OUTPUT MODULE AT INPUT ADDRESS. CANNOT SPECIFY INPUT MODULE AT OUTPUT ADDRESS. CANNOT SPECIFY THE ADDRESS PROHIBITED USING AS PARAMETER. CANNOT SPECIFY THE BIT ADDRESS. CANNOT SPECIFY THE BYTE ADDRESS. CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT ADDRESS. CANNOT SPECIFY THE INPUT ADDRESS WITH COIL. CANNOT SPECIFY THE ODD ADDRESS. EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 2. EXPECTED A MULTIPLE OF 5. EXPECTED ADDRESS. EXPECTED FUNCTION NUMBER. EXPECTED PARAMETER(S). IDCODE NOT FOUND IN XxXx. ILLEGAL ADDRESS. ILLEGAL ADDRESS IN DATA TABLE. ILLEGAL ADDRESS OF PARAMETER. ILLEGAL CHARACTER(S). ILLEGAL SOURCE-PROGRAM NAME.

K:E-3110 K:E3111 K:E-3112 K:E-3113 K:E-3114 K:E-3117 K:E-3118 K:E-3119 K:E-3120 K:E-3121 K:E-3122 K:E-3123 K:E-3124 K:E-3125 K:E-3126 K:E-3127

An output prohibited address is specified as the output address parameter of the functional instruction. An output prohibited address is specified for the coil, An odd-number prohibited address is specified as an oddnumber address. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple of 2. The system parameter contains a value that is other than a multiple of 5. The basic instruction has no address.

The functional instruction has no parameter.

An invalid address or an address that cannot be specified is specitied in the symbol and comment data, or message data. An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction data table. An invalid address is specified in the functional instruction address parameter. The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, or message data contains invalid character data.

-273-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number K:E-3128 K:E-3129 K:E-3130 K:E-3131 K:E-3132 K:E-3133 K:E-3134 K:E-3135 K:E-3136 K:E-3137 K:E-3138 K:E3139 K:E3140 K:E-3141 K:E-3142 K:E-3143 K:E-3144 K:E-3145

Message ILLEGAL MNEMONIC FILE NAME. ILLEGAL PARAMETER NUMBER. ILLEGAL TITLE NUMBER. ILLEGAL VALUE. ILLEGAL VALUE IN BASE DATA. ILLEGAL VALUE IN GROUP DATA. ILLEGAL VALUE IN SLOT DATA. ILLEGAL VALUE OF PARAMETER. INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S). INPUT MNEMONIC FILE NAME. 1uNAMu: SOURCE-PROGRAM INVALID A NUMBER OF CONVERT DATA. INVALID FUNCTIONS NAME.

Contents

The system parameter contains an invalid data number. The data number of the data identifier is invalid. The system parameter contains an invalid value. An invalid value is specified in the base data of the I/O module data. An invalid value is specified in the group data of the I/O module data. An invalid value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module data. An invalid value is specified in the data table of the functional instruction.

An unsupported functional instruction is specified.

INVALID FUNCTION NUMBER. INVALID MODULE NAME. RETURN STATUS FROM SPAWN IS E2BIG(=7). INVALID PMC SERIES OF SPECIFIED SOURSE-PROGRAM. INVALID QUALIFIER. The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder, or I/O module data is followed by an invalid character. The module name of the I/O module data is invalid.

K:E3146 K:E-3147 K:E-3148 K:E-3149 K:E-3150 K:E-3151 K:E-3152 K:E-3153 K:E-3154 K:E-3155 K:E-3156 K:E-3157 K:E-3158

LACK OF XXXX FILE. MESSAGE DATA TOO LARGE. MNEMONIC FILE NOT FOUND. NOT ENOUGH PARAMETER(S). NOT FOUND BASE DATA. NOT FOUND GROUP DATA. NOT FOUND MODULE NAME. NOT FOUND SLOT DATA. NOT FOUND XxXx PROCESS INTERFACE FILE. NOT FOUND XXXX SOURCEPROGRAM MANAGEMENT FILE. NOT FOUND XXXX SUB PROGRAM FILE. OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS. The address of the mnemonic data or I/O module data is specified. Required system or functional instruction parameters are not specified. The base data of the I/O module is not found. The group data of the I/O module is not found. The module name of the l/O module is not found. The slot data of the I/O module is not found.

OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS IN DATA An out-of-range address is specified in the functional TABLE. instruction data table.

-274-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number K:E-3159

bmge OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF ADDRESS. OUT OF ADDRESS LIMITS OF PARAMETER. OUT OF PARAMETER VALUE.

Contents An out-of-range address is specified as a message setting address. An out-of-range address is specified in the functional

I instruction parameter.

An out-of-range value is specified in the functional instruction parameter. I

1 K:E3162 K:E-3163 K:E-3164 K:E-3165

/ OUT OF VALUE.
OUT OF VALUE IN BASE DATA. OUT OF VALUE IN DATA TABLE. OUT OF VALUE IN GROUP DATA. OUT OF VALUE IN SLOT DATA. PLEASE SHORTEN FILE NAME. PROCESS ERROR. SOURCE-PROGRAM NOT FOUND.

1An out-of-range value is specified in the system parameter. 1

An out-of-range value is specified in the base data of the I/O module data. An out-of-range value is specified in the functional instruction data table. An out-of-range value is specified in the group data of the l/O module data. I An out-of-range value is specified in the slot data of the I/O module data

K:E-3166

1 K:E-3167 1 K:E-3168 1 K:E3172 K:E3173

SPECIFIED CONVERT DATA NOT FOUND.(XXXX) SPECIFY THE VALUE(SLOT) EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT-B XxXx. SYMBOL DATA COUNT OVER. SYMBOL DATA NOT FOUND. Although comment data exists, there is no symbol data. Only symbol or comment data was converted to the address.

K:E-3178 ITNOT K:E-3179 K:E-3181 K:E-3187

SYMBOL OR COMMENT DATA FOUND. THE SAME GROUP,BASE,AND SLOT ARE ALREADY SPECIFIED. TOO LONG STRINGS. TOO MANY CHARACTERS IN 1 LINE.

I
The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data all have the same number. The length of the system parameter, message data, or title data exceeds the maximum. The number of characters entered on a line of the system parameter, message data, title data, symbol and comment mnemonic data, mnemonic data, or I/O module data exceeds the limit. functional instruction contains more parameters than 1The are required.

(-3188 K:E-3189 K:E-3190 K:E-3191 K:E-3192 K:E-3193

(TOO MANY PARAMETERS. TOTAL VALUE OF BASE AND SLOT IS OVER. UNDEFINED INSTRUCTION.

I
The sum of the base data and slot data values of the l/O module data exceeds the maximum. The data contains an undefined instruction. An address is specified in a location where it is not required. A parameter is specified !or an instruction that requires no parameters. A nonexistent data number is specified for a system parameter or data identifier. An attempt to register symbol and comment data failed. The

UNEXPECTED ADDRESS. UNEXPECTED PARAMETER(S). UNKNOWN DATA NUMBER.

I---K:E-3194

DATA ENTRY ERROR.

K:E-3195

INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S) IN SYMBOL DATA.

I Doubkbyte

symbol data contains a double-byte character. characters cannot be used in symbol data. I

-275-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.11.3 Warning Number

K:W4100 K:W4101 K:W4102 K: W-4 103 K:W4104 K:W4105

Message
COMMENT DATA NOT FOUND. DATA NOT FOUND. DELETED KANJI CHARACTERS. F)PECTED CONTROL CONDlTlON ILLEGAL CHARACTERS ARE SPECIFIED AT XxXx. ILLEGAL OP.PANEL(PARAMETER). PROCEED TO DISCOMPILE USING NO. ILLEGAL SYMBOL. INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S). INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTER(S) IN COMMENT DATA. LOGICAL OPERATED WITH UNUSED REGISTER(S). LOGICAL PRODUCT REMAINS IN REGISTER(S). MESSAGE DATA INCLUDE KANA OR KANJI CHARACTERS AT XXXX. NOT ENOUGH CONTROL CONDITION (S). NOT FOUND DATA AT XXXX ADDRESS. NOT FOUND PARAMETER NUMBERED XXXX. NOT FOUND TITLE NUMBERED xxxx. NOT FOUND XXXX PMGCS NOT USED NET COMMENT POINTER EXIST. XXXX OUTPUT UNUSED REGISTER(S). OVERWROTE EXISTING DATA. INVALID QUALIFIER. FILE.

Contents
Only symbol data was convened to the address. The system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, message data, or I/O module data does not exist.

Nocontrol condition is specifiedforthefunctional Invalid character data exists in xxxx.

instruction.

System parameter OP.PANEC contains an invalid value; the value is converted to NO. The symbol data is nonstandard (check levet-1). MAT-C only) The message data contain a doubltiyte (For FOR-

K:W4108 K:W4!07 K:W4108

character.

Comment data containing a double-byte character was converted without the doubltiyte character cooversion option (J option). An operation was performed using a register that is not registered in the ladder data. A register exists that has not been output to the ladder data. Message data xxxx contains a double-byte katakana character. or single-byte

K:W4109 K:W4110 K:W4111

K:W4112 K:W4113 K:W4114 K:W4115 K:W4116 K:W4117 K:W4118 K:W4119 K:W4120

Control conditions required for the functional instruction are not specified. No message is defined for address xxxx.

--

An invalid character follows the end code % of the system parameter, title data, symbol and comment data, ladder data, message data, or I/O module data.

K:W4121 K:W4122

REGISTERS OVERFLOW. SOME GARBAGE DATA ARE FOUND AT END OF LADDER DATA. SPECIFY SAME GROUP,BASE, AND SLOT. SPECIFY SAME NUMBER(GROUP) AT I/O UNIT-B AS I/O UNIT-A. During conversion to Format-B, data that does not belong to level 1 to 3, or to any subprogram, is found. This indicates that there is data subsequent to the last SPE. The group, base, and slot data of the I/O module data al have the same number.

K:W4123 K:W4124

-276-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number K:W4125 K:W4126

Mesaage SPECIFY THE VALUE(BASE) EXCEPT 0 AT I/O UNIT-B. THE FOLLOWING DATA OF XXXX WERE DELETED, BECAUSE OF EXCEEDING THE LIMIT. TOO MANY CONTROL CONDITIONS. UNEXPECTED COIL(S). UNEXPECTED CONTROL CONDITION(S). REDEFINITION OF ADDRESS DATA. The functional conditions.

Contents

K:W4127 K:W4128 K:W4129 K:W4130

instruction

is subject to too many control

A coil was specified when not required by the functional instruction, A basic instruction was specified in a functional instruction for which no control conditions are required. Two or more symbol definitions exist for a single address. When the start code of thesymbol data is%O2, the symbol definition must not be specified more than once. The second and subsequent definitions are ignored. For information relating to the start code, see Section 4.5.8.3. The same symbol is specified for two or more different addresses. Symbols other than the first specified symbol are replaced by spaces. The character string length of the symbol data exceeds the maximum (six characters for FORMAT-A and FORMAT-B; 16 characters for FORMAT-C). The symbol data is replaced by spaces. The comment data length exceeds 30 characters. The comment data is replaced by spaces. Two or more different symbols are specified for the same address. (For FORMAT-C, an identical symbol may be specified in more than one location.) Symbols other than that specified first are replaced by spaces. Two or more diierent character strings are specified for the same relay comment at the same address. (For FORMAT-C, an identical character string may be specified in more than one location.) Relay comments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces. Two or more different character strings are specified for the same coil comment at the same address. (For FORMAT-C, an identical character string may be specified in more than one location.) Coil comments other than that specified first are replaced by spaces. Two or more different character strings are specified for the same comment title at the same address. (For FORMAT-C, an identical character string may be specified in more than one location.) Comment titles other than that specified first are deleted. The relay comment data length exceeds 16 characters. (For FORMAT-C only) The relay comment data is replaced by spaces. The coil comment data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FORMAT-C only) The coil comment data is replaced by spaces. The comment title data length exceeds 30 characters. (For FORMAT-C only) The comment title data is replaced by spaces.

K:W4131

REDEFINITION OF SYMBOL DATA.

K:W4132

TOO LONG STRINGS FOR SYMBOL DATA.

K:W4133 K:W4134

TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COMMENT DATA. SYMBOL DATA ALREADY EXIST

K:W4135

RELAY COMMENT DATA ALREADY EXIST.

K:W4136

COIL COMMENT DATA ALREADY EXIST.

K:W4137

COMMENT TITLE DATA ALREADY EXIST.

K:W4138

TOO LONG STRINGS FOR RELAY COMMENT DATA. TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COIL COMMENT DATA. TOO LONG STRINGS FOR COMMENT TITLE DATA.

K:W4139

K:W4140

-277-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.12 L : INPUT/OUTPUT
5.12.1 Number L:E-3106 L:E-3101 L:E-3102 L:E-3103 L:E-3104 L:E-3105 L:E-3106 L:E-3107 Error Message NOT EXIST XxXx FILE. ROM ID UNMATCH ERROR FILE OPEN ERROR FILE READ ERROR FILE WRITE ERROR FILE CLOSE ERROR INVALID RECEIVE DATA TIME OUT ERROR File xxxx does not exist. The currently set cassette or module does not match the currently selected machine model. The specified file cannot be opened. The specified file cannot be read. Data cannot be written to the specified file. The specified file cannot be closed. Data other than an IS0 code has been received. No response was received within a specified period after the PC issued an instruction. Check the destinations power source, settings, cable connections and parameters (baud rateand stop bit), and whetherthe contents of CONFIGSYS are valid. Access has been interrupted. The tile contents do not match the ROM data. The control code is invalid. The contents of the first record are invalid. The ROM data cannot be comoressed. The ROM file data is invalid. The ROM file exceeds the size of ROM itself. The ROM file format is invalid. The ROM parity of the specified file is invalid. The ROM count is invalid. The ROM file cannot be opened. The work file cannot be opened. The work file cannot be initialized. The work file cannot be closed. The S record format is invalid. A seek operation cannot be performed for the work file. Data cannot be written to the work file. Data cannot be written to the ROM file. The work file cannot be read. The ROM file cannot be read. The ROM file format is invalid. The EROM is mounted improperly. An error was detected during EROM diagnosis. The EROM is faulty. The EROM data does not match the ROM file contents. Data cannot be written because the EROM is not deleted. The EROM is not yet deleted. The number of data items is invalid. Contents

L:E-3108 L:E-3109 L:E-3110 L:E-3120 L:E-3121 L:E-3122 L:E-3123 L:E-3124 L:E-3125 L:E-3126 L:E-3150 L:E-3151 L:E-3152 L:E-3153 L:E-3154 L:E-3155 L:E-3156 L:E-3157 L:E-3158 L:E-3159 L:E-3160 L:E-3180 L:E-3181 L:E-3182 L:E-3183 L:E-3184 L:E-3185 L:E-3186

ACCESS CANCELED FILE-ROM UNMATCH ERROR CONTROL CODE ERROR FIRST RECORD INFORMATION ERROR ROM DATA CANT CONDENSE ERROR PART OF ROM DATA INVALID ROM FILE > ROM ERROR ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR ROM PARITY ERROR OF APPOINT FILE ROM COUNT ERROR ROM FILE OPEN ERROR WORK FILE OPEN ERROR WORK FILE INITIALIZE ERROR WORK FILE CLOSE ERROR S RECORD FORMAT ERROR WORK FILE SEEK ERROR WORK FILE WRITE ERROR ROM FILE WRITE ERROR WORK FILE READ ERROR ROM FILE READ ERROR ROM FILE FORMAT ERROR ROM SET ERROR DIAGNOSIS ERROR EROM OUT LEVEL ERROR COMPARE ERROR DATA FILE WRITE ERROR BLANK CHECK ERROR DATA SEND ERROR

-278-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number L:E-3187 L:E-3188 L:E-3189 L:E-3190 L:E-3191 L:E-3192 L:E-3193 L:E-3194 L:E-3195 L:E-3196 L:E-3197 L:E-3198 L:E-3199 L:E-3200 L:E-3201 L:E-3202 L:E-3203 L:E-3204 L:E-3205 L:E-3206 L:E-3207 L:E-3208 L:E-3209 L:E-3210 L:E-3211 L:E-3212 L:E-3213 L:E-3214 L:E-3215 L:E-3216 L:E-3217 L:E-3218 L:E-3219 L:E-3220

Mewage

I
The writer is in use.

Contents A parity error occurred during data transmission.

PARITY ERROR ROM WRITER IS OCCAPIED ROM TYPE ERROR COMPARE ERROR ADDRESS = , INPUT DATA = . FILE DATA = FL10 _ATDAT FILE FORMAT ERROR. HIT ANY KEY. MEMORY CARD ERROR NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT PARAMETER NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR INSUFFICIENT MEMORY

The ROM type is invalid.

The format of the FLIO_AT.DAT file is invalid.

I
An error occurred during memory card format conversion. An error occurred during memory card format conversion. The third parameter specified for memory card format con-

I version is invalid.
There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conversion. The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid. The activated machine is other than a model that can perform memory card format conversion. The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the count falls outside the allowable range). The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the file size falls outside the allowable range). The machine model setting tile cannot be read. Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized. The memory card format conversion file does not exist. The memory card format conversion file cannot be read. There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card format conversion. There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conversion. The memory card format conversion file cannot be created. The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened. An error occurred upon creating a conversion table for

NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR INVALID PMC TYPE INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF CASSEl-TE SIZE) INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF FILE SIZE) PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR INITIALIZE ERROR NOT EXIST FILE FILE READ ERROR INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE OUT OF MEMORY NOT MAKE FILE NOT OPEN WORK FILE CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR

1PMC TYPE I/O ERROR

BREAK PMC TYPE FILE IMPOSSOBLE PROSESS ERROR ROM FILE TYPE ERROR FILE SEEK ERROR FILE READ ERROR FILE OPEN ERROR NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT FILE INVALID ROM COUNT(OUT OF ROM SIZE) FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR

I memory card format conversion. 1An I/O error occurred for the machine model settina file.

I 1

The machine model setting file was destroyed during an l/O operation. I The child process cannot be executed. The ROM file format is invalid. A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file. The specified file cannot be read. -I The specified file cannot be opened. The source file for which format conversion is to be performed does not exist. The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range). I The file size cannot be obtained. The file size cannot be changed.

1FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR 1DATA SEEK ERROR

-279-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

(MEMORY CARD TYPE)

IN TEXT FILE IT IS NEEDED

(COULD NOT FILD COMMAND INTERPRETER

interpreter is not found).

-280-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number L:E-3336 L:E-3339 L:E-3340 L:E-3341 L:E-3342 L:E-3343 L:E-3344 LIE-3345 L:E-3350 L:E-3351 L:E-3352 L:E-3353 L:E-3354 L:E-3355 L:E-3356

MeJ=s((e INVALID X PARAMETER IN TEXT FILE ERROR OF MODE COMMAND I==;T INITIALIZE IS COMPLETE ;;;;;RARY FILE FORMAT

Contents X Parameter in the text file is invalid. The MODE command cannot be executed. The port has been successfully initialized. The temporary file format is invalid. The work file cannot be deleted (the pathname is invalid). The work file cannot be deleted (the specified file is not found). The specified machine model is an undefined PMC model. Port initialization failed. A port overrun occurred (detected by the I/O port status check). A parity error occurred (detected check). by the I/O port status

COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY FILE(FOR INVALID PASS NAME) COULD NOT DELETE TMPORARY FILE(FOR COULD NOT FIND FILE) UNKNOWN PMC TYPE PORT INITIALIZE ERROR PORT ERROR(OVER RUN) PORT ERROR(PARTY) PORT ERROR(FRAMING) PORT ERROR (BREAK INTERRUPT) PORT ERROR (TIME OUT) PORT ERROR (DATA OUTPUT) TIMER SET/CANCEL ERROR

A framing error occurred (detected by the l/O portstatus check). A break interrupt error occurred (detected by the l/O port status check). A time out error occurred (detected by the l/O port status check). A data transmission error occurred (detected by the l/O port status check). The system timer is invalid. Change the data in the text file (FLIO_AT.DAT). For details, see the comment section of FLIO_AT.DAT. - Unpermitted character is used in specified program name. - The program name is over 8 characters. Forrnat-AIB source program is specified. Specify F0mat-C source program.

L:E-3400 L:E-3401 L:E-3402 L:E-3403 L:E-3404 L:E-3500 L:E-3501 L:E-3502 L:E-3503 L:E-3504 L:E-3505 L:E-3506 L:E-3507 L:E-3508 L:E-3509

ILLEGAL XXXX PROGRAM NAME. SOURCE PROGRAM TYPE IS DIFFERENT. XXXX FILE I/O ERROR. UNKNOWN PMC SERIES. XXXX DIRECTORY DOES NOT EXIST. NOT EXIST XxXx pLRf;ARAMETER FILE. COUNT

Specified source programs PMC type is unknown. Specified directory for backup does not exist. File xxxx does not exist. The number of input parameters is invalid. The machine model label of the input parameter is invalid. The data file cannot be opened. The data file cannot be read. The source file for which format conversion formed cannot be opened. The destination opened. is to be percannot be

INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE LABEL NAME ERROR DATA FILE OPEN ERROR DATA FILE READ ERROR CONVERT SOURCE FILE OPEN ERROR ;;;;RT OBJECT FILE OPEN

file for source file conversion

PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN DATA FILE PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION

The numberof parameters specified in the data file is invalid. The data file contains an invalid parameter. The contents of the data file are invalid.

-281-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

1 Number

Mesaage

Contents The source file cannot be read. There is insufficient memory to continue processing. The ROM file format is invalid. Data cannot be written to the destination file. I The data file does not exist. Conversion has been canceled. There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing. File xxxx does not exist. The number of input parameters is invalid. The machine model label for the input parameter is invalid.

CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ L:E-3511 L:E-3512 MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR E;;;kRT SOURCE FILE FORMAT

I I

L:E-3513 L:E3514 L:E-3515 L:E-3516 L:E-3600 L:E-3601 L:E-3602

CONVER OBJECT FILE WRITE ERROR DATA FILE DOSNT EXIST COCNVERT CANCEL INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE

NOT EXIST XXXX FILE. INPUT PARAMETER COUNT ERROR INPUT PARAMETER MACHINE LABEL NAME ERROR

1 L:E-3603 L:E-3604 L:E-3605 L:E-3696 L:E-3607 L:E-3608 1 L:E-3609 L:E-3610 L:E-3611 L:E-3612 L:E-3613 L:E-3614 L:E-3615

( DATA FILE OPEN ERROR

DATA FILE READ ERROR EE;;pT SOURCE FILE OPEN

1The data file cannot be opened.

The data file cannot be read. The source file cannot be opened. The destination file cannot be opened. The number of parameters specified in the data file is invalid. The data file contains an invalid parameter.

CONVERT OBJECT FILE OPEN ERROR PARAMETER COUNT ERROR IN DATA FILE PARAMETER ERROR IN DATA FILE

1INVALID DATA FILE INFORMATION

CONVERT SOURCE FILE READ ERROR MEMORY ALLOCATE ERROR CONVERT SOURCE FILE FORMAT ERROR EE;;p OBJECT FILE WRITE

1The contents of the data file are invalid.

The source file cannot be read. There is insufficient memory to continue processing. The ROM file format is invalid. Data cannot be written to the destination file. The data file does not exist. Conversion has been canceled. There is insufficient free space on the disk to continue processing. The S record check sum is erroneous.

DATA FILE DOSNT EXIST COCNVERT CANCEL INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE SUM CHECK ERROR OF S RECORD rFORMAT ERROR OF SO RECORD

I I

L:E-3516 L:E-3617 L:E-3618 L:E-3619 L:E-3620 L:E-3621 L:E-3622 L:E-3700 L:E-3701 L:E-3702

1The SO record format is invalid. ( The machine model code for the SO record is invalid.
A data conversion error occurred.

1PMC TYPE CODE ERROR

DATA CONVERT ERROR FORMAT ERROR OF S RECORD PMC ADDRESS ERROR NUMBER ERROR OF INPUT PARAMETER NO.3 PARAMETER ERROR INSUFFICIENT MEMORY

) The S record format is invalid.

The specified PMC address falls outside the allowable range. An error occurred during memory card format conversion. The third parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid. There is insufficient memory to activate memory card fonat conversion.

-282-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number L:E-3703 L:E-3704 L:E-3705 L:E-3766 L:E-3707 L:E-3708 L:E-3709 L:E-3710 L:E-3711 L:Ei3712 L:E-3713 L:E-3714 L:E-3715 L:E-3716 L:E-3717 L:E-3718 L:E-3719 L:E-3720 L:E-3721 L:E-3722 L:E-3723 L:E-3724 L:E-3725 L:E-3726 L:E-3727 L:E-3728 L:E-3729 L:E-3730 L:E-3731 L:E-3732 L:E-3733 L:E-3734 L:E-3735 L:E-3736 L:E-3737

Messaurge NO.4 PARAMETER ERROR INVALID PMC TYPE INVALID ROM COUNT (OUT OF CASSETTE SIZE) INVALID ROM COUNT (OUT OF FILE SIZE) PMC TYPE FILE READ ERROR INITIALIZE ERROR NOT EXIST FILE FILE READ ERROR INSUFFICIENT DISK SPACE OUT OF MEMORY NOT MAKE FILE NOT OPEN WORK FILE CONVERT TABLE MAKE ERROR PMC TYPE l/O ERROR BROKEN PMC TYPE FILE IMPOSSIBLE PROSESS ERROR ROM FILE TYPE ERROR FILE SEEK ERROR FILE READ ERROR FILE OPEN ERROR NOT EXIST SOURCE CONVERT FILE INVALID ROM COUNT (OUT OF ROM SIZE) FILE SIZE GAIN ERROR FILE SIZE CHANGE ERROR DATA SEEK ERROR ROM INFORMATION ERROR FILE WRITE ERROR OBJECT FILE I/O ERROR DATA MAX OVER $-TEA SIZE IS LESS THAN ROM INVALID DATA SIZE OF MEMORY CARD INVALID MEMORY CARD FILE INVALID ROM COUNT IN ROM FILE ROM PARITY ERROR PARAMETER ERROR (MEMORY CARD TYPE)

Contents The fourth parameter specified for memory card format conversion is invalid. The activated machine is other than a model that supports memory card format conversion. The ROM count for memory cardformat conversion is invalid (the count falls outside the allowable range). The ROM count for memory cardformat conversion is invalid (the file size falls outside the allowable range). The machine model setting file cannot be read. Memory card format conversion cannot be initialized. The memory card format conversion file does not exist. The memory card format conversion file cannot be read. There is insufficient free space on the disk to activate memory card format conversion. There is insufficient memory to activate memory card format conversion. The memory card fom?at conversion file cannot be created. The work file for memory card format conversion cannot be opened. An error occurred upon creating a conversion memory card format conversion. table for

An I/O error occurred for the machine model setting file. The machine model setting file was destroyed during an I/O operation. The child process cannot be executed. The ROM file format is invalid. A seek operation cannot be performed for the specified file. The specified file cannot be read. The specified file cannot be opened. The source file for which format conversion formed does not exist. is to be per-

The ROM count for memory card format conversion is invalid (the ROM size falls outside the allowable range). The file size cannot be determined. The file size cannot be changed. A seek operation cannot be performed in the file data section Data cannot be written to the ROM file data section. Data cannot be written to the specified file. An I/O error occurred in the object file. The amount of data exceeds the allowed maximum. Execution cannot be continued because the data size i: smaller than that of the count. The size of the memory card data section is invalid. The memory card file is invalid (the identification invalid). The ROM count in the ROM file is invalid. The parity value in the ROM file is invalid. There is an invalid parameter (memory card format). data i:

-283-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.12.2 Warning
Number L:W4100 Message ROM PARITY WARING OF APPOINT FILE, CONTINUE TO TRANSFER? (Y/N) ROM PARITY WARING OF APPOINT FILE XXXX IS A PROGRAM OF DIFFERENT PMC TYPE. * NORMAL END * D _PROGOPT -DRAM UNMATCH * PARITY UNMATCH * CASSETTE SIZE = XXXX * ROM COUNT = XXXX Content8

L:W4101 L:W4102 L:W4200 L:W4201 L:W4202 L:W4203 L:W4204

I
Restoring program PMC type and system PMC type is I same. Processing ended normally. The DRAM does not match. The parity does not match. Cassette size = xxxx ROM count = xxxx

~~~~I~~;~~IE~~~YT&THE L:W4206 L:W4207 * ADJUST OBJECT FILE SIZE TO ROM COUNT SIZE * ADD OBJECT FILE SIZE (XXXX BYTE)

j The last 120h bytes of the ROM file have been deleted.
The ROM count is appropriate for the object file size. The object file size has been increased by xxxx bytes.

-284-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

5.13 N : ON-LINE MONITOR

5.13.1 Error
Number N:E-3001 N:E-3003 Message FLASH ROM WRITE ERROR FLASH ROM ERASE ERROR The F-ROM is faulty. Replace the F-ROM. Contact FANUC Service. The size of the sequence program is greater than that of F-ROM. Increase the size of F-ROM. Try using the off-fine CONDENSE function. The CNC is not in emergency stop status. Set the CNC to emergency stop status. The PMC sequence program has failed. Input the sequence program again. The sequence program is too large to be written to the PMC. Check the size of the sequence program. When the PMC control module type is RAl , on-line editing cannot be performed. The size of the sequence program exceeds the option-specified size. Reduce the size of the sequence program. The PMC type is invalid. Convert the machine model using the off-line function. The ladder step number option does not exist. Communication with the PMC has not been established. Start communication with the PMC. Processing cannot be continued because of a PMC alarm. Clear the cause of the PMC alarm. The ladder program being edited is too large to be written to the PMC. Reduce the size of the ladder program. The program being edited does not match that of the PMC. Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC program. Processing cannot be continued because a PMC alarm is issued. Check whether the ladder data being edited is valid. The program being edited does not match that of the PMC. Load, store, or restore the program such that it matches the PMC program. An invalid value has been entered. Enter a valid value. The sequence program is full. Reduce the size of the ladder program. The usage of the COM (SUBS) functional instruction is invalid. Check whether the usage of COM and COME (SUB29) is valid. The usage of the JMP (SUBlO) functional instruction is invalid. Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUBBO) is valid. Contents

N:E-3006

FLASH ROM SIZE ERROR

N:E-3007 N:E-3008 N:E-3030 N:E-3031 N:E-3036

FLASH ROM NOT EMG STOP ;fz%RROM PROGRAM DATA

LADDER SIZE ERROR PMC CONTROL TYPE BSI (RAl). PROGRAM SIZE ERROR (OPTION). PMC TYPE UNMATCH. NO OPTION (LADDER STEP). THE COMMUNICATION TO PMC IS NOT READY. AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC. LADDER SIZE OVER (PMC) ERROR STATUS = nn THE PROGRAM IS NOT CORRESPONDING (PMC). STATUS=NN AN ALARM OCCURS ON PMC ERROR STATUS = nn LADDER DATA ERROR (PMC) ERROR STATUS = nn INPUT INVALID OBJECT BUFFER OVER COM FUNCTION MISSING

N:E-3037 N:E-3038 N:E-3041 N:E-3042 N:E-3045

N:E-3046

N:E-3947

N:E-3048

N:E-3050 N:E-3051 N:E-3054

N:E-3055

JUMP FUNCTION MISSING

-285-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number N:E-3056

Message END FUNCTION MISSING

Contents The usage of the ENDl, END2, END3. and END functional instructions is invalid. Check whether these instructions have been entered in the correct order. Data cannot be updated because the ladder program has failed. Input the ladder program again. The usage of the CALL and CALLU functional instructions is invalid. Enter these instructions in the second ladder level, or in a subprogram. TheCALLorCALLUfun&malinsbu&nissper%edbetween the COM (SUB9) and COME functionalinstructions. Do not specify CALL or CALLU between COM and COME. Within the subprogram, the usage of the JMP (SUB1 0) functional instruction is invalid. Check whether the usage of JMP and JMPE (SUB30) is valid. The usage of the SP functional instruction is invalid. Check whether the usage of SP and SPE is valid. The specified subprogram number already exists. . Specify another subprogram number. No subprogram exists. Create a subprogram. The END functional instruction does not exist. Enter the END functional instruction. The number of labels exceeds the allowed maximum. Reduce the number of labels. The specified label number is already in use. Specify another label number. The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPB does noi exist. Enter the LBL functional instruction. The JMPB functional instruction is specified between the COM and COME functional instructions. This instruction cannot be used to perform a jump from between COM and COME. Do not insert JMPB between COM and COME. Or, enterthe LBL functional instruction, together with JMPB, betweenI COM and COME. The JMPB inskuctioncannotjump to other than a subprogram. Ensure that it jumps to a subprogram. The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC does noi I exist. Enter the LBL functional instruction. The specified LBL functional instruction is specifiec between COM and COME. This instruction cannot be usec to perform a jump from between COM and COME. Do not insert LBL between COM and COME. Or, enter the JMPC functional instruction, together with LBL. behveer COM and COME. The JMPC functional instruction is specified in other than 2 subprogram. Specify the JMPC functional instruction in a subprogram. The LBL functional instruction specified by JMPC exists ir1 a level other than the second ladder level. Enter the LBL functional instruction in the second ladde r level. -

N:E-3056

LADDER BROKEN

N:E-3660

CALL CALLU FUNCTION MISSING

N:E-3061

COM FUNCTION MISSING (CALLSP) JMP FUNCTION MISSING (SP)

N:E-3062

N:E-3063 N:E-3064 N:E-3065 N:E-3066 N:E-3066 N:E-3069 N:E-3070

SUB PROGRAM MISSING SP NO. DUPLICATE SUB PROGRAM NOTHING END FUNCTION NOTHING LBL COUNT OVER LBL NO. DUPLICATE LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPB)

N:E-3071

COM FUNCTION MISSING (JPMB)

N:E-3072 N:E-3073

JMPB FUNCTION MISSING LBL FUNCTION NOTHING (JMPC)

N:E-3074

COM FUNCTION MISSING (LBL)

N:E-3075

JMPC FUNCTION MISSING

N:E-3076

LBL FUNCTION MISSING (JMPC)

-286

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number N:E-3077 N:E-3080 N:E-3082

Message

Contents The entered symbol is not yet defined. Enter a valid symbol name. The ladder program is invalid. Input the ladder program again. An invalid operation was performed (e.g., an attempt was made to create a relay or coil in a functional instruction). Be careful to specify operations correctly. The number of data tables exceeds the allowed maximum. Reduce the number of data tables. There is no free space in the buffer in which editing can be performed. Reduce the size of the net being edited. An unnecessary relay or coil exists. Delete the unnecessary relay or coil. The specified address is not found. Check the specified address. The horizontal lines of the net are not connected. Connect the horizontal lines. Them is an invalii connectionbetween funckonalinstmcticns. Ensure that the connections between functional instructions are specified correctly. No relay or coil exists. Add a relay or coil. The vertical lines of the net are not connected. Connect the vertical lines. No parameters are specified for a functional instruction. Specify the required parameters. No address is specified. Specify an address. The net being edited exceeds the size of the editing buffer. Reduce the size of the net being edited. The net is too large to be displayed. Reduce the size of the net. An invalid net exists. Correct the invalid net. The specified functional instruction is not found. Check the number of the functional instruction. Search for a functional instruction has been performed using the wrong number. Check the number specified for the functional instruction. The MCARD file cannot be opened. Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Alternatively, the MCARD file may have been destroyed. The symbol file cannot be opened. Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed. The MCARD file cannot be read. The MCARD file may have been destroyed. An error occurred when reading data from extended memory. Memory management may have been disabled. Reboot the personal computer.

SYMBOL UNDEFINE LADDER ILLEGAL ILLEGAL OPERATION

N:E-3084 N:E-3085 N:E-3090 N:E-3691 N:E-3092 N:E3093

DATA TABLE COUNT OVER EDIT BUFFER OVER RELAY OR COIL FORBIT ADDRESS BIT NOTHING HORIZONTAL LINE ILLEGAL FUNCTION LINE ILLEGAL

N:E-3094 N:E-3095 N:E-3096 N:E-3097 N:E-3100 N:E-3102 N:E-3111 N:E-3113 N:E-3114

RELAY OR COIL NOTHING VERTICAL LINE ILLEGAL PARAMETER NOTHING ADDRESS NOT DETECTED NET TOO LARGE LARGE NET APPEARED ERROR NET FOUND FUNCTION NOT FOUND ILLEGAL FUNCTION NO

N:E-3123

ROM FILE OPEN ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn

N:E-3124

SYMBOL FILE OPEN ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn

N:E-3125 N:E-3126

ROM FILE READ ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn ROM FILE READ ERROR (VMEM) ERROR STATUS = nn

-287-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

1 Number

Message

Contents There is insufficient memory to perform writing to the MCARD file. Memory management may have been disabled. Reboot the personal computer. Data cannot be written to the MCARD file. Check the amount of free space available on disk, and the name of the program to be saved. The net comment file cannot be opened. Check whether the program name has been entered correctly. Alternatively, the source program may have been destroyed. There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in conventional memory.

I
IU:E-3131 IU:E-3132

IU:E-3130

ROM FILE WRITE ERROR NOT ENOUGH MEMORY

ROM FILE WRITE ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn NET COMMENT FILE OPEN ERROR ERROR STATUS = nn

IV:E-3140 V:E-3141

FAIL TO ALLOCATE MEMORY FOR DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA. FAIL TO READ FROM PMC DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA.

An error occurred while reading data table control data from the PMC. Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified machine model matches that of the connected PMC. An error occurred while writing data table control data to the PMC. Check the connection with the PMC and whether the specified machine model matches that of the connected PMC. An attempt was made to change a value in a data table group, but that data table group is writ+protected. First, checkwhetherthe correct data table group is specified, then set that data table group to write-enabled status. The specified address is not found. Check whether the address is specified correctly. An attempt was made to update or restore the ladder diagram when it had not been modified. An error occurred in the ladder diagram. The system cannot switch to update or monitor. Correct the error in the diagram. There is insuft icient memory. Reserve an area in conventional There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in conventional memory or on disk.

Y:E-3142

FAIL TO WRITE TO PMC DATA TABLE CONTROL DATA.

N:E-3143

THIS DATA TABLE GROUP IS WRITE-PROTECTED.

N:E-3144 N:E-3150 N:E-3151

ADDRESS NOT FOUND. LADDER DIAGRAM HAS NOT BEEN MODIFIED. AN ERROR OCCURS IN THE LADDER DIAGRAM. TEMPORARY FILE LOAD ERROR. NOT ENOUGH PROGRAM MEMORY PROGRAM READ ERROR. NOTENOUGHPROGRAM MEMORY LADDER DIAGRAM HAS BEEN MODIFIED. ;;K;TF!JHI PROGRAM IS

N:E-3153

N:E-3155

memory.

N:E-3158

The system cannot switch to store or monitor because the ladder diagram has been modified. Update the ladder diagram. The specified program does not match that in the PMC memory. Specify the correct program, or load or store the program such that it matches the PMC memory program. The user has canceled the transfer. If the storing of a program is canceled, the program in PMC memory may be destroyed. Store the program again to load it into the PMC. If program loading is canceled, the program remains as is. If the program does not match that in PMC memory, load or store the program such that it matches the PMC memory program. Communication with the PMC has not yet been established. Set up communication with the PMC. The entered password is invalid. Enter a valid password.

N:E-3160

N:E-3161

TRANSFER WAS ABORTED.

N:E-3162 N:E-3163

NOT CONNECTED TO PMC. CAN NOT TRANSFER PROGRAM. MISMATCH PASSWORD

-288-

5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST

Number N:E-3164

Message TOO LARGE PROGRAM. NOT ENOUGH PMCS PROGRAM MEMORY INVALID PROGRAM NAME. CUT BUFFER SIZE OVER. CUT BUFFER ALLOCATION ERROR. NET COMMENT CUT ERROR (nn).

Contents The size of the specified program exceeds that of the PMC program memory. Check the sizes of the specified program and the PMC program memory. The program name is invalid. Check the program name. The specified range is too great. Specify a narrower range. There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in extended memory, or on disk. memory, conventional

N:E-3167 N:E-3170 N:E-3171

N:E-3172

When nn = 1: There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on disk. When nn = 2: The net comment file contains invalid data. Check the net comments using the off-tine function. Whennn=l: There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on disk. When nn = 2: The net comment file contains invalid data. Check the net comments using the off-line function. Whennn=l: There is insufficient memory. Reserve an area in extended memory, conventional memory, or on disk. When nn = 2: The net comment file contains invalid data. Check the net comments using the off-line function. The net comment file contains erroneous data. Check the net comments using the off-line function. The net comment file contains erroneous data. Check the net comments using the off-tine function. The net comment file contains erroneous data. Check the net comments using the off-line function. The net comment file contains no net comment within the specified range. Check the net comments using the off-line function. - On-line editing function and l/O menu functions are protected. Confirm keep relay. - Data table control data screen is protected. Confinn keep relay. PMC parameter is write protected. Set CNC mode to MDI or emergency stop, or stop the sequence program. PMC parameter is write protected. Set CNC parameter PWE=l , or stop the sequence program. PMC parameter is write protected. Set CNC parameter PWE=l , or set KEY4=1, or stop the sequence program. Signal status is write protected. Confirm keep relay.

N:E-3173

NET COMMENT COPY ERROR (nn).

N:E-3174

NET COMMENT PASTE ERROR (nn).

N:E-3175 N:E-3176 N:E-3177 N:E-3178

NET COMMENT APPEND ERROR. NET COMMENT DELETE ERROR. NET COMMENT DATA WRITE ERROR. NOTHING NET COMMENT DATA.

N:E-3183

THIS FUNCTION IS PROTECTED.

N:E-3184

WRITE PROTECT. (NOT MDI MODE NOR EMERGENCY STOP.) WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE.) WRITE PROTECT. (CHECK PWE AND KEY4.) WRITE PROTECT.

N:E-3185 N:E-3186

N:E-3187

-289-

e
n
a

APPENDIX 1 AUTOMATIC COMPILATION

AND DECOMPILATION

APPENDIX

AUTOMATIC COMPILATION DECOMPILATION

automatic compilation

AND

(1)

Conditions When

for starting

or decompilation from the initial menu, conditions: automatic

[ON-LINE

(SELECTED

PROGRAM)] is performed

has been selected according

compilation

or decompilation

to the following

[Conditions/results] The start conditions are determined from the results program. of companng The conditions below. the time under stamps of the files

CONTOL

and MCARD

files for the source of updating

which

these

are updated

and the results

are described

[File updating 0

conditions] file file is updated once the source program has been modified by using the off-

CONTOL

The CONTOL line editing

function.

MCARD

file file is updated function once the source program has been input by using the off-line from after

The MCARD input/output

(for example,

after being transferred file), or once

from the PMC or converted has been terminated

a memory-card modifying

or Handy-File program

format

processing

the ladder

by using the on-line

function.

[Results] 0 When the CONTOL + Automatic file has the most recent is performed. time stamp

compilation

[Applicable When function etc

cases] no compilation is performed after the program is edited by using the off-line

Q)

When the MCARD + Automatic

file has the most recent is performed.

time stamp

decompilation

[Applicable

cases] is performed function after the ladder program is edited by using the on-line after the program is transferred from the PMC by

When no decompilation using the off-line When function etc processing

input;output is terminated

in)

When both files have the same time stamp * Automatic start processing is not performed.

Al-l

APPENDIX

1 AUTOMATIC

COMPILATION

AND DECOMPILATION

[Applicable cases]

.
.

When comprlation is performed etc

after the program is edited by using the off-line function

(Note)

The options applied to automatic compilation conditions, function. are those specified

or decompilation, OPTION FUNCTION],

started under the above SETTING] of the off-line

with [PROGRAM

Before attempting

to select [ON-LINE

confirm the set options.

For details of how to set options, see Section 4.5.7.

Al

-2

APPENDIX 2 CHANGE OF EACH SETTING FILE

APPENDIX

CHANGE

OF EACH SETTING

FILE

2.1 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION

%%%FLSET.CNF of FAPT LADDER

FILE Oh%% FLSET. CNF.

setting parameters, by which the behavior

is a file of the text form and some is decided, are described there.

The file exits in the directory And the parameters

in which the system

of FAPT LADDER

is installed.

can be changed

by a text editor on the market.

(Note)

%%%FLSET.CNF

contains

the set values correctly,

used to determine described to modify

system

operation.

If data

in this file is not modified performed described correctly. below.

the functions attempt

in this manual

may not be

Do not, therefore,

any data other

than the items

(1) Sample

of %%%FLSET.CNF

;=======================I==============================================

FAPT LADDER Initial Setting File ( 'key word =' <= 9characters ; .============r==============IPI-PIIPrPII============================= ,
; I

lv; .

========

System

information

======E=

ierl=AOBB-9201-J503 Version 01.0; rights=Copyrigth (C) 1991-1995 FANUC LTD.: ======== System Setup ======E lS:
:

editor =* , , ladkey = 1; ;

Text Editor Ladder editing key buffer ( 1 <= ladkey <= 16 ) size

1:Check symbol (level-l) for IEC standard 2:No check

I

lU:

========

Utility

Information

======= Utility Guidance 61 EXE 6 EXE h EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE 6 EXE h EXE 6 EXE

4 = UTILITY; , Fl = DOS / command.com; F2 = flOadat / FLOADAT; F3 = View result / FLVIEW.BAT %p.err; F4 =Linker / i_lipmcr-pf103400b.tbl; F5 =* F6 =I F7 =; F8 =; F9 =* FlO=; : [EOF]

[Fl] Soft Key Guidance [FZ] Soft Key Guidance [F3] Soft Key Guidance [F4] Soft Key Guidance [F5] Soft Key Guidance [F6] Soft Key Guidance [F7] Soft Key Guidance [FE] Soft Key Guidance [F9] Soft Key Guidance [FlO] Soft Key Guidance

A2 - 1

APPENDIX

2 CHANGE

OF EACH SETTING

FILE

(2) Registering

a command in the utility

(a) Function
A tool which is executed initial or off-line menu.= under DOS can be registered in the [UTILITY] function on the

(b)

Key word 11 Utility Information Items F5 = to FlO = are displayed under IJ; For these items, describe the tool to be assigned to each function key. Do not modify is modified, the currently displayed characters, such as V and F5 =. If such a character system does not recognize the assignment.

(c) Format
Tool name displayed on the utility screen to the right of : are assumed to be a comment. w [Fl ] Soft key Guidance & EXE

Characters

Delimiter Function

belween

displayed

name

and command

key to which the tool is assigned

The maximum number of characters registered tool are as follows: . Tool name : 70 characters . Registered tool : 40 characters

which

can

be used

to specify

the

tool

name

and

(or 35 double-byte

characters)

AZ-2

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

APPENDIX
3.1
(1)

CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE

PROGRAM

Differences
Source program

from FAPT LADDER

types three supports source program types: FORMAT-A, type. FORMAT-B, and FORMAT-C,

FAPT LADDER while

supports

FAPT LADDER-II

only the FORMAT-C

I
(Note 1)

Supported model FORMAT-A (I(Note1)

X

source

program

type

FAPT LADDER

FORMAT-B O(Note1)
X

FORMAT-C O(Note1)

FAPT LADDER FAPT LADDER-II

The supported to the relevant

source

program

types manual.

also vary with the PMC model.

For details,

refer

FAPT LADDER

SAMPLE

MANAGEMENT

OF FORMAT-C

FORMAT-C This source program type is used on FAPT LADDER-II. program is organized by below files.

The FORMAT-C

source

c A case of specifying

C: y DATA-Y PRG - C as source

program

>

c: tc
data y PRG Cy Source program managing file System parameter data file Title data file Symbol & Comment data file Message data file l/O Module data file First level ladder data file Second level ladder data file Third level ladder data file Sub-program ladder data file Sub-program step sequence data file Net comment data file Setting of option Memory card format file

-CONTROL SYSPARAM . TITLE XSYMBOL.xxx MESSAGE IOMODULE LEVEL1 .#LA LEVEL2.#LA LEVEL3.#LA Pyyy.#LA Pzzz.#SS NETCMT.xxx OPTION -. MCARD

(Note

1)

(Note 2) (Note 3) (Note 3) (Note 1)

(Notel) (Note2) (Note3)

xxxis
yyy,

number

of multr file managrng. ladder at PMC-RC4RC4(STEP).

Only for use LEVEL3

IZZ is number of sub-program.

A3 - 1

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

FORMAT-A This source The source two or more program program source type is only used on FAPT LADDER. is managed programs. using the following names. A single directory can contain

- xxxxxxxx.#CN - xxxxxxxx.#PA - xxxxxxxx.#TA

- xxxxxxxx.#SY
-xxxxxxxx.#c1

: Ftle managtng

user programs parameters

: File storing
: File storing
: File storing

system

: File storing the title data

symbols comments (reserve)

- xxxxxxxx.#C2 - xxxxxxxx.#ME - xxxxxxxx.#l0 - xxxxxxxx.#LA

(xxxxxxxx

: File storing comments : File storing messages

: File storing the I10 module

: File storing ladder

data

is the specified

source

program

name.)

FORMAT-B This source A directory program program is created type is only used on FAPT LADDER. with under the specified source names. program A single name. directory In the cannot directory, contain the two or

is managed programs.

the following

more source

- CONTROL
- SYSPARAM

: Ftle managing
File storing File storing File storing File storing File stonng File storing File storing File storing File storing File storing File storing File storing

the source

program

system

parameters

- TITLE - SYMBOL - COMMENT1 - COMMENT2 - MESSAGE - IOMODULE - LEVEL1 .#LA

LEVEL2.#LA - LEVELX#LA - PYYYYY.#LA - PYYYYY.#SS (yyyyy

the title data symbols comments comments messages the I10 module ladder ladder ladder ladder data (reserve)

of the first level of the second level

of the third level subprograms subprograms

step sequence

IS a subprogram

number.)

143-2

APPENDIX

3 CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE

PROGRAM

(2) Elimination of ROM format files

FAPT LADDER ROM added Some format supports because program. ROM format an object object files. FAPT LADDER-II, however, does format not use file) is files file called an MCARD below. the input of ROM files. format files. FAPT file (memory-card

to the source FAPT

The data flow is outlined procedures require

LADDER however,

operating

LADDER-II.

does not require

the input of ROM format

(a) FAPT LADDER

External CNC

devices

Memory-card Handy-File

format format file

file

0 Compile @ Output (in ROM format)

@ Decompile @I Input (in ROM format)

(b) FAPT LADDER-II

External CNC

devices

Memory-card Handy-File

format format file

file

m Compile (3 Output (In object

format)

@I Decompile @I Input (in object

format)

3.2

Conversion
FAPT

from FAPT LADDER

supports only FORMAT-C before source files and does not support ROM

Because format

LADDER-II

files, the following

files must be converted

they can be used with FAPT LADDER-II.

Source

file of other than the FORMAT-C file

type

ROM format

Programs by applying

developed

for use with FAPT LADDER methods:

can be converted

for use with FAPT LADDER-II,

any of the following

(1) Conversion

to a mnemonic file
program file. can be converted to a FAPT LADDER-II program by first converting

A FAPT LADDER It to a mnemonic

A3-3

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Convert

a program

to a mnemonic

file, using

the FAPT

LADDER

mnemonic

editing

function,

then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(2) Conversion A FAPT converting Convert LADDER.

to a memory-card LADDER program can

format also

file
be converted file. format fde, using [MEMORY CARD] of the FAPT to a FAPT LADDER-If program by first

it to a memory-card a program input/output to

format

a memory-card

function

then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(3) Conversion A FAPT converting Some

to a FORMAT-C LADDER program

source file
can also be converted to a FAPT LADDER-II program by first source support file. FORMAT-C source files. Convert the source file type to

it to a FORMAT-C models

FAPT LADDER

FORMAT-C,

then use that file with FAPT LADDER-II.

(4) Conversion

of a ROM format file

can convert a ROM format file to a memory-card format file, as follows:

FAPT LADDER-II

(a) Operation

Select

[OFF-LINE

FUNCTION]

from

the initial

menu,

then

select

F6 (I/O].

The [l/O]

screen appears.
@ Press the c F9> key on the (I.01 screen. The II/O (ROM FILE)] screen appears.

(Note)

No item corresponding key is, however,

to the < F9>

key is displayed

on the [l/O screen.)

The

<F9>

effective.

(@I Selecttng

F2 [READ]

displays

the

II0

(ROM

FILE

> MCARDI
the file.

screen.

Enter

the

ROM file and rnemory

card file names,

then convert

A3-4

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Fl

KEY KEY

WRITE ( Menory Card -> ROM FORMAT FILE 1

RERO ! Uemory Card c- ROM FORMfllFILE 1

F2

Fig. 6.3.2 (a)

3.3 Convert the PMC Type of Sequence

By changing another the mnemonic file, it is possible

Program
some PMC type sequence program to

to convert

type of it.

3.3.1

Converting by system parameter

PMC type, it IS possible data. parameter. usable

editing
PMC type data by changing system

On the following parameter However, different.

to edit the different

of the mnemonrc format

of the system

functional

instructions

and range

of address

are

CNC TYPE

PMC TYPE

Power

Mate-MODEL B

PMC-PA1 IPA3 PMC-NB/NB2

FS IS-MODEL

[Example:

PMC-RB

+ PMCRC3] and convert the original source program to mnemonic file.

(1) Set the PMC type to PMC-RB (2) Change (3) Set the the system PMC type parameter to

of the mnemonic on FAPT

file to PMC-RC3 LADDER system

with a standard and convert

text editor. the mnemonic

PMC-RC3

frle( -+(2)) to source

program.

A3 - 5

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Original %@A %@O

file (PMC-RB)

Converted %@A %@O Change system 1

file (PMCRC3)

2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC-RB 7 100 9 YES % %@l 01 ABC-KIKAI 02 S-DRILL

2 BCD
parameter 3 NO

4 PMC-RC3 5 000000 6 50 7 100 % %@l 01 ABC-KIKAI 02 S-DRILL

% %@5 x000 1 YO08 1 % %@E 0 0 1 ID16C 4 OD32A % %@5 x000 1 YO08 1 % %@E 0 0 1 IDlCC 4 OD32A

3.3.2

Convert with signal address converter

CONVERTER FILE NAME FSOT CNV.SYM

APPLICABLE PMC-LjMIM(MMC) (FSO-T)

PMCCNC

TYPE

REFERENCE FANUC PMC

MATERIALS

-+ PMCRAlIRA2IRAYRB lRB2/RB3RB4RB5 RBG/RC/RC3/RC4 (FS16118/20-T) + PMCRAlRA2IRA3IRB lRB2/RB3/RB4/RB51 RBG/RCRC3/RC4 (FS16/18/20-M)

PROGRAMMING (LADDER

MANUAL

LANGUAGE) B-61 863E

FSnM

CNV.SYM

PMC-LMIM(MMC) (FSO-M)

PM-C - CNV.SYM

PMC-P (Power Mate -MODEL C)

PAliPA3 (Power Mate DFH)

-MODEL

(Note)
5).

The converter

file is stored

in the drrectory

APPENDIX

of module

system

floppy

disk (Vol.

A3-6

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

[Example:

PMC-P -+ PMC-PA

(1) Set PMC type to PMC-P. and convert the original source program to the mnemonic file. (+A.) (2) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl. And input the source program name and select [END] at edit
mode without editing the ladder program.

(3) Convert the source program(2) to the mnemonic file. (-+B.)

(4) Quit FAPT LADDER. and actrvate any standard text editor. to the converter file (Select the mnemonic file name(3) to edit.) (5) Replace the symbol and comment data of the mnemonic file (PMC-PAl) (PM-CCNV). (6) Replace (-C.) file (PMC-PAl) LADDER. to the ladder data of the original (+D.) and convert the mnemonic file(5) to source program. the ladder data of mnemonic

mnemonic file (PMC-P).

(7) Complete the text editor, and activate FAPT (8) Set PMC type to PMC-PAl.

(9) Select edit mode, and delete the symbol and comment data. Convert file PM-C - CNV.SYM %@2 A. Original file (PMC-P) %@A %@O

G0004.3 G0005.0 60005.2 60005.3 60005.6 G0006.2 G0006.4 G0007.2 60007.5

G68.3 G95.0 G95.2 G95.3 683.7 G75.2 G74.4 668.2 684.5

%@A %@O 2 BINARY B. Converted file (PMC-PAl)

1 2048
% %@l % %@2 % %@3 RD X21.4

3 NO 4 PMC-PA1 X1027.4 X1027.5 X1027.6 X1027.7 %

D. insertron

X23.4 X23.5 X23.6 X23.7

% %@l % %@2 % %@3 c % %@4 % %@5 % b@E ,

WRT 6121.4 RD.NOT X22.3 WRT.NOT 6122.3 SUB 1 SUB 2 WRT G121.4 RD.NOT WRT.NOT SUB 1 SUB 2 b b@E X22.3 6122.3

A3-7

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.3.3
Data

Using data in a sequence

(such as title, symbol 8 comment, sequence

program for another program

ladder, message, and 110 module method. data) in a sequence

program

can be used for another

program,

by the following

The range

of addresses

used varies manual

from one model

to another.

They

may have

to be modified.

Refer to the programming

of the respective

models.

[Example

: Using the symbols

& comment

data of the PMC-FIB for the PMC-RC3]

%@A %@O 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC-RB 7 100 9 YES %

%@l

%@A %@O 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC-RC3 5 000000 6 50 7 100 9 YES % %@l

%@2 x000.0

x000.1
%

2PX.M 2PY.M ;I--

Insert

%@2 x000.0 x000.1

ZPX.M ZPY.M

%
%@E

Converting

a step sequence

program

according

to the model

Usually, However, converted

mnemonics

are used to convert

a ladder

program

according program

to the model. for the PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ) is

a ROM ftle is used only when a step sequence for the PMCRC4(STEP by which the source SEC). program is described

The operation, program

C: f DATA Y SAMPLER6 as follows.

is converted

to the source

C: Y DATA f SAMPLERC.

[Procedure] Compile the step sequence a object file. program C: f DATAY SAMPLERB for PMC-RB4 (STEP SEQ)

and create

(Create

C: Y DATAY

SAMPLERB.

MEM)

Create

the new source

program

C: Y DATA?

SAMPLERC.

The name of object

file, which is creattng

by (1.1, is change

as follows

from command

line.

C: y > RENAME

C: -Y DATA Y SAMPLERB

C: Y DATA Y SAMPLERC

A3-8

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

(;ii

Select

C: 7 DATA SLSAMPLERC

from the select

source

program

screen.

Select

F4 (DECOMPILE)

from the offline

menu.

The program

is converted. SEQ).

The step sequence

program

read into FAPT LADDER

can be used for

the PMCRC4(STEP

3.3.4

Convert step sequence

a ladder program,

program from/to another PMC type

file is genelally PMCRC4 (STEP used. SEQ), But for converting an object a step

For converting sequence

a mnimonic

program:

PMC-RB4 of converting

(STEP SEQ) + operation,

file is suitable.

This is the example from to source source

program program

C: Y DATAY

SAMPLERB

: PMC-RB4 : PMCRC4

(STEP

SEQ)

C: Y DATA Y SAMPLERC

(STEP SEQ).

[Operation

]
the step sequence program C: Y DATAY SAMPLERB and generate the object file. MEM is generated.)

Compile

(C: Y DATA y SAMPLERB.

Make new source

program,

C: Y DATAY

SAMPLERC.

(Set PMC type to PMC-RC4

(STEP SEQ).)

01

Change

the object

file name @ as DOS prompt C: M DATAY SAMPLERB

as below. C: Y DATAY SAMPLE%

1C: v > RENAME

Select

C: Y DATAY

SAMPLERC

at Program

selection.

@J Select

F4 key (Decompile).

And the step SEQ.

sequence

program

C:Y DATAY

SAMPLERC

is now

available

for PMC-RC4

(STEP

3.4 3.4.1

Transfer From P-G Function for Transferring

is used to transfer data

Data between the P-G and PC

in ASCII cable. (mnemonic) [FLOADAT] format between a P-G (including the

This function

Mate and Mark II) and a PC via an RS232

is for IBM PC/AT.

A3-9

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.4.1.1

Command input during startup

(1) Uploading
Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the PC from the P-G via the RS232 port.

FLOADAT

[name

of file for storing

uploaded

data]

-u (for IBM PC/AT)

When current

a file with the same directory.

name

as the file specified is displayed.

for receiving

data

already

exists

in the

the following

message

File is exist.

Over write?

<Y/N >

(2)

Downloading Loads the FAPT LADDER mnemonic data into the P-G from the PC via the RS232 port.

I
FLOADAT _ [name of file for storing downloaded data] _ -d (for IBM PC/AT)

As shown

above,

the load commands

have the following

two parameters:

-u: Uploads

data from the P-G to the PC. data from the PC to the P-G.

-d: Downloads

(Note) 3.4.1.2
PC side

The above

parameters

can be specified

with either

lowercase

or uppercase

characters.

Communications

settings

IBM PCAT

senes command)

MODE MODE

COMl: COMl:

4800,E.7,2 9600,E,7.2 (for 9600 baud)

(PC DOS MODE P-G side IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG

IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG,BRlO

(for 9600 baud)

(Note 1)

The baud

rate can be set to either

4800

or 9600. BRlO

However,

note

that when

the PC

baud rate is set to 9600. for the P-G.

the parameter

must be added

to the baud rate setting

(Note 2)

It is necessary using this

to set these communications please restore the

setting

only for doing this operation. settings as the section

After 2.1

function, 1).

communications

(Chapter The CN number CNl to CN4.

is not fixed.

For the P-G or P-G Mark the CN number

II, the CN number

can be any setting to CN3.

from

For the P-G Mate, selected 8.

can be any setting the CN number

from CNl

However, Use the

note that the CN number cables specified

here must match

of the IO command.

in Appendix

A3-10

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

Operation example During uploading

OperalIon procedure Example of input and screen contents

-z PC > < PG z= Turn on power. < PG > Enter IO command < PC > IBM PC/AT Series: settings. Enter MODE command < PG > Store transmission settings. ; i IO NC,CNl,Fl,FG(,BRlO) (See Section Settings) Press the [F2] key to select no.2. menu item 2 of Communications

i : : ;

data in P-G memory.

FLOADAT

FILENAME

-u is displayed.

< PC > Execute

FLOADAT.

Enters waiting

slate.

: < PC > !

LOADER

START

< PG > Set [F6] ON.

Select

no.4 on the menu.

< PG > Select any entry from 1 to 7 on the

submenu. Beglns transmission. Zompletes transmission. to the menu. Operation Complete is HIT

; < PG >

EXECUTING

is displayed.

-z PG > Returns

i < PC > Operation j j :

Complete

is displayed.

< PC > The message displayed, ANY KEY.

HIT ANY KEY is displayed.

followed

by the prompt

Hit any key to end operation.

During

downloading Example of input and screen contents

Operation

procedure

c PC > < PG > Turn on power. c PG > Enter IO command -z PC > IBM PC/AT series command setting key. Select no.2 on the settings.

;
i

IO NC,CNl

,(BRlO,)Fl

,F6

: Enter MODE

(See Section

2 of Communications

_ Settings) i c PG > EXECUTING

is displayed.

<PG > Turn on [Fl] menu. c PC > Execute Enters

waiting

state.

FLOADAT.

;
3egins transmission. transmission. to the menu. Operation Complete IS HIT

FLOADAT

FILENAME Start

-d is displayed.

: -c PC > Output

Zompletes

< PG > Returns

-z PC > The message displayed, ANY KEY.

-ZPC > Operation j

Complete

is displayed.

followed

by the prompt

HIT ANY KEY

is displayed.

Hit any key to end operation.

A3-11

APPENDIX

3 CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE

PROGRAM

3.4.1.3
Durinq

Protocol
uploadinq the FLOADAT command is executed begins. on the PC side, a communications received, request is

When issued

for the P-G and reception is completed.

After all data has been

DC 3 is sent and

transmission

0 0

DC 1 code is sent to the P-G (data transmlssion Data is received. code is received and reception

request).

(Z$J Completion @

is completed.

DC 3 code is sent.

Transmisston output.

and reception

both

use the

l-byte

machlne-dependent

BIOS

call for input

and

Durinq

downloading the P-G issues a transmission request, begins. the P-G enters the waiting state. FLOADAT is

After

activated

in the PC, then transmission is completed.

After all data has been

sent,

DC 4 is sent and

transmission

The P-G issues DC 1. DC 2 code is sent to the P-G Data is sent. is sent.

8
0

@I DC 4 code

Transmlsslon output.

and reception

both

use the

l-byte

machine-dependent

BIOS

call for input

and

3.4.1.4
When issuing effectively

BUSY control
the transmtsslon the DC 1 and speed is faster than In the reception processing, series, BUSY there control is performed by

DC 3 codes.

IBM PC/AT

is no X parameter,

which

has the same resull.

A3-12

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.4.1.5

Data start and end codes

WIII automatrcally When none determine codes which are of the following an error seven message pairs of start and end codes is displayed and operation

The system is used. terminates.

of these

used,

(Note)
shown

The end codes here must appear of a line. strictly at In

the beginning other words,

speaking,

a data reception actually sequence code. denoted

end code is by the

CR + LF + an end (% etc.)

End codes

appearing are ignored.

within comments

3.4.1.6

Data conversion (return codes)

it is converted into two characters, the first of which is CR

(1) When an LF code (OAH) is received, (ODH) followed by LF (OAH).

(2) When a CR code

(ODH) IS recerved,

it is discarded.

(3) When an end code (DE) IS received,

CR (ODH) and LF (OAH) are appended

to it in that order.

3.4.1.7

Transmission

and receive data

data is discarded.

Until a data start code (DS) is received,

Discarded

Valid data -

After the end code downloading,

(DE) has been

sent or received,

DC 3 is sent for uploading

or DC 4 is sent for

then the file is closed.

A3-13

APPENDIX 3 CONVERSION OF SEQUENCE PROGRAM

3.4.1.8

Error detection and messages

detects the following four types of errors.

This software

(1)

When there is an error in the command Error in the file name, Parameter FLOADAT Error FILENAME -u. or -d.

line

-u/-d set parameter.

(FILNAME,

upload

or download.)

(2)

When the specified Output file cannot

file cannot be found file

be found cannot be opened.

or file for receiving

Cannot

open output

(3) When data not in the FAPT LADDER Wrong data received

format

is sent or received

(4) When there is a definite

problem

with the start code,

Start Code error detected or there is a definite problem with the end code

End code error detected

This software This software

only detects

errors

in the command detection of errors

line and in the FAPT LADDER in the contents

format. data.

does not support

of FAPT LADDER

Messaqes

When

the file name message

specified

as the file for receivrng

data already

exists

in the current

directory,

the following

is displayed. Over write? <YIN >

File is exist.

A3 - 14

APPENDIX

3 CONVERSION

OF SEQUENCE

PROGRAM

3.4.1.9
1.

Error detection and handling

entry found in the command line.

Incorrect

2.

Specified

file cannot

be opened.

3.

Data

not in the FAPT

LADDER

format

was sent

or received.

The followrng

causes

can be considered

for the above

errors:

l l l l l

The end code has been omitted The start code has been omitted Garbage Garbage data exists data exists

(% or %@E was omitted). (%@, where

l

is A or 0 to 5. was omitted)

at the beginning between

of the file.

each unit of data. different from the FAPT LADDER format.

The file format

is completely

When any of the above

errors

is detected,

the current

operation

is canceled.

During screen. menu

downloadrng,

if an error

is detected

on the

PC, the

system

will return

to the

DOS

At the same time, screen.

a %, %@E

or other

end code

is sent to the P-G to return

rt to the

4. Others

When,

for some reason,

data transfer

is interrupted during operation, etc.)

(When the power

to the PC or P-G is interrupted

When

data

transfer

is interrupted

during

uploadrng,

the system state, press the

will enter -z CTRL >

a waiting + <C >). corrupt

state

until

data transfer When transfer data

is restarted. transfer

(To interrupt

the waiting

is Interrupted

during

downloading,

data

becomes

and

data

must be started

over from the beginning.

A3-15

APPENDIX

4 STANDARD

SYMBOL

DATA

APPENDIX
When a mnemonic standard symbol

STANDARD
file and the standard

SYMBOL
symbol

DATA
it is possible to use the

data are combined,

name provided

by FANUC.

CNC TYPE FS16/18-T FS16/18-M Power Power Mate-MODEL Mate-MODEL D H

DATA FILE NAME F16&F18-T.SYM FiG&F18-M.SYM PM-D.SYM PM-H.SYM

(Note)

The standard

symbol

data is stored

in the directory

APPENDIX

of system

floppy

(Vol. 5).

A4-1

APPENDIX

5 TOOL

FOR CHANGING

MESSAGE

DATA (CHGMES)

APPENDIX
This function

5 TOOL FOR CHANGING

is a tool(CHGMES) PMCs for easy changing

MESSAGE
the message

DATA (CHGMES)
data incorporating sequence

program

of FANUC

.
data from Handy can be replaced file format file. data, if both message data with this extracted

This tool extracts The message

only message

data in CNC(PMC)

size are the same. This tool is usefull when it is necessary example: Supporting multi-lingual to use some message data files in one ladder program.(For

message.)

< Method

of Message

size Check > IS output when the source program is compiled. ladder and the ladder for

(1)

Memory Please changing

map information check each

symbol

top address

of the original

changing

to be the same value. for changrng the same check the message data execute data size. with the compare file, then this tool

(2)

This tool execute

of the message

<Applied

PMCs > PMC-MODEL RA3RB3RB4!RB5/RB6RC3/RC4INB/NB2

FANUC

1.
(1

PROCEDURE

OF THE MESSAGE
ladder file of handy operation with the

DATA CHANGING
to the NC by using the.memory card or

Load the basic message floppy

file format ([l/O] message

disk on the PMC input/output command

screen). data for changing and dummy ladder

(2) Input the CHGMES

file(handy file format). (3) The message input/output

data on the NC is changed operation

by loadtng

the output

file of this tool on the PMC

(I l/O] screen).

2.

OPERATING

ENVIRONMENT
operating environment for this tool.

It IS necessary

to use following

(1)

Memory 235Kbytes LADDER. or more main memory is required when activating this function without FAPT

(2)

Temporary

files generates following variable temporary TMP files files for work area on the drive/directory which

This function

is set by environmental This function generate variable

of PC-DOS. on the route directory of current drive when

temporary IMP

environmental It is necessary $TMPD.T*, (These

is not set. disk space for these temporary files.

to free max.65KBytes $TMPW.T* files are deleted

(n=oo-99) by this functron automatically.)

temporary

A5 - 1

APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

(3) Hard disk It is necessary

l l

to use following

disk space. 68KBytes

For installation To generate temporary files variable TMP

65KBytes

(In case of environmental of PC-DOS

set on hard disk)

TOTAL

133KBytes

3.

INSTALLATION
copy EXE-FILE (_CHGMES.EXE) to any directory from FAPT LADDER system floppy

Please

disk(Vol.3). Key in * CHGMES on the Installed directory, then following files are generated.

CHGMESEXE RB3DtJMMY.SFM. Example command. files(.SFM)

. ASC2lMG.EXE
RB3BASIC.SFM are used to confirm

. IMG2ASC.EXE . RB3MES.SFM
the installation

: :

Execute example

files (. EXE) files(.SFM) by activating example

of this function

4.

ACTIVATION
command at the DOS prompt activated in the utility.(No.9 of FAPT LADDER main

Key in following menu). Or,Please change

the directory to change command.

in whrch this tool is installed. the directory when the PATH is set.)

(It is not necessary Then key in followrng

CHGMES

[INPUT

FILE j

[OUTPUT

FILE]

[PMC TYPE]

( [COMPARE
of a dummy

FILE] ) ladder

<return >
and message file. to a handy file data

INPUT FILE

: : A handy file format file that consists

to replace Create format the message this file by compiling

data in the basic message the source

ladder

file and converting

file using FAPT LADDER. file created data. data in the CNC memory can be by this tool.

OUTPUT

FILE

: : A handy file format message

This file contains By loading substituted.

only message

this file to the CNC, message

PMC TYPE

: : PMC TYPE (RAl

Please

or RAZ or RA3...etc.) c Applied PMCs. PMCs > item.

key in PMC TYPE that is defined

Error will occur at key in other COMPARE (Optional) FILE : : Basic message Please This ladder

than applied file format) outline. size of

file (Handy

refer to the Fig.Operation tool compares FILE that only to message determine the message

the

INPUT

FILE Then, replaced

and you

the can

COMPARE guarantee crashing

if there will be

is a match. correctry

without

other data when you load the OUTPUT

FILE to CNC.

A5-2

APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

< Outline

of Operation

> Message Generation, Editing -+ VI for changing + Dummy ladder

Basic message VI

ladder t

+ COMPILATION

Check the SYMBOL address by memory display.

top map

INPUT/OUTPUT

(F4:FLOPPY

CASSETTE

Handy

File)

FLOPPY

lb
CNC
Loading

shanging 1 CHGMES %l

to message [In. file]

ROM data(Using

[Out. file] 1x2

this function) 1 (pmc type] ([Camp. file]) %3 MEMORY CARD

(Note)

x2

FLOPPY

El:
FS15-B Please

(Note) I Only message data for changing of ROM file

at [l/O)screen

operation

of PMC.

(Note)

It is possible

to load

by memory

card

only

for FSlG-B,

FS18-B,

FS-20,

FS21-B,

and

(PMC-NB). refer to the following manual about detailed operation of loading by the memory

card or handy FANUC

file. It is not possible

to load on boot screen.

PMC MODEL

PAl/PAYRAl!RA2.!RA3/RBiRB2/RB4iRCiRC3/RC4/NB (LADDER LANGUAGE) (B-61863E/06)

PROGRAMMING

MANUAL

A5-3

APPENDIX

5 TOOL

FOR CHANGING

MESSAGE

DATA (CHGMES)

5.
Check

USING EXAMPLE
the installation of this function by using the following system example. disk for checking this function.

There are some

sample

files in FAPT LADDER

floppy

RB3DUMMY.SFM

: : : : : :

Message (Message

data and dummy

ladder

file (Handy

file format)

data (50KB) + Ladder ladder file (Handy

(END1 + ENDZ)) file format) data)

RB3BASIC.SFM

Basic message (Message

data (50KB) + Ladder the result output

data + Symbol&Comment data(5OKB)) this tool

RB3MES.SFM

Data for checking (This sample FILE

(Message file,

file is a normal data.

when

execute

for above OUTPUT

It is possible

to check

result

by comparing

and this file.) as the following (In this case the system is installed in marn

Execute body.)

(1

Please

key in the following

command. USERTEST.SFM FILE.ln RB3 RB3BASIC.SFM < return > is used.

A: Iy > CHGMES You can specify

RB3DUMMYSFM any name

for OUTPUT

this example,USERTEST.SFM

(2) Following

file is generated

on current (Message

drive.

USERTEST.SFM

data (50KB))

(3) Check If NO

the result by using FC/A(PC-DOS USERTEST.SFM ENCOUNTERED

COMMAND).

A: M > FC/A

RB3MES.SFM IS drsplayed. the result is correct.

DIFFERENCES

6.

ERROR MESSAGES
Message Meaning (pmc type) and countermeasure between applied

chgmes

: PMC type unmstch

PMC type does not match PMCs.

chgmes

: PMC type unmatch

(input file)

PMC type of input file and key in PMC type do not match.

chgmes

: PMC type unmatch

(compare

file)

PMC type of compare type do not match.

file and key in PMC

chgmes (compare

: Message

sizes of (input file) and

Message not agree. adding

size of input file and compare Please adjust the message

file do size by

ftle) are mismatched

some dummy confirm

message

to the input on the

file. Please compile chgmes

the MAP display

function

of FAPT LADDER. does not exist in the same

: Cannot

start ASC2lMG

ASC2lMG.EXE directory

of CHGMES.EXE.

A5-4

APPENDIX 5 TOOL FOR CHANGING MESSAGE DATA (CHGMES)

Message chgmes

Meaning IMG2ASC.EXE directory

and countermeasure does not exist in the same

: Cannol

start IMG2ASC

of CHGMES.EXE. to make temporary file.

chgmes $tmpd.t chgmes $tmwd.t chgmes

: Cannot : Cannot

make temporary

file

It is impossible

Disk is insufficient. make temporary file

. It is impossible
$tmp.tOO

to set the file name, exist.

because

-$tmp.t99

: Cannot

close file $tmpd

(w).t

Temporary Please

file can not be closed. the dtsk space. Please free up 235KB

check

asc2img

: Cannot

allocate

memory

(bytes)

Memory

is insufficient.

or more memory, asc2img conflicted asc2img

and re-activate.

: Conversion

area in Input is

Ladder Please

header re-make

of the input file is crushed. the input file, and re-activate. Please change

: Unknown

file type

Illegal format the format,

of the Input file. and re-activate.

asc2img

: (input file) : Record

No.*

has

There Please

is an invalid correct

data of input file. and

as error message,

reactivate. asc2lmg asc2img

: Cannot : Cannot

open file close file

There

is no input file. to close the file. the disk space. to write the temporary the disk space. Please free up 235KB file.

It is impossible Please check

asc2img

: Cannot

wnte

It is impossible Please check

Img2asc

: Cannot

allocate

memory

(bytes)

Memory

is insufficient.

or more memory, img2asc

and re-activate. to write the output file.

: Cannot

wrote

It IS impossible Please check

the disk space.

A5-5

APPENDIX 6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMC-RAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

APPENDIX

6 MEMORY CARD COMPATIBILITY (FOR THE PMGRAl/RA3, NB, AND QC)

programmer operating on an upgraded program edition is used to output a sequence

If a CNC or off-line program to a memory operating

card, the sequence on an earlier edition

may not be able to be Input to a CNC or off-line

programmer

(see below).

Series

4080. edition

06 A08B-XXXX-J503. editions 01.1 and later

/ /
I I , I

, I

.&

,
:
,. .,

-,

II .,

Series Series Series

4080, editron 04 4047, edition 01 4054, edition 01 CNC

: Operating

on an upgraded

edrtion -f+ -- - - - -) : Unconditionally possible some condition

: Possible

under

: Operating

on an earlier

edition

Cases

ii) and (5) where

input.output

is possible

under some

condition,

are explained

below.

Cases 0) and (?! output Input : No special operatton IS required. to enter a sequence program

Use the BOOT SYSTEM

A6-1

APPENDIX

7 CAUTIONS

FOR USING THE O/S

APPENDIX

7 CAUTIONS

FOR USING THE O/S

(1) Windows 3.1 0 SMARTDRV.EXE

When SMARTDRV.EXE Enable write caching is used with write caching enabled, pay attention to the following: SMARTDRV.EXE

Be

careful

especially

when

the

AUTOEXEC.BAT

contains

command

line

of

SMARTDRV.EXE.

Wwtoml
When SMARTDRV.EXE
l

is used with write caching alarm occurs

enabled,

the following

symptom writer,

occurs. disabling

The following entry.

during a read from the PMC or FA/PMC

Alarm message

Received OVERRUN

data Invalid

(for the PC-9801) (for the IBM/PC and compatible)

[Measure] When SMARTDRV.EXE is used, disable write caching for the following disk drives:

a.
b.

Drive where Drive where

the FAPT LADDER ROM format

system

exists

files are created

Example)

When the FAPT LADDER created on drive B a b +

system

is on drive

A, and a ROM format

file is to be

SMARTDRV

disable

write caching

for drives

A and B

Refer

to the Microsoft

Windows

3.1 Function

Guide,

supplied

from

Microsoft,

for detailed

descriptions

about how to use SMARTDRV.EXE.

A7 - 1

APPENDIX

DATA TRANSFER

CABLES

APPENDIX
Use the cables

8 DATA TRANSFER
below to transfer

CABLES
ROM writer (FA writer or PMC writer),

data from a PC to a CNC,

or P-G (P-G Mark II or P-G Mate).

1.

For IBM PC/AT IBM PC/AT

25-pin female connector IBM PC/AT cable CNC, ROM writer, or P-G

2.

For IBM PSI2 IBM PS!2

CNC, ROM wnter,

or P-G

A8 - 1

APPENDIX

DATA TRANSFER

CABLES

On-line

cable

(AO8B-0031-K8OllK802)

2 SD RD 4

2 SD RD 4

RS
25-pin male connector cs ER DR CD

RS 5 cs 20 25-pin male connector

20

ER DR CD
7 7

SG
1 FG
1

SG FG

IBM PC/AT cable

1 CD 2 RD 3 SD g-pin female connector 4 ER 5

CD
3 RD 2 SD 20 ER 7 SG 6 6 DR 7 4 RS 8 5 cs 9 22 Cl 25-pin female connector

SG
OR RS

cs
Cl

A8-2

APPENDIX

INQUIRY

FORM

APPENDIX
Companv Person Address name in charqe

INQUIRY FORM
Section Phone Fax No. FANUC sales person No.

( (

1 )

No.
1 2 3 4

Product

name

Ordering

code

Version No.

Date of purchase

[Usage Machine DOS

environment] type used (PC) Version Yes (printer, I No etc.) and AUTOEXEC.BAT (Manufacturer: (Manufacturer: (Manufacturer: (Manufacturer: files on a sheet and attach it to this form. 1 1 1

MS-DOS

EMS board: Other equipment Please IDetails

print out the CONFIG.SYS of inquiry]

Please

use this form when you have any questlons

about

this product.

A9-1

Revision FAPT LADDER-II

Record MANUAL (Eb66184EN)

OPERATORS

. 456.6

f 4.5.10
02 Apri. 96 4.6.3.2 4.6.4.7

Backup of user pro ram IS added Selecttng On-Line ? unction from Off-Line Functton IS added Selecting Off-Line Function from On-Line Function IS added Displaylng System InformatIon is added

01

Jan. 96

Edition

Date

Contents

Edition

Date

Contents

EUROPEAN

HEADQUARTERS

- GRAND-DUCHk

DE LUXEMBOURG

GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. Zone Industrielle L6469 Echternach 4 (+352) 727979- 1 I (+352) 727979-214 BELGIUM / NETHERLANDS GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. - Netherlands Branch Postbus 7230 - NL.4800 GE Breda Minervum 1603A - NL.4817 ZL Breda 4 (+31) 765783 201 (CNC) = (+31) 765783 212 (PLC) I (+31) 765870 181 FRANCE GE Fanuc Automation France S.A. 45, rue du Bois Chaland Lisses F-91 029 Evry Cedex = (+33) 1 69 89 70 39 (CNC) 4 (+33) 1 69 89 70 20 (PLC) I (+33) 1 69 89 70 49 GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Elberfelder Str. 45 D-40724 Hilden 4 (+49) 2103 87011 (Laser/CNC) = (+49) 2103 240 415 (PLC) I (+49) 2103 87 160 (Laser/CNC) I (+49) 2103 242 153 (PLC) GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation Deutschland Bensheimer Str. 61 D-65428 Russelsheim 4 (+49) 6142 357600 I (+49) 6142 357611 GmbH CZECH REPUBLIC GE Fanuc Automation Europe S.A. c/o GETSCO Inc. Husova 5 CZ-110 00 Praha 1 = (+420) 22440 1284 I (+420) 22440 1284 GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Bernhauser StraBe 45 D-73765 Neuhausen = (+49) 7158 187 I (+49) 7158 187 455 I (+49) 7158 187 466 a.d.F 400 (CNC) (PLC)

GERMANY GE Fanuc Automation GmbH Otto-Schmerbach-Str. 20 D-091 17 Chemnitz = (+49) 371 8448 113 (CNC) = (+49) 371 8448 114 (PLC) I (+49) 371 8448 115 SWEDEN GE Fanuc Automation Nordic AB Hammarbacken 4 S-l 9149 Sollentuna 4 (+46) 8 444 5520 I (+46) 8 444 552 1 ITALY GE Power Controls Italia S.p.a Via Tortona 27 I-201 44 Milan0 = (+39) 2 4242 280 (PLC) I (+39) 2 4242 511 (PLC) SPAIN GE Power Controls Iberica S.A. Calle Mifio, S/N E-08223 Terrassa (Barcelona) = (+34) 3 736 58 28 (PLC) I (+34) 3 783 45 82 (PLC) UNITED KINGDOM GE Fanuc Automation (UK) Ltd. Unit 1 - Mill Square Featherstone Road Wolverton Mill South Milton Keynes MK12 5BZ = (+44) 1908 84 4000 I (+44) 1908 84 4001
01/98

ITALY GE Fanuc Automation Italia S.r.1. Piazza Tirana 24/4B I-201 44 Milan0 4 (+39) 2 417 176 (CNC) I (+39) 2 419 669 (CNC) SPAIN GE Fanuc Automation Espana S.A. Poligono Industrial Olaso Calle Olaso, 57 - Locales 10 y 11 E-20870 Elgoibar = (+34) 43 744 450 (CNC) I (+34) 43 744 421 (CNC) SWITZERLAND GE Fanuc Automation Suisse/Niederlassung Schweiz MullerstraBe 3 CH-2562 Port (+41) 32 332 87 00 (CNC) (+41) 32 332 87 04 (PLC) (+41) 32 332 87 01 (CNC) (+41) 32 332 87 05 (PLC)

Filiale

4 = I I

TECHNICAL REPORT

No.TMN98/136E
Date Nov.16,1998 General Manager of Software Laboratory

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE OPERATORS MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to: Your information GE Fanuc-N, FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON Machine tool builder Sales agency End user 2. Summary for Sales Documents 3. Notice FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE 4. Attached Document Drawing B-62884EN/01-401/67 to 67/67 No. 5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List) Type of data
No. FLS1-98/B087 November.16.1998

GE Fanuc-E

IDE V.G.M.

Original section of issue Manager

Person in charge

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents Name Spec.No./Ed. FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE OPERATORS MANUAL B-62884EN/01

Summary of Change New, Add, Correct, Delete Applicable Date

Group

Name/Outline Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of WindowsNT4.0 Functional instruction PSGNL and PSGN2 (Only for PMC-SB5/SB6 for Power Mate i-D/H) Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

Basic Function

Add

July.1998 or later

Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts Notice Correction Another

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

1/67

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Contents

1. 2. 3.

Outline.......................................................................................................................................3 Applied Software .......................................................................................................................3 Full screen display of a Command Prompt of Windows NT4.0...................................................4 3.1 Operating Environment.......................................................................................................4 3.2 Installation ..........................................................................................................................5 4. Functional Instruction PSGNL / PSGN2.....................................................................................5 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC ......................................................................................................6 5.1 Outline................................................................................................................................6 5.2 Operating Environment.......................................................................................................6 5.3 The Contents of Package ...................................................................................................7 5.4 Installation and Uninstallation .............................................................................................8 5.5 Operation .........................................................................................................................14

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

2/67

1.

Outline

The following function of Ladder Editing Package has been added. Working under a Command Prompt of a full screen of WindowsNT4.0 Functional instruction PSGNL and PSGN2 (Power Mate iD/H) Ladder Printer Tool for PMC This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other explanation (existign functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items FANUC OPEN CNC B-62884EN Operation for LADDER EDITING PACKAGE Ladder Editing Package OPERATOR'S MANUAL

2.

Applied Software

The additional functions described herein apply to the following software. Ladder Editing Package Name Specification Version Ladder Editing Package A08B-9201-J510 3.0 or later PMC Control Software(Power Mate iD/H ) Software Series PMC-SB5/SB6 control software 407B LADDER EDITING CARD 407D

Version 02(B) or later 01(A) or later

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

3/67

3.

Full screen display of a Command Prompt of Windows NT4.0

3.1 Operating Environment (Correct a part of the 2.1 Operating environment) [present] OS Microsoft Windows95 (Note1) DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/ English system) DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system) [correction] OS Microsoft Windows95 (Note1) Microsoft Windows NT4.0 (Note7) DOS Version 5.0/V or later (to activate Japanese/ English system) DOS Version 5.0 or later (to activate English system) (Add 7. in Notes of 2.1 Operating environment) 7. When using this software under Windows NT4.0, please note the following items. a) Please install the software after referring to 2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows [Programs] menu. b)Please install Service Pack 3 software. Please get this Service Pack3 from Microsoft Corporation. c)Please define ANSI.SYS in the CONFIG file (config.nt) for WindowsNT4.0.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

4/67

3.2 Installation (Correct a part of the 3.2 Installation) [present] 2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95 [Programs] menu. [correction] 2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu.

4.

Functional Instruction PSGNL / PSGN2

It is possible to program the following functional instructions in PMC-SB5/SB6 of Power Mate i-D/H a) PSGNL functional instruction (Position signal output) b) PSGN2 functional instruction (Position signal output 2)

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

5/67

5.

Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

5.1 Outline (Add after 4. Error message list) 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC 5.1 Outline Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is a print software of a sequence program which works under Windows95/NT4.0. This software is able to print a source program (FORMAT-C type) by various forms according to the print setting. This software also has preview function. 5.2 Operating Environment (Correct a part of the 2.1 Operating environment) [present] Printer EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines (Note6) [correction] Printer [Print (Off-line function)] EPSON VP1000 and compatible machines (Note6) [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] Printer which can be added by [Printers] of Windows (Note8) (Add 8. in Notes of 2.1 Operating environment) 8. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is an application software for Windows95/NT4.0. For details, refer 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

6/67

5.3 The Contents of Package (Replace the 2.2 The Contents of Package) 2.2 The Contents of Package The Ladder Editing Package is stored in 9 floppy disks listed below. The media size is 3.5 inch 2HD (1.44MB). Please confirm contents. (1) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.1) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-1 (2) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.2) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-2 (3) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.3) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-3 (4) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.4) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-4 (5) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.5) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-5 (6) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.6) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-6 (Note1) (7) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.7) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-7 (Note1) (8) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.8) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-8 (Note1) (9) Ladder Editing Package (Vol.9) / A08B-9201-J510#ZZ07-9 (Note1) (Note1) Vol.6Vol.9 are disks for Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. Details on each disk are as follows. Vol.6 Setup disk for Japanese version Vol.7 Setup disk for English version Vol.8 Ladder Printer Tool for PMC (1) Vol.9 Ladder Printer Tool for PMC (2)

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

7/67

5.4 Installation and Uninstallation (Replace (12) in the 2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu) (12) Upon the completion of installation, the Ladder Editing Package is registered in the [Programs] menu and the following screen is displayed. If you want to install continuously the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, click [OK] button. If you dont want to install this tool, click [Cancel] button. When [Cancel] button is clicked, the installation terminates.

[Note] 1. The configuration of the directory in which the Ladder Editing Package has been installed cannot be modified. 2. When installing the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC at WindowsNT4.0, a privilege for Administrator is needed. (Add (13), (14) in the 2.3.1 Registering the software in Windows95/NT4.0 [Programs] menu) (13) When you install the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, the following dialog is displayed. Set a specified disk and click [OK] button.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

8/67

(14) The installer of the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts. Please input the following items according to the instruction dialog and install this software. (a) Registration Information (Name, Company ) (b) Installation Directory (c) Program Folder Please refer to 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC for details.

(Add after 5.1 Outline in 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC) 5.2 Installation and Uninstallation Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is able to be installed from the setup disk for this software. (Vol.6 : For Japanese or Vol.7 : For English) [Note] 1. When installing the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC at WindowsNT4.0, a privilege for Administrator is needed. 5.2.1 Starting installer (1) Set the setup disk (Vol.6 : For Japanese or Vol.7 : For English) in a floppy disk drive. (this example is a case to set it in drive A.) (2) Execute Setup.exe. The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

9/67

5.2.2 Operating installation The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is basically advanced according to following procedures. 1) Installer start 2) License contract confirmation 3) User registration 4) User registration confirmation 5) Installation directory selection 6) Program folder selection 7) Installation information confirmation 8) Program copy 9) Installation completion A main operation of installation is described as follows. (1) User registration Specify your name and the company name. The number of maximum characters of the name and company name is 40 characters. If you dont input either the name or the company name, [Next] button becomes invalid. Please input both items. After input operation ends, click [Next] button. In default, the name and the company name of the user registration of Windows are displayed.

Fig. 5.2.2.1 User registration screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

10/67

(2) Installation directory selection Specify the installation directory. When you want to install in another directory, click [Browse] button. The directory selection screen is displayed and the installation directory can be input or can be chosen. After you specify the installation directory, click [Next] button. Default directory is (SystemDirectory)\Program Files\Ladder Printer Tool.

Fig. 5.2.2.2 Installation directory selection screen

Fig. 5.2.2.3 Directory selection screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

11/67

(3) Program folder selection Specify the program folder. If the specified folder does not exist, new folder is created. After you specified the folder, click [Next] button. Default folder is FAPT LADDER-II.

Fig. 5.2.2.4 Program folder selection screen Please perform other operations of the installation according to the questions instructed by the installer. 5.2.3 Configuration after installation (1) Directory configuration The installer of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC automatically makes the following sub-directories under the specified directory(For example C:\PRTTOOL). C:\PRTOOL ENG (or JPN) There are files of the help and the resource, etc. in this sub-directory. [Note] Dont delete the above-mentioned directory except uninstallation of this tool.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

12/67

(2) Dynamic Link Library (DLL) files Most of system files of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC are installed in the specified directory. But the following DLL files are installed in the system directory of Windows (For example : C:\Winnt40\system32). a) Mfc40.dll b) Msvcrt40.dll [Note] Dont delete the above-mentioned files except uninstallation of this tool. (3) Program Folder and Shortcut When installing this tool, the following program folder and shortcut are made. The program folder name is specified by the installation of this tool. (Default name : FAPT LADDER-II) Two shortcuts are made as follows. a) [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] This is a shortcut for starting Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. b) [Uninstall Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] (Note1) This is a shortcut for uninstallation of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. [Note] 1. This shortcut is made only when installing at WindowsNT4.0. (4) Registry When installing Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, the information of this tool is written in the registry of Windows. 5.2.4 Uninstallation This tool has the function of uninstallation. When you execute the uninstaller, the files, the folder, the registry, and the program folder, etc. made by the installer are deleted. Uninstaller is started according to the following procedures. (1) Common operations of WindowsNT4.0 and Windows95 1)Select [Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] on Add/Remove Program Properties of the control panel. And click [Add/Remove] button. 2)After a confirmation dialog box is displayed, click [Yes] button. The uninstaller starts. (2) Only operations of WindowsNT4.0 Another operation to start the uninstaller is to select [Uninstall Ladder Printer Tool for PMC] on the program folder.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

13/67

5.5 Operation (Add after 5.2 Installation and uninstallation in 5. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC) 5.3 Operation 5.3.1 Start Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts when selecting PMCLDPRT.exe in the directory at which the this tool is installed with the Explorer etc., or selecting the shortcut of this tool. And an initial menu is displayed. 5.3.2 Termination To terminate Ladder Printer Tool for PMC, click the close button of the application window, or select the [Close] of the control menu, or select the [Exit] of the File menu on the initial menu or the program opening menu. 5.3.3 Menu configuration The configuration of menu, which this tool displays, is as follows. (1) Initial menu
File Open Program

Exit Initial menu View Tool Bar

Status Bar Help Topic

Version

Fig. 5.3.3.1 chart

Menu

configuration

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

14/67

(2) Program opening menu

File Program opening menu (1) Refer to Fig. 5.3.3.2(b) Tool Bar

View

Status Bar Help Help

Version

Fig. 5.3.3.2(a) Menu configuration chart

Open Program Close Program File Print Preview Printer Exit

Fig. 5.3.3.2(b) Menu configuration chart

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

15/67

5.3.4 Example of basic operation when printing The following example shows a basic operation of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC from the beginning to print Title Data and Ladder Diagram of program name RB4_SFC. [Operation] (1) Start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC Ladder Printer Tool for PMC starts when selecting PMCLDPRT.exe in the directory at which the this tool is installed with the Explorer and etc., or selecting the shortcut of this tool. And an initial menu is displayed.

Fig. 5.3.4.1 Initial menu screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

16/67

(2) Open the file (Selecting the program) 1) Select [Open Program] of the [File] menu.

Fig. 5.3.4.2 [File] menu screen 2) Specify the program name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the program name which you want to open (a program name which you want to print) or selecting the folder of the program which you want to open (a program which you want to print) on the following screen, click [Open] button. If you select a folder (directory) of a sequence program, the program is automatically opened. In this case, the folder of "RB4_SFC is selected.

Fig. 5.3.4.3 Program selection screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

17/67

3) When the program is selected, the program-opening screen is displayed.

Fig. 5.3.4.4 Program-opening screen (3) Print 1) Click [Print] button of the print preview toolbar displayed in the upper part of the program-opening screen.

[Print] button

Fig. 5.3.4.5 Print preview toolbar

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

18/67

2) When clicking [Print] button, the print dialog is displayed. Click [Option] button when you want to set print options. Click [Printer] button when you want to set printer items. Refer to 5.3.8 Print screen or 5.3.9 Printer set screen for details.

. 5.3.4.6 Print dialog screen

Fig

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

19/67

3) Choose items which you want to print. In this case, click [Select] button of Print Data group, first, then choose Title Data and Ladder Diagram which are to be printed.

Fig. 5.3.4.7 Selection item screen (1)

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

20/67

4) Erase the check marks other than Title Data and Ladder Diagram.

Fig. 5.3.4.8 Selection item screen (2)

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

21/67

5) When clicking [OK] button, the print starts. When you want to discontinue while printing, click [Cancel] button of the printing screen.

Fig. 5.3.4.9 Printing screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

22/67

5.3.5 Initial menu The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu. Select [File] to open the program. Select [View] to switch to show and hide toolbar or status bar. Select [Help] to refer to help and version information. Before specifying any program in the initial menu, [Print] button of toolbar becomes invalid and cannot be clicked. Refer to 5.3.10 Toolbar for details of toolbar.

Fig. 5.3.5 Initial menu screen 5.3.5.1 File The [File] menu has menus for specifying print program and for terminating Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

Fig. 5.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

23/67

(1) Open Program Open a printing program. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the program name is selected.

Fig. 5.3.5.1 Program selection screen Specify the program name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting a program name which you want to print, click [Open] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue opening the program. (2) Exit Exits Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

24/67

5.3.5.2 View [View] menu is a menu related to the display of toolbar and status bar. Select [Tool Bar] to switch to show and hide toolbar. Select [Status Bar] to switch to show and hide status bar.

Fig. 5.3.5.2 [View] menu screen (1) Tool Bar Switch to show or hide the toolbar. Toolbar includes buttons for some of most common commands in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the toolbar is shown. Refer to 5.3.10 Toolbar for details of toolbar. (2) Status Bar Switch to show or hide the status bar. Status bar describes the action to be executed by the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and keyboard Latch State. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the status bar is shown. Refer to 5.3.11 Status Bar for details of status bar.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

25/67

5.3.5.3 Help [Help] menu is a menu related to help and version information. Select [Topic] to refer to help and to retrieve the topic. Select [Version] to refer to version information.

Fig. 5.3.5.3(a) [Help] menu screen (1) Topic Use this command to display the opening screen of Help. An index to topics, on which you can get help, is offered to you. From the opening screen, you can jump to step-bystep instructions for using Ladder Printer Tool for PMC and to various types of reference information. Once you open Help, you can click the Contents button whenever you want to return to the opening screen.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

26/67

Fig. 5.3.5.3(b) Help Topics screen (2) Version The version number of this application is displayed. The copyright notice and version number of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is displayed. When returning to the menu screen, click [OK] button.

Fig. 5.3.5.3(c) Version information screen 5.3.6 Program Opening Menu Program Opening Menu is a menu in the state that the program is selected. There are

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

27/67

three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in Program Opening Menu. Select [File] to operate functions related to files and printing. Select [View] to switch to show and hide toolbar or status bar. Select [Help] to refer to the help and version information. When specifying the program, [Print] button from the toolbar can be clicked. Refer to 5.3.10 Toolbar for details of toolbar.

Fig. 5.3.6 Program Opening Menu screen

5.3.6.1 File [File] menu is a menu to operate functions related to files and printing. Select [Open Program] to open an existing program. Select [Close Program] to close the program which is opened now. Select [Print] to print and to set the print option data. Select [Preview] to display the document on the screen as it would appear on the printed document. Select [Printer] to select a printer and printer connection setting.

Fig. 5.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening) (1) Open Program
TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

28/67

Close a program which is opened now and open a new program. File dialog is displayed as a screen where the program name is specified. Refer to (1) Open Program in 5.3.5.1 File for details. (2) Close Program Close a program, which is opened now. After closing the program, the menu becomes an initial menu. (3) Print The sequence program is printed, and the option of the print item is set, and the printer is set. Print dialog screen is opened. Refer to 5.3.8 Print screen for details. (4) Preview Displays the document on the screen as it would appear on printed document. The main window will be replaced with a print preview window in which one or two pages will be displayed in their printed format. Refer to 5.3.7 Preview screen for details of preview. (5) Printer Selects a printer and set various items. Print setting dialog is displayed. Refer to 5.3.9 Printer set screen for details. (6) Exit Exits Ladder Printer Tool for PMC.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

29/67

5.3.6.2 View [View] menu is a menu related to the display of toolbar and the display of status bar. Select Tool Bar to switch display and hide of toolbar. Select Status Bar to switch display and hide of status bar. (1) Tool Bar Switch to show or hide the toolbar. Toolbar includes buttons for some of most common commands in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the toolbar is shown. Refer to 5.3.10 Toolbar for details of toolbar. (2) Status Bar Switch to show or hide the status bar. Status bar describes the action to be executed by the selected menu item or depressed toolbar button, and keyboard Latch State. A check mark appears next to the menu item when the status bar is shown. Refer to 5.3.11 Status Bar for details of status bar. 5.3.6.3 Help [Help] menu is a menu related to the help and version information. Select [Help] to refer to the help. Select [Version] to refer to version information.

Fig. 5.3.6.3(a) [Help] menu screen (Program opening)

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

30/67

(1) Help Offers you a help of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. From the opening screen, you can jump to step-by-step instructions for using Ladder Printer Tool for PMC and various types of reference information. Once you open Help, you can click the Contents button whenever you want to return to the opening screen.

Fig. 5.3.6.3(b) Help screen (2) Version The version number of this application is displayed. The copyright notice and version number of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC is displayed. When returning to the menu screen, click [OK] button.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

31/67

5.3.7 Preview Screen (Program opening screen) When selecting [Preview], the preview screen is displayed. When opening the program specified with [Program Open], [Title] preview of the program is displayed. The preview toolbar offers you options to view either one or two pages at a time; to move back and forth through the document; to zoom in and out of pages; and to initiate a print job. When selecting [Title] and [Ladder] and etc. button of the print item on toolbar, the Preview screen corresponding to the button is displayed. The print item not selected by print dialog cannot preview, and the print item which dose not correspond by PMC model cannot be previewed.

Fig. 5.3.7 Preview screen (Program opening screen)

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

32/67

Details of each button are as follows. Tool Operation Bring up the print dialog box, to start a print job. Preview the previous printed page. Preview the next printed page. Preview one or two printed pages at a time. Zoom in the printed page. Zoom out the printed page. Return from print preview to the editing window. Display Preview of Title Data. Display Preview of System Parameter. Display Preview of Symbol Comment. Display Preview of Ladder Diagram. Display Preview of Step Sequence Diagram. Display Preview of I/O Module Data. Display Preview of Message Data. Display Preview of Cross Reference. Display Preview of Bit Address Map.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

33/67

5.3.8 Print Screen The sequence program is printed. Moreover, the print option and the printer is set. 5.3.8.1 Print setting Select and print the item that you want to print in this dialog. Moreover, the print option setting dialog and the printer setting dialog can be called.

Fig. 5.3.8.1 Print dialog Details of each item are as follows. [Program Name] Group Display the program name, which is opened now. [Print Data] Group [ALL] [Select] Choose the item, which you want to print. In default, [ALL] is checked. Specify to print all data. Specify the print data. The print item can be selected by checking [Select]. The checked print item is printed. The print item do not correspond by the PMC model is not displayed.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

34/67

[OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Option] Button [Printer] Button

Begins the print. Discontinue printing. Set the option concerning the print data. When this button is selected, the print option set dialog is displayed. Do the printer setting and the print setting. When this button is selected, the printer set dialog is displayed.

5.3.8.2 Title Data print Set the option of the Title Data print.

Fig. 5.3.8.2 Title Data print option screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

35/67

Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Title Data print. The integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set. [Print Title] Group [Title] [Sub Title] [Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Title Data print. In default, Title Data is set. Specify the title of the Title Data print. The character string is not set in default. Save the print option setting and do preview of the Title Data print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Title Data print option.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

36/67

5.3.8.3 System Parameter print Set the option of the System Parameter print.

Fig. 5.3.8.3 System Parameter print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the System Parameter print. The integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set. [Print Title] Group [Title] [Sub Title] Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the System Parameter print. In default, System Parameter is set. Specify the title of the System Parameter print. Any character string is not set in default.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

37/67

[Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

Save the print option setting and do preview of the System Parameter print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Refer to help of the System Parameter print option.

5.3.8.4 Symbol & Comment print Set the option of the Symbol & Comment print.

Fig. 5.3.8.4 Symbol & Comment print option screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

38/67

Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Symbol & Comment print. The integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set. [Print Title] Group [Title] [Sub Title] [Page Range] Group [All] [Line No.] [Page No.] [Comment] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Symbol & Comment print. In default, Symbol & Comment is set. Specify the title of the Symbol & Comment print. Any character string is not set in default. Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the line number, which you want to print. Specify the range of the page number, which you want to print.

Select the kind of comment. In default, [Relay Comment] is checked. [Relay Comment] Specify to print only the relay comment. [Coil Comment] Specify to print only the coil comment. [Relay Comment/Coil Comment] Specify to print both the relay comment and the coil comment. Save the print option setting and do preview of the Symbol & Comment print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Symbol & Comment print option.

[Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

39/67

5.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print Set the option of the Ladder Diagram print. (1) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.5(a) Ladder Diagram print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Ladder Diagram to be printed. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set. [Print Title] Group [Title] [Sub Title] [Print Range] Group [All] [Net No.] [Page No.] Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Ladder Diagram print. In default, Ladder Diagram is set. Specify the title printed with the Ladder Diagram. Any character string is not set in default. Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the net, which you want to print. Specify the range of the page, which you want to print.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

40/67

[Print Program] Group [All] [Unit]

Set printing Ladder Program. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Print specified subprogram. Input the subprogram name which you want to print, or select the subprogram name from combo box. Specify the data printed for each contact. In default, [Symbol] is checked. Print the symbol data of contact. Print the relay comment data of contact. Specify the presence of form feed for each subprogram. Default is no form feed. Specify the presence of cross reference. Default is no cross reference. Specify a detailed setting of the Ladder Diagram print. The Ladder Diagram detailed setting dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to 2 Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen for details. Save the print option setting and do preview of the Ladder Diagram. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Refer to help of the Ladder Diagram print option.

[Relay/Coil] Group [Symbol] [Relay Comment] [Page Feed(Sub Program)] [Cross Reference] [Details] Button

[Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

41/67

(2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Fig. 5.3.8.5(b) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen Details of each item are as follows. [Step No.] Specify the presence of the step number. Default is checked. [Net No.] Specify the presence of the net number. Default is checked. [Line] Group [Narrow] [Wide] Specify the space between lines in the net. In default, [Narrow] is checked. Print the lines of the net with narrow space. Print the lines of the net with wide space.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

42/67

5.3.8.6 Step Sequence Diagram print Set the option of the Step Sequence Diagram print. As for the PMC model which doesnt correspond to the step sequence, this page is not displayed. Moreover, the PMC model that corresponds to the step sequence is not displayed if there is no step sequence file either.

Fig. 5.3.8.6 Step Sequence Diagram print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Step Sequence Diagram print. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

43/67

[Print Title] Group [Title] [Sub Title] [Print Program] Group [All] [Unit] [Sub Program No.] [Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Step Sequence Diagram print. In default, Step Sequence Diagram is set. Specify the title of the Step Sequence Diagram print. Any character string is not set in default. Select Step Sequence Program to be printed. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Print selected subprogram. Input the subprogram name, which you want to print or select the subprogram name from combo box. Specify the presence of the print of the sub program number. Default is checked. Save the print option setting and do preview of the Step Sequence Diagram print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Step Sequence Diagram print option.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

44/67

5.3.8.7 I/O Module Data print Set the option of the I/O Module Data print.

Fig. 5.3.8.7 I/O Module Data print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the I/O Module Data. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set. [Print Title] Group [Title] [Sub Title] Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the I/O Module Data. In default, I/O Module is set. Specify the title of the I/O Module Data. Any character string is not set in default.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

45/67

[Print Channel] Group [1 Channel] [2 Channel] [Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

Specify the print channel. Only when the PMC model is PMC-QC, it is possible to set this item. This group is not displayed for another model. Print the first channel. Default is checked. Print the second channel. Default is checked. Save the print option setting and do preview of the I/O Module Data print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the I/O Module Data print option.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

46/67

5.3.8.8 Message Data print Set the option of the Message Data print. When the PMC model is PMC-QC, this page is not displayed because there is no message file.

Fig. 5.3.8.8(a) Message Data print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Message Data. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set. [Print Title] Group [Title] [Sub Title] Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Message Data. In default, Message is set. Specify the title of the Message Data. Any character string is not set in default.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

47/67

[Print Range] Group [All] [Address] [Page No.] [Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to Table 5.3.8.8(b) for the specification of range. Specify the range of the page, which you want to print. Save the print option setting and do preview of the Message Data print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Refer to help of the Message Data print option.

Table 5.3.8.8(b) Specification of address of Message Data Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address A5.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address A4 Specified Byte Address and Bit Address in a range of 0-7. Address range A2.3-A5.7 All addresses within the specified Specification Range

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

48/67

5.3.8.9 Cross Reference print Set the option of the Cross Reference print. (1) Cross Reference print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.9(a) Cross Reference print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Cross Reference. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

49/67

[Print Title] Group [Title] [Sub Title] [Print Range] Group [All] [Address] [Address Kind] [Comment] Group [Relay Comment] [Coil Comment] [Double Check]

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. In default, Cross Reference is set. Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. Any character string is not set in default. Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to Table 5.3.8.9(b) for the specification of range. Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print. The plural items can be specified. Specify the printed comment. In default, [Relay Comment] is checked. Print the relay comment. Print the coil comment. Specify whether the checking of writing the coil doubly and the double use of the function instruction is executed. Default is not checked. Specify a detailed setting for the Cross Reference. The Cross Reference print detailed setting dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to (2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen for details. Save the print option setting and preview the Cross Reference. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Cross Reference print option.

[Details] Button

[Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

Table 5.3.8.9(b) Specification of address of Cross Reference print table Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address X10 Specified byte address (Contain the bit address)

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

50/67

Address range specification

F10.0-F12.7 F10.5-F10

All addresses within the specified range To the specified byte address from the specified bit address

(2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

Fig. 5.3.8.9(c) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

51/67

Details of each item are as follows. [Print Guidance] Group Set a guidance/sub guidance of the output form. The guidance/sub guidance can be specified up to 19 characters. [Guidance] Set a guidance of the output form. In default, STEP NO./NET NO. is set. [Sub Guidance] Set a sub guidance of the output form. Any character string is not set in default. [Print Information] Group [Step No.] [Net No.] [Print No. Type] [Coil Guidance] Group Set the printed step/net number. Print the step number. Specify it the step number is printed and the first character. [Step No.] is checked in default and [Top Char] is S. Print the net number. Specify it the net number is printed and the first character. [Net No.] is checked in default and [Top Char] is N. Set the number print form. In default, Step No./Net No. is set.

Set the coil guidance. In default, [Ladder Diagram Graphics] is checked. [Ladder Diagram Graphics] Print by the graphic same as the ladder diagram. [User Define String] Print by the character string, which the user defined. The following four can be defined, when [User Define String] is selected. Four all can be specified up to 13 characters. [Read] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Read contact. In default, Read is set. [Write] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Write contact. In default, Write is set. [Set] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Set contact. In default, Set is set. [Reset] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Reset contact. In default, Reset is set.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

52/67

[Line Feed Count]

Specify the number of line feed inserted between the addresses. A value of 0-9 can be specified. In default, 1 is set. Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds of address. Default is checked.

[Page Feed]

5.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print Set the option of the Bit Address Map. (1) Bit Address Map print option screen

Fig. 5.3.8.10(a) Bit Address Map print option screen

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

53/67

Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Bit Address Map print. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set. [Print Title] Group [Title] [Sub Title] [Print Range] Group [All] [Address] [Address Kind] [Using Address] [Details] Button Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. In default, Bit Address Map is set. Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. Any character string is not set in default. Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to Table 5.3.8.10(b) for the specification of range. Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print. The plural items can be specified. Print only the address used. Default is checked. Specify a detailed setting of the Bit Address Map print. The Bit Address Map print detailed set dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to 2 Bit Address Map print option detailed screen for details. Save the print option setting and preview the Bit Address Map print. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Bit Address Map print option.

[Preview] Button

[OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

54/67

Table 5.3.8.10(b) Specification of address of Bit Address Map print table Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address X10 Specified byte address (Contain the bit address) Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within Range specification the specified range F10-F20 All addresses within the specified range (2) Bit Address Map print option detailed screen

Fig, 5.3.8.10(c) Bit Address Map print option detailed screen Details of each item are as follows. [Page Feed] Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds of the addresses. Default is checked. [Use Address Mark] An arbitrary sign can be set in the used address mark. Specify one character. In default, @ is set.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

55/67

5.3.8.11 Common Item Set the option of a Common Item.

Fig. 5.3.8.11 Common Item option set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Guidance Message Language] Group Specify the guide message language when the title and the system parameter are printed. [First Language] is checked in default and [First Language](combo box) is English. [First Language] Print in the language selected in the first language. [First/Second Language] Print in the languages selected in the First language and the Second language. [First Language] (combo box) Specify the first language. In default, "English is set. [Second Language] (combo box) Specify the second language. When [First/Second Language] is selected, it is possible to specify. In default, "English is set. [Print] Group Specify the cover page print. In default, [Cover] is not checked. [Cover] Specify the presence of the cover page. A file can be specified when this item is checked. The file can be selected with the File button. The format of the cover
TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

56/67

page file which can be selected is a metafile. [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Common Item.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

57/67

5.3.9 Printer set screen 5.3.9.1 Printer setting Set the printer.

Fig. 5.3.9.1 Printer set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Printer] Group The printer setting and display information. [Name] Set the printer used. Choose the Default Printer; or choose the Specific Printer option and select one of the current installed printers shown in the box. You install printers and configure ports using the Windows Control Panel. [Cond] Display the state of the selected printer. [Kind] Display the kind of the selected printer. [Spot] Display the place of the selected printer. [Cmnt] Display additional information on the selected printer. [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Page] Button Save the printer setting and end printer dialog. Discontinue the printer setting and end printer dialog. Display print setting Dialog to set the number of lines per one form the margin, etc.. Refer to 5.3.9.2 - 5.3.9.6 for details.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

58/67

5.3.9.2 Line Count Set the line count, and point of character/line, and font which can be printed on one page, when printing other than the Ladder Diagram and Step Sequence Diagram.

Fig. 5.3.9.2 Line Count set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Line Count] Specify the maximum number of lines, which can be printed on one page. Line Point and Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line Count. In default, 72 is set. [Char Point] Set the width of the character by point. Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Char Point. In default, 10 is set. [Line Point] Set the height of one line by point. Line Count and Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line Point. In default, 10 is set. [Font] Group [Font Face] [Font Size] Specify font. Set the font face. In default, System is set. Set the font size. Line Count, Char Point and Line Point might be automatically adjusted according to Font Size. In default, 10 is set.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

59/67

[Reset] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

Reset all the items of Line Count page to the default. Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Line Count.

5.3.9.3 Line Count (Ladder) Set the line count printed on one page, and point of character/line, and font etc., when the Ladder Diagram and the Step Sequence Diagram is printed.

Fig. 5.3.9.3 Line Count (Ladder) set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Line Count] Specify the maximum number of lines, which can be printed on one page. Line Point and Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line Count. In default, 78 is set. [Char Point] Set the width of the character by point. Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Char Point. In default, 9 is set.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

60/67

[Line Point]

Set the height of one line by point. Line Count and Font Size might be automatically adjusted according to Line Point. In default, 9 is set. Specify font. Select Ladder Data for which the Font is set. Set the font face with which selected [Ladder Data] is printed. The all default is System. Set the font size with which selected [Ladder Data] is printed. Line Count, Char Point and Line Point might be automatically adjusted according to Font Size. The all default is 9. Reset all the items of Line Count(Ladder) page to the default. Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Line Count(Ladder).

[Font] Group [Ladder Data] [Font Face] [Font Size]

[Reset] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

61/67

5.3.9.4 Margin Set margin at the top, bottom, right and left in the print page.

Fig. 5.3.9.4 Margin set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Upper] Set an upper margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm). In default, 20 is set. [Under] Set an under margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm). In default, 10 is set. [Right] Set a right margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm). In default, 10 is set. [Left] Set a left margin. The unit is a millimeter (mm). In default, 10 is set. [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Margin.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

62/67

5.3.9.5 Paper Size Set the size of the printed form.

Fig. 5.3.9.5 Paper Size set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Size] Set the size of the form. In default, A4 is set. [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Paper Size.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

63/67

5.3.9.6 Print Type Set various items concerning the frame added to the print page.

Fig. 5.3.9.6 Print Type set screen Details of each item are as follows. [Frame Print] Group Set the presence of the frame and the character string printed. If [Frame Print] is not checked, the following setting cannot be done. [File] Specify the metafile name used when the frame is printed. The file name can be selected with the File button. [Data] Specify the data for which the character string, coordinates, and font are set.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

64/67

[String]

[X Pos]

[Y Pos]

[Font] Group [Font Face] [Font Size] [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

Specify the printed character string set with [Data]. The data specification by the following forms is also possible. %[T]: Print the title data. %[S]: Print the sub title data. %[P]: Print the program name. %[N]: Print page number. Default is as follows. String Data 1: %[P] String Data 2: %[T] String Data 3: %[N] String Data 4: %[S] String Data 5 is not set. Specify the print beginning position (X coordinates) of the character string set with [Data]. The unit is a millimeter (mm). Default is as follows. String Data 1: 10 String Data 2: 75 String Data 3: 180 String Data 4: 75 String Data 5: 0 Specify the print beginning position (Y coordinates) of the character string set with [Data]. The unit is a millimeter (mm). Default is as follows. String Data 1: 10 String Data 2: 10 String Data 3: 10 String Data 4: 15 String Data 5: 0 Specify the font set with [Data]. Specify the font face set with [Data]. The all default is System. Specify the font size set with [Data]. The all default is 12. Save the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Discontinue the print setting and end the print setting dialog. Display the help of Print type.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

65/67

5.3.10 Toolbar The toolbar is displayed below the menu bar at the top of the application window. The toolbar provides quick mouse access to many tools used in Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. To hide or display the Toolbar, choose Toolbar from the View menu.

Fig. 5.3.10 Toolbar Details of each button are as follows. Tool Operation Open an existing document. Ladder Printer Tool for PMC displays the open dialog box, in which you can locate and open the desired file. It is a shortcut to 5.3.5.1 (1)Program Open and 5.3.6.1 (1)Program Open. Open the print dialog. It is a shortcut to 5.3.6.1 (3)Print. However, this button is invalid and cannot be selected by an initial menu because the program is not selected. Display the copyright notice and version number of your copy of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. It is a shortcut to 5.3.5.3 (2)Version and 5.3.6.3 (2)Version. Use the Context Help command to obtain help on some portion of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC. When you choose the Toolbar's Context Help button, the mouse pointer will change to an arrow and question mark. Then click somewhere in the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC window, such as another Toolbar button. The Help topic will be shown for the item you clicked.

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

66/67

5.3.11 Status Bar The status bar is displayed at the bottom of the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC window. To display or hide the status bar, use the Status Bar command in the View menu. The left area of the status bar describes actions of menu items as you use the arrow keys to navigate through menus. This area similarly shows messages that describe the actions of toolbar buttons as you depress them, before releasing them. If after viewing the description of the toolbar button command you wish not to execute the command, then release the mouse button while the pointer is off the toolbar button. The center area of the status bar displayed the program name and the PMC model name. The right area of the status bar displayed the state of ON/OFF of a special key. Pane1 Simple help Pane2 Program name Pane3 PMC model Pane4 State of key : Latched down is displayed [Scroll Lock] Key, [NUM Lock] Key, and [Caps Lock] Key from the right Simple help Program name PMC model Fig. 5.3.11 Status Bar State of key

TITLE

FANUC OPEN CNC LADDER EDITING PACKAGE SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

98.11.13
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-62884EN/01-4
SHEET

CUST.

67/67

TECHNICAL REPORT

No. TMN99/30E

Date,4 March 1999 General Manager of Application Software Laboratory

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to: O Your information O GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON O Machine tool builder Sales agency End user 2. Summary for Sales Documents 3. Notice FAPT LADDER-II 4. Attached Document Drawin B-66184EN/02-6 (01/25 to 25/25) g No. 5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List) Type of data

IDE General Manager

Original section of issue Section Manager Person in Charge

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

1/26

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents Name FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL Spec.No./Ed. B-66184EN/02

Summary of Change New, Add, Correct, Delete Add Applicable Date Feb. 1999 or later

Group Basic Function Optional Function Unit Maintenanc e Parts Notice Correction Another

Name/Outline Programming PMC-NB6 Saving and restoring the print options Changing the print option set screens

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

2/26

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Contents

1. 2. 3.

Outline.......................................................................................................................................4 Applied Software .......................................................................................................................4 Programming PMC-NB6 ............................................................................................................5 3.1 Supported PMC models .....................................................................................................5 3.2 System parameters ............................................................................................................6 4. Saving and restoring the options on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC........................................8 4.1 Changing Menu configuration.............................................................................................8 4.2 Initial menu.......................................................................................................................10 4.3 Program opening menu ....................................................................................................12 5. Print option setting screen on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC ...............................................13 5.1 Ladder Diagram print........................................................................................................13 5.2 Cross Reference print.......................................................................................................16 5.3 Bit Address Map print .......................................................................................................20 6. Operating environment ............................................................................................................22 7. Available characters in symbol ................................................................................................24 8. Config file ................................................................................................................................25

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

3/26

1.

Outline

The following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added. - Programming PMC-NB6 - Saving and restoring the print options - Changing the print option set screens This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other explanation (existign functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items FAPT LADDER-II BOperation for OPERATOR'S MANUAL 66184EN FAPT LADDER-II

2.

Applied Software

The additional functions described herein apply to the following software. FAPT LADDER-II Name Specification Version FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 3.2 or later PMC Control Software (for Series 15i ) Software PMC-NB6 control software Series 404A Version 01 or later

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

4/26

3.

Programming PMC-NB6

3.1 Supported PMC models (Correct a part of the For PMC models table of 1.1 Overview) [present] Abbreviations PMC Models PMC-SA1 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1 PMC-SA3 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA3 .... .... PMC-NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB PMC-NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2 [correction]
Abbreviations PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 .... .... PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-NB6 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB FANUC PMC-MODEL NB2 FANUC PMC-MODEL NB6 PMC Models FANUC PMC-MODEL SA1 FANUC PMC-MODEL SA3

(Correct a part of the 1.2.2 PMC models to be supported) [present] PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 (Note1) .... .... PMC-NB2 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC (Note1) [correction] PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 .... .... PMC-NB2 PMC-NB6 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC (Note1)

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

5/26

3.2 System parameters (Add after the (ii) PMC-SC3/SC4/QC/NB/NB2 of 4.5.2.6 (4)System parameter editing screen and input item for each PMC model) (iv) PMC-NB6

Fig. 4.5.2.6(c)

Refer to the PMC PROGRAMMING MANUAL(B-61863E) about setting value of Each System parameters.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

6/26

(Add after the PMC-QC/NB/NB2 of 4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (Single-Format) (a)Parameter) PMC-NB6

%@0 2 BCD 3 NO 4 PMC-NB6 7 100 % [EOB]

2. Counter data type (BINARY or BCD) 3. Whether an operators panel is used (YES: Used, NO: Not used) 4. PMC model (PMC-NB6) 7. Ladder execution time (1% to 150%)

Note When specifying YES in Item 3 above (whether an operators panel is used), specify the KEY address, LED address, KEY image address, and LED image address as follows:

3. YES X0000 Y0000 R0000 R0010

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

7/26

4.

Saving and restoring the options on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

4.1 Changing Menu configuration (Replace the 6.3.3 Menu configuration) 6.3.3 Menu configuration The configuration of menu, which this tool displays, is as follows. (1) Initial menu
File Refer to Fig. 6.3.3.1(b)

Initial menu

View

Tool Bar

Status Bar Help Topic

Version

Fig. 6.3.3.1(a) Menu configuration chart

Open Program Save Option File File Restore Option File Exit

Fig. 6.3.3.1(b) Menu configuration chart

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

8/26

(2) Program opening menu

File Program opening menu Refer to Fig. 6.3.3.2(b)

View

Tool Bar

Status Bar Help Help

Version

Fig. 6.3.3.2(a) Menu configuration h

Open Program Close Program File Save Option File Restore Option File Print Preview Printer Exit

Fig. 6.3.3.2(b) Menu configuration chart

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

9/26

(Replace the Fig. 6.3.4.2 [File] menu screen of 6.3.4 Example of basic operation when printing)

Fig. 6.3.4.2 [File] menu screen

4.2 Initial menu (Correct a part of the 6.3.5 Initial menu) [present] 6.3.5 Initial menu The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu. Select [File] to open the program. [correction] 6.3.5 Initial menu The initial menu is a menu displayed in the state immediately after the start of Ladder Printer Tool for PMC or in the state without any program specified. There are three menus of [File], [View], and [Help] in the initial menu. Select [File] to open the program or to save a option file or restore a option file.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

10/26

(Replace the Fig. 6.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen of 6.3.5.1 File)

Fig. 6.3.5.1(a) [File] menu screen (Insert after the (1) Open Program of 6.3.5.1 File) (2) Save Option File Save the print option setting to a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the option file name which you want to save, click [Save] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue saving the print option setting to the file. (3) Restore Option File Restore the print option setting from a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the option file name which you wants to restore, click [Open] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue restoring the print option setting from the file.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

11/26

4.3 Program opening menu (Replace the Fig. 6.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening) of 6.3.6.1 File )

Fig. 6.3.6.1 [File] menu screen (Program opening) (Insert after the (2) Close Program of 6.3.6.1 File) (3) Save Option File Save the print option setting to a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the option file name which you want to save, click [Save] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue saving the print option setting to the file. (4) Restore Option File Restore the print option setting from a file. The file dialog is displayed as a screen where the file name is selected. Specify the option file name on the file dialog which is displayed. After inputting the option file name which you wants to restore, click [Open] button. Click [Cancel] button to discontinue restoring the print option setting from the file.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

12/26

5.

Print option setting screen on the Ladder Printer Tool for PMC

5.1 Ladder Diagram print (Replace the (1)Ladder Diagram print option screen of 6.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print) (1) Ladder Diagram print option screen

Fig. 6.3.8.5(a) Ladder Diagram print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Ladder Diagram to be printed. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set. [Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Ladder Diagram print. In default, Ladder Diagram is set. Specify the title printed with the Ladder Diagram. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title]

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

13/26

[Print Range] Group [All] [Net No.] [Page No.] [Print Program] Group [All] [Unit]

Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the net, which you want to print. Specify the range of the page, which you want to print. Set printing Ladder Program. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Print specified subprogram. Input the subprogram name which you want to print, or select the subprogram name from combo box.

[Page Feed] Group Specify form feed. [Page Feed(Sub Program)] Specify the presence of form feed for each subprogram. Default is no form feed. [Details] Button Specify a detailed setting of the Ladder Diagram print. The Ladder Diagram detailed setting dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to (2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen for details. Save the print option setting and do preview of the Ladder Diagram. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option setting dialog. Refer to help of the Ladder Diagram print option.

[Preview] Button

[OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

14/26

(Replace the (2)Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen of 6.3.8.5 Ladder Diagram print) (2) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen

Fig. 6.3.8.5(b) Ladder Diagram print option detailed screen Details of each item are as follows. [Step No./Net No.] group Specify the presence of the step number / net number. [Step No.] Specify the presence of the step number. Default is checked. [Net No.] Specify the presence of the net number. Default is checked. [Line] Group [Narrow] [Wide] [Relay/Coil] Group [Symbol] [Relay Comment] [Cross Reference] Specify the space between lines in the net. In default, [Narrow] is checked. Print the lines of the net with narrow space. Print the lines of the net with wide space. Specify the data printed for each contact. In default, [Symbol] is checked. Print the symbol data of contact. Print the relay comment data of contact. Specify the presence of cross reference. Default is no cross reference.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

15/26

5.2 Cross Reference print (Replace the (1)Cross Reference print option screen of 6.3.8.9 Cross Reference print) (1) Cross Reference print option screen

Fig. 6.3.8.9(a) Cross Reference print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Cross Reference. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set. [Print Title] Group Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. In default, Cross Reference is set. Specify the title of the Cross Reference print. Any character string is not set in default.

[Title] [Sub Title]

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

16/26

[Print Range] Group [All] [Address]

[Address Kind]

Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to Table 6.3.8.9(b) for the specification of range. Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print. The plural items can be specified. Set a guidance/sub guidance of the output form. The guidance/sub guidance can be specified up to 19 characters. Set a guidance of the output form. In default, STEP NO./NET NO. is set. Set a sub guidance of the output form. Any character string is not set in default. Specify form feed. Specify the number of line feed inserted between the addresses. A value of 0-9 can be specified. In default, 1 is set. Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds of address. Default is checked. Specify a detailed setting for the Cross Reference. The Cross Reference print detailed setting dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to (2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen for details. Save the print option setting and preview the Cross Reference. This button is effective when any print item is selected. Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Cross Reference print option.

[Print Guidance] Group [Guidance] [Sub Guidance] [Page/Line Feed] Group [Line Feed Count] [Page Feed]

[Details] Button

[Preview] Button [OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

17/26

Table 6.3.8.9(b) Specification of address of Cross Reference print table Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address X10 Specified byte address (Contain the bit address) Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within the range specification specified range F10.5-F10 To the specified byte address from the specified bit address

(Replace the (2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen of 6.3.8.9 Cross Reference print) (2) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

Fig. 6.3.8.9(c) Cross Reference print option detailed screen

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

18/26

Details of each item are as follows. [Print Information] Group Set the printed step/net number. [Step No.] Print the step number. Specify it the step number is printed and the first character. [Step No.] is checked in default and [Top Char] is S. [Net No.] Print the net number. Specify it the net number is printed and the first character. [Net No.] is checked in default and [Top Char] is N. [Print No. Type] Set the number print form. In default, Step No./Net No. is set. [Coil Guidance] Group Set the coil guidance. In default, [Ladder Diagram Graphics] is checked. [Ladder Diagram Graphics] Print by the graphic same as the ladder diagram. [User Define String] Print by the character string, which the user defined. The following four can be defined, when [User Define String] is selected. Four all can be specified up to 13 characters. [Read] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Read contact. In default, Read is set. [Write] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Write contact. In default, Write is set. [Set] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Set contact. In default, Set is set. [Reset] Specify the character string to indicate the reference by Reset contact. In default, Reset is set. Specify the printed comment. In default, [Relay Comment] is checked. Print the relay comment. Print the coil comment. Specify whether the checking of writing the coil doubly and the double use of the function instruction is executed. Default is not checked.

[Comment] Group [Relay Comment] [Coil Comment] [Double Check]

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

19/26

5.3 Bit Address Map print (Replace the 6.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print) 6.3.8.10 Bit Address Map print Set the option of the Bit Address Map.

Fig. 6.3.8.10(a) Bit Address Map print option screen Details of each item are as follows. [Start Page No.] Group Set page number. [Page No.] Set beginning page numbers of the Bit Address Map print. An integer value can be set. In default, 1 is set.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

20/26

[Print Title] Group

[Title] [Sub Title] [Print Range] Group [All] [Address]

Specify the title and the sub title printed when the frame print is specified. A title and a sub title can be specified up to 60 characters. Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. In default, Bit Address Map is set. Specify the title of the Bit Address Map print. Any character string is not set in default. Set the range of the print. In default, [All] is checked. All are printed. Specify the range of the address, which you want to print. Refer to Table 6.3.8.10(b) for the specification of range. Specify the kind of the address, which you want to print. The plural items can be specified. Print only the address used. Default is checked. Specify form feed. Specify if a form feed is inserted between different kinds of the addresses. Default is checked. Specify the use address mark. An arbitrary sign can be set in the used address mark. Specify one character. In default, @ is set. Specify a detailed setting of the Bit Address Map print. The Bit Address Map print detailed set dialog is displayed when selecting. Refer to 2 Bit Address Map print option detailed screen for details. Save the print option setting and preview the Bit Address Map print. This button is effective when any print item is selected.

[Address Kind] [Using Address] [Page Feed] Group [Page Feed]

[Use Address Mark] Group [Use Address Mark]

[Details] Button

[Preview] Button

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

21/26

[OK] Button [Cancel] Button [Help] Button

Save the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Discontinue the print option setting and end the print option set dialog. Refer to help of the Bit Address Map print option.

Table 6.3.8.10(b) Specification of address of Bit Address Map print table Address specification Example of key Output address Kind input Bit Address R1.0 Only the specified bit address Byte Address X10 Specified byte address (Contain the bit address) Address F10.0-F12.7 All addresses within Range specification the specified range F10-F20 All addresses within the specified range

6.

Operating environment

(Correct a part of the 2 Operating environment) [present] .... Memory Conventional memory 520 Kbytes or more (Note 2) EMS and/or XMS of 4 Mbytes or more (recommended) (Note 3) .... [correction] .... Memory

Conventional memory 540 Kbytes or more (Note 2) EMS and/or XMS memory 4 Mbytes or more of EMS and/or XMS in total (recommended) (Note 3)

....

(Correct a part of the Note 2 of 2 Operating environment) (Note 2) Even if the computer has 640 Kbytes memory, the free memory may be less than 540 Kbytes when an installed driver, for example, uses a large memory space. The size of free space in memory can be checked with the DOS command CHKDSK or MEM.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

22/26

(Correct a part of the About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used: of 2 Operating environment) [present] About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used: EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder and symbol & comment data as a temporary area. Although, FAPT LADDER runs with no EMS & XMS, enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the source program to handle will be necessary for better performance. (1) Expansion memory [correction] About size of EMS and XMS memory to be used: EMS and XMS memory are used for ladder, symbol & comment data and On-line Function as a temporary area. A part of function in FAPT LADDER-II dose not run if there is no EMS and/or XMS memory. EMS and/or XMS memory are necessary. Enough size of EMS and/or XMS memory according to the source program to handle will be necessary for better performance. (1) Expansion memory .... .... (4) On-line Function When using On-line function, 1Mbytes or more EMS and/or XMS memory are necessary

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

23/26

7.

Available characters in symbol

(Correct a part of the (2) Symbol & comment specification list of 1.3.2 About Symbol & Comment Data) (Correct a part of the 2.1 Operating environment) [present] (2) Symbol & comment specification list (a) For input signal and internal relay Specification Symbol Available ASCII characters characters (lower-case alphabetic characters not allowed) Maximum cha. 16byte Maximum 20,000 entries (Note) number Duplicated Not allowed definition Display on Yes, if it is 6bytes or CRT/MDI shorter. [correction] (2) Symbol & comment specification list (a) For input signal and internal relay Specification Symbol Available ASCII characters characters (lower-case alphabetic characters and space character are not allowed Maximum cha. 16byte Maximum 20,000 entries (Note) number Duplicated Not allowed definition Display on Yes, if it is 6bytes or CRT/MDI shorter

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

24/26

8.

Config file

(Replace the 2.1 Config.sys)

2.5 CONFIG.SYS To use the system, make the following modifications to the CONFIG file. The CONFIG file of each OS is as follows. a) For WindowsNT4.0 CONFIG.NT b) For Windows95 CONFIG.SYS c) For DOS CONFIG.SYS

(1) When the system is used under WindowsNT4.0 [ The following example shows the case when WindowsNT4.0 is installed in C:\WINNT ] Specify the ANSI.SYS in CONFIG.NT file. The CONFIG.NT file and ANSI.SYS file are usually in the following folder. Check if these file are in the folder. C:\WINNT\SYSTEM32\ Add the following line to CONFIG.NT file by using a text editor. devicehigh=%SystemRoot%\system32\ansi.sys (2) When the system is used under Windows 95 [ The following example shows the case when Windows 95 is installed in C:\WINDOWS ] DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\ANSI.SYS DEVICE=C:\WINDOWS\EMM386.EXE When the system is used under Windows95, the Japanese input system is not specified in the CONFIG.SYS file. In DOS mode, only the DOS version Japanese input system can be used. The DOS version Japanese input system can be installed by using the ADDDRV command. For details of the installation method, see DOSIME.BAT under the COMMAND director of Windows and DOSIME.SYS under the root directory of the start-up disk. (3)When the system is used under DOS [ The following example shows the case when DOS is already installed in C:\DOS ] DEVICE=C:\DOS\ANSI.SYS DEVICE=C:\DOS\EMM386.EXE DEVICE=C:\DOS\MSIME.SYS DEVICE=C:\DOS\MSIMEK.SYS

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

25/26

[ About device drivers ] a)ANSI.SYS (required) The display mode and attributes of the display unit are set. This setting cannot be omitted. b)EMM386.EXE This device driver enables the use of expansion memory as EMS memory. When using another EMS driver, refer to the relevant manual for details of setting required in CONFIG.SYS. c)MSIME.SYS / MSIMEK.SYS This device driver enables the use of MS-KANJI API for Japanese-language input. When using another Japanese language input system, refer to the relevant manual for details of the setting required in CONFIG.SYS. Notes 1. All of the above device drivers are provided as standard with WindowsNT4.0 / Windows95 / MS-DOS. The specification of switches and parameters may be required for the above settings. For details, refer to the on-line help or the relevant manual for the WindowsNT4.0 / Windows95 / MS-DOS. 2. When using a memory card, refer to the manual provided with the memory card for details of the setting required in CONFIG file. 3. Some device drivers may adversely affect the FAPT LADDER-II. If a problem is anticipated, specify only ANSI.SYS in CONFIG file. Omit the specified, FAPT LADDER-II will support only English, but allows any contention with other device drivers to be identified quickly. Recognized conflicts are listed in Appendix 7.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.02.26
DATE

Ino
DESIG.

New making
DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-6
SHEET

CUST.

26/26

TECHNICAL REPORT

No. TMN99/145E

Date 15 October, 1999 General Manager of Application Software Development Department

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to: O Your information O GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON O Machine tool builder Sales agency End user 2. Summary for Sales Documents 3. Notice FAPT LADDER-II 4. Attached Document Drawin B-66184EN/02-7 (01/16 to 16/16) g No. 5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List) Type of data
No. AS0S2-99/A030 October.15.1999

IDE General Manager

Original section of issue Section Manager Person in Charge

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents

Name FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL Spec.No./Ed. B-66184EN/02

Summary of Change
New, Add, Correct, Delete Applicable Date

Group

Name/Outline I/O Link expansion (Only for PMC-SB6 for Series 16i /18i /21i) Improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password (Only for PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ) for Series 16i /18i /21i)

Basic Function

Add

Oct. 1999 or later

Optional Function Unit Maintenanc e Parts Notice Correction Another

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

2/17

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Contents

1. Outline____________________________________________________________________ 4 2. Applied Software___________________________________________________________ 4 3. I/O Link expansion ________________________________________________________ 5

3.1 3.2 The number of I/O Link channel ______________________________________________ 5 Mnemonic Editing ____________________________________________________________ 6

4. The improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password _________________________________________________ 8 5. DATA TRANSFER CABLES ________________________________________________ 15

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

3/17

1.

The following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added. - I/O Link expansion - Improvement of partial protect funciotn of ladder program by special password This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other explanation (existing functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual Spec.No. Reference Items FAPT LADDER-II BOperation for OPERATOR'S MANUAL 66184EN FAPT LADDER-II

Outline

2.

The additional functions described herein apply to the following software. FAPT LADDER-II (1) I/O Link expansion Name Specification Version FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 04.0 or later (2) Improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password Name Specification Version FAPT LADDER-II A08B-9201-J503 03.3 or later PMC Control Software (for Series 16i /18i /21i ) (1) I/O Link expansion Software Series PMC-SB5/SB6 control software 406A

Applied Software

Version 15 or later

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

4/17

3.

I/O Link expansion

3.1 The number of I/O Link channel (Insert after the (3) Specifying the direction for online communication in "4.4.1 Program selection") (4) Specifying the number of I/O Link channel When models in which more than two channels can be set is selected, the following menu is displayed.

In this menu., it selects the number of I/O Link channel. (When model is PMC-QC this menu is not displayed, because PMC-QC always has two channels.)

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

5/17

3.2 Mnemonic Editing (Correct a part of the PMC-PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6 "4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files (single-format) (a)Parameter") [present] %@0 PMC- PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6 2 BINARY 2.Counter data type (BINARY or BCD) 3 NO 3.Whether an operator's panel (YES:Used,NO:Not used) 4 PMC-RB4 4.PMC model (PMC-PA3/PMC-RA1/PMC-RA3/ PMC% RA5/ [EOB] PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB5/ PMC-RB6/PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ))

[correction] PMC- PA3/RA1/RA3/RA5/RB4/RB5/RB6 %@0 2 BINARY 3 NO 4 PMC-RB4 % [EOB] 2.Counter data type (BINARY or BCD) 3.Whether an operator's panel (YES:Used,NO:Not used) 4.PMC model (PMC-PA3/PMC-RA1/PMC-RA3/ PMCRA5/ PMC-RB4/PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB5/ PMC-RB6/PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ)/ PMC-RB6(IO-2)/PMC-RB6(STEP,IO-2))

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

6/17

(Add to the "[Setting data table to "PMC model" parametereach PMC model] " of "4.5.8.4 Sample mnemonic files(single-format) (a)Parameter ") [present] PMC model PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 PMC-SA5 PMC-SB3 PMC-SB4 PMC-SB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-SB5 PMC-SB6 PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-SC3 PMC-SC4 PMC-SC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC [correcting] PMC model PMC-SA1 PMC-SA3 PMC-SA5 PMC-SB3 PMC-SB4 PMC-SB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-SB5 PMC-SB6 PMC-SB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-SB6(IO-2) PMC-SB6(STEP,IO-2) PMC-SC3 PMC-SC4 PMC-SC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-NB6 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC
Setting data (Normal-width character string) PMC-RA1 PMC-RA3 PMC-RA5 PMC-RB3 PMC-RB4 PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB5 PMC-RB6 PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-RC3 PMC-RC4 PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC

Setting data (Normal-width character string) PMC-RA1 PMC-RA3 PMC-RA5 PMC-RB3 PMC-RB4 PMC-RB4(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB5 PMC-RB6 PMC-RB6(STEP SEQ) PMC-RB6(IO-2) PMC-RB6(STEP,IO-2) PMC-RC3 PMC-RC4 PMC-RC4(STEP SEQ) PMC-NB PMC-NB2 PMC-NB6 PMC-PA3 PMC-QC

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

7/17

4.

The improvement of partial protection function of ladder program by special password

(Replace the 4.5.4.3 Password set function) 4.5.4.3 Password set function This function is supported only in the series 15-B/16/18/21-B, Series 16/18/21-C, Power Mate-H, Series 15i, Series 16i /18i /21i A, and Power Mate i D/H. It enables a password to be added during compilation. The password can be used to prohibit ladder programs from being displayed or edited on the CTR/MDI. This function requires to be set the program option. (Refer to 4.5.7 Setting program options.) (1) Password (a)Password types Type Password(R) Password (R/W)

Use Password to allow display on the CNC Password to allow display and editing on the CNC

(b)Password setting(compile) 1 When no password Go to . When password RW&R,RW,R After compilation [EXEC] or [CONDNS] is selected, you will be prompted to specify whetherto use a password. Do you enter password ?(Y/N) To set a password, press Y password RW&R or R go to. It is unnecessary to set a password, press N password RW go to . 2 The password set screen appears. Enter password (R) 3 Enter a password A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or numerals. Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other.(If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.) It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as *,#,and @).

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

8/17

Some character strings are unusable. If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed. In such a case, use another character string. An entered password is not displayed on the screen. If the <Enter> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a password is not specified. If password=RW&R go to . If password=R go to . When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued go to . 4 The password configuration screen appears. Verification(R) 5 You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your password was entered correctly. When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is accepted When they do not match, the message Password mismatch is displayed. You are allowed to retry entering twice. When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued go to . If password=R is specified. go to . The password(R/W) set screen appears. Enter password (R/W) Enter a password(R/W). A password that can be used is a combination of 8 or less letters and/or numerals. Uppercase and lowercase letters are not distinguished from each other.(If a lowercase letter is entered, it is assumed to be uppercase.) It is impossible to use space, kana, kanji, and special characters (such as *,#,and @). Some character strings are unusable. If one such character string is entered as a password, an error message is displayed. In such a case, use another character string. An entered password is not displayed on the screen. If the <Enter> key is pressed before any valid password is specified, use of a password is not specified. go to . When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued go to . The password confirmation screen appears. Verification(R/W)

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

9/17

You will be prompted to enter the same password as entered before, to ensure that your password was entered correctly. When the password entered this time matches one that was entered before, it is accepted When they do not match, the message Password mismatch is displayed. You are allowed to retry entering twice. When <Esc> is pressed, an attempt to specify a password is discontinued go to . Compilation begins.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

10/17

(2)Special password (a)Partial protecting function Partial protection of a ladder program can be done by dividing the subprogram area into the protected area and the non-protected area by using a special password. Protected area : Inputting password is necessary to display and edit a ladder program on CRT/MDI. Non-protected area : To display and edit on CRT/MDI are permitted without inputting password. (b)Applied PMC models This function can be used by following PMCs with step sequence function. PMC-RB4(STEP)/RC4(STEP) /RB6(STEP)/RB6(STEP,IO-2)/NB2(STEP) (c)Protected area / Non-protected area The protected area and the non-protected area are decided according to the subprogram number. Refer to the following for details. Main-program LEVEL1 LEVEL2 LEVEL3 Subprogram P1P1499 P1500P2000 Protected Protected Protected Protected Non-Protected

(d)Setting of password The password(R/W) which starts with "#" is to be set. Example) #FANUC For the operation to set the special password, refer to "(1) Password (b)Password setting(compile)" because it is similar to a normal password.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

11/17

(Replace the 4.5.5.3 Password) 4.5.5.3 Password (1)Password To decompile a password-protected file, it is necessary to enter a password. Set password type Both password(R) and password(R/W) Password(R/W) Password (R) Password type to be entered Password (R/W) Password (R/W) Password (R)

After the discompilation [EXEC] is selected, the following password entry screen appears. Enter password(R) Note) If an R/W password has been set up, Password(R/W) is displayed. When the valid password is entered, discompilation begins. If the newly entered password is incorrect, an error message is displayed, and processing discontinues.(You are allowed to retry entering twice.) When <Esc> is pressed, the request to start discompilation is rejected. (2)Special password There are two ways of decompilations of an object file with a special password as follows. (a)Decompilation of all programs (Necessary a special password input) The procedure of a decompilation is similar to that of an object protected by a 'non-special' password. Refer to "(1)password". (b)Decompilation of non-protected subprograms area only (Not necessary a special password input) In OFF-LINE FUNCTION, it is possible to edit only non-protected subprograms area, (A printout is also possible. But it is impossible to convert to a mnemonic file because a source program of a protected area is not created.) Re-compilation after modifying of non-protected area is possible. But the password set function is disabled. A special password in a decompiled object file is automatically embedded and the protected area is re-protected.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

12/17

The decompilation procedure is as follows. i) Select [EXEC] for a decompilation. a password input screen is displayed. Enter password (R/W) ii)To decompile only subprograms of non-protected area, press <Enter> key without entering a password. To cancel a decompilation, press <Esc> key.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

13/17

(Correct a part of the 4.5.7.1 Compile (4) Password in "4.5.7 Setting program options") [present] (4) Password This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compil time. [NO] [RW&R] [RW] [R] : Does not display the dialog box.(Password setting is disabled.) : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box as well as the password (R) setting dialog box. : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog box. : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

[correcting] (4) Password This option specifies whether to display the password setting dialog box at compil time. [NO] [RW&R] [RW] [R] : Does not display the dialog box.(Password setting is disabled.) : Displays the password (R/W) setting dialog box as well as the password (R) setting dialog box. : Displays only the password (R/W) setting dialog box. : Displays only the password (R) setting dialog box.

Note) Password setting is disabled when only a non-protected subprograms area of an object file with a special password has been decompiled. To enable a password setting, please decompile all programs with a special password input . (Please refer to (2) Special password in 4.5.5.3 Password)

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

14/17

5.

DATA TRANSFER CABLES

Replace APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLES APPENDIX 8 DATA TRANSFER CABLE Use the cables below to transfer data from PC to a CNC, P-G(P-G Mark II or P-G Mate), or ROM writer(FA writer or PMC writer). 1. For IBM PC/AT (1)
A02B-02008 IBM PC/AT CNC / P-G / ROM writer

9-pin female t

25-pin male connector

CD(1) RD(2) SD(3) ER(4) SG(5) DR(6) RS(7) CS(8) (2)SD (3)RD (6)DR (7)SG (8)CD (5)CS (4)RS (20)ER

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

15/17

(2) IBM PC/AT CABLE A08B-0031-

IBM PC/AT

CNC / P-G / ROM writer

9-pin female connector

25-pin female connecto r

25-pin male connecto r

25-pin male connector

CD(1) RD(2) SD(3) ER(4) SG(5) DR(6) RS(7) CS(8) CI(9)

(8)CD (3)RD (2)SD (20)ER (7)SG (6)DR (4)RS (5)CS (22)CI

SD(2) RD(3) RS(4) CS(5) ER(20) DR(6) CD(8) SG(7) FG(1)

(2)SD (3)RD (4)RS (5)CS (20)ER (6)DR (8)CD (7)SG (1)FG

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

16/17

For IBM PS/2 A08B-0031CNC / P-G / ROM writer

IBM PS/2 CABLE

IBM PS/2

25-pin female connecto r

25-pin female connecto r

25-pin male connecto r

25-pin male connecto r

SD(2) RD(3) RS(4) CS(5) ER(20) DR(6) CD(8) SG(7) FG(1)

(2)SD (3)RD (4)RS (5)CS (20)ER (6)DR (8)CD (7)SG (1)FG

SD(2) RD(3) RS(4) CS(5) ER(20) DR(6) CD(8) SG(7) FG(1)

(2)SD (3)RD (4)RS (5)CS (20)ER (6)DR (8)CD (7)SG (1)FG

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

01
EDIT

99.10.15
DATE

K.Yamamoto New making

DESIG. DESCRIPTION

DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-7
SHEET

CUST.

17/17

TECHNICAL REPORT

NO. TMN 00/108E

Date 7 July, 2000 General Manager of Software Laboratory

FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL

1. Communicate this report to: O O Your information GE Fanuc-N, GE Fanuc-E FANUC Robotics CINCINNATI MILACRON O Machine tool builder Sales agency End user 2. Summary for Sales Documents 3. Notice FAPT LADDER-II 4. Attached Document Drawing B-66184EN/02-8 1/9 to 9/9 No. 5. Registration of Order List data (In case of Order List) Type of data
No. FLB7-00/7023

IDE

Original section of issue FLB7 FLB74 Person in Manager Chief Charge

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Type of applied technical documents

Name Spec.No./Ed. FAPT LADDER-II OPERATORS MANUAL B-66184EN/02

Summary of Change
New, Add, Correct, Delete Add Applicable Date Jun. 2000 or later

Group

Name/Outline

Basic Function Optional Function Unit Maintenance Parts Notice Correction Another

Improvement of program option setting.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS

01

00.06.26

Newly Registration.

MANUAL
DRAW.NO.

B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET

CUST.

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

1/9

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

Contents

1. Outline ____________________________________________________________________3 2. Applied Software___________________________________________________________3 3. Setting Program Options ___________________________________________________4 3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4 Menu Display __________________________________________________________ 4 Compile _______________________________________________________________ 4 Mnemonic Editing______________________________________________________ 6 Modifying Program Option Initial Values(OPTION.CNF) __________________ 6

4. Symbol & Comment Editing _______________________________________________8 5. Conversion of a Mnemonic File to a Source Program ________________________9

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

DRAW.NO. CUST.

B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

2/9

1.

Outline
The following function of FAPT LADDER-II has been added. Improvement of program option setting. This manual is a supplementary manual for these additional functions. Other explanation (existing functions and operation,etc.) are described in the following manual. Name of Manual FAPT LADDER-II OPERATOR'S MANUAL Spec.No. B-66184EN Reference Items Operation for FAPT LADDER-II

2.

Applied Software
The additional functions described here in apply to the following software. Name FAPT LADDER-II Specification A08B-9201-J503 Version 04.4 or later

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

DRAW.NO. CUST.

B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

3/9

3. Setting Program Options

3.1 Menu Display (Changing of Figure 4.5.7 in [ 4.5.7 Setting Program Options ])

Program option set-up

C:\DATA\SAMPLE

Compile Decompile

Mnemonic edit

10

3.2 Compile (Add to since item (4) paragraph of [4.5.7.1 Compile]) (5) sym. ( too long strings ) When you compile the source program which contains the symbol which exceeds six characters. How to treat the input signal and the internal relay address is specified. [ ERROR ] The symbol comment that exceeds six characters in length is considered to be an error, and the compiler is not compiled. (Specification in the past) [ IGNORE] The symbol comment that exceeds six characters in length is replaced with six characters' worth of a space code and compiled.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

DRAW.NO. CUST.

B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

4/9

(6) Coil comment language When you compile the source program. The form by which the coil comment is output to the object file is specified. [ English ] The Japanese coil comment is replaced with space and the compiler is output to the object file. [ Japanese] The Japanese coil comment is converted into the code data and the compiler is output to the object file. (Changing of Figure 4.5.7.1 in [ 4.5.7.1 Compile])

Program option set-up

C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[ Compile ] condense symbol/comment sym.( too long strings ) net comment password multiple used check Coil comment language
2 3 4 5 6

:[OFF/ON] :[NOT USE /USE] :[ERROR/IGNORE] :[NO/POINTERS] :[NO/RW&R/RW/R] :[NO/YES] :[English/Japanese]

7 8 9 10

Note 1) A past "Symbol" item changed the name to "Symbol & coil comment". Note 2) When the parameter of "Symbol/Comment" is assumed "ON", setting the parameter of "sym. ( too long strings )" becomes possible. Note3) Japanese is not displayed on the NC side as for setting the coil comments language, and set "English" mode, please.

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

DRAW.NO. CUST.

B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

5/9

3.3 Mnemonic Editing (Changing of Item 4.5.7.3 in [ 4.5.7.3 Mnemonic Editing]) The thing to choose Mnemonic edit from the menu screen displays the option of a mnemonic edit. (1) Warning detail out The method of outputting the warning when convert from a mnemonic file to the source file is specified. (Warning number K:W-4131, K:W-4133, and K:W-4139) [NO] Conversion from the mnemonic of symbol & comment to the source ends. The generated warning and the frequency are output. [YES] The warning is output in the location where the warning is generated while converting from the mnemonic of symbol & comment to the source. (Specification in the past) Program option set-up
C:\DATA\SAMPLE

[Mnemonic edit] Warning detail out :[ NO/YES ]

10

Fig. 4.5.7.3

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

DRAW.NO. CUST.

B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

6/9

3.4 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION.CNF) (The item number of "4.5.7.3 Modifying Program Option Initial Values (OPTION.CNF)" is changed to "4.5.7.4") (The item number of "Table 4.5.7.3" is changed to "4.5.7.4", and the following option items are added)
Subsection *COMPAILE Option Comment_lang Setting and function 0: The em-size character of the coil comment is replaced with space so far and output to the object file. 1: The em-size character of the coil comment is output to the object file by the code. Symbol_over The address, which includes the symbol that exceeds six characters, is not compiled. 1: Address is compiled after the symbol, which exceeds six characters, is converted into the space code. 0: When conversion into the source ends, the warning is output. 1: Warning is outputs at each warning generation. 0:

*MNEMONIC

Warning_full

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

DRAW.NO. CUST.

B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

7/9

4.Symbol & Comment Editing

Clause (11) of "4.5.2.3 Symbol & Comment editing " is added. (11) Editing screen (Additional content) When the "sym.( too long strings )" option is set to "IGNORE". The display value of the registration number of symbols and the capacity of the coil comment of edit (symbol & comment) screen changes. Example: The symbol of NO.6 from NO.3 by seven characters or more. When assuming that the coil comment is all 30 characters.
Registration number of symbols Capacity of the coil comment

Edit (symbol & comment) SB6 <O> C:\FLADDER\

SYMBOL 000002 000006 COIL_COMMENT 00000060 00000180 NO. ADDRESS SYMBOL RELAY COMMENT COIL COMMENT 000001 000002 000003 000004 000005 000006 * X00000.0 A1234 * X00000.1 A12345 X00000.2 A123456 Y00000.3 A1234567 Y00000.4 A12345678 Y00000.5 A123456789 AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA AAAAAAAAA..AAAAAAA

(1) When setting the option "sym.( too long strings )"is made "ERROR". Display at : SYMBOL 000002 000006 COIL_COMMENT 00000060 00000180 (2) When setting the option "sym.( too long strings )"is made "IGNORE". Display at : SYMBOL 000002 000006 COIL_COMMENT 00000180 00000180

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

DRAW.NO. CUST.

B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

8/9

5. Conversion of a source Program to a Mnemonic File

"4.5.8.2 Conversion of a source Program to a Mnemonic File " Notes are added to the clause.

Notes: When the coil comment which includes the alphabetic small letter of normal-width made in the form of format A or B converts a mnemonic file into the source program, an alphabetic small letter is replaced with the capital letter.

6. Warning
Addition to the item of 5.9.3 Warning of "5. ERROR MESSAGE LIST".

Number I:W-4503

Message $ : The character * in the comment may not be displayed on the CNC. $ : Double-sized space character in comment was changed to two singlesized spaces. Too long strings for symbol data.

Contents Because the character of no character code in CNC is used to comment, the character might not be able to be displayed. Because the em-size space code was used to comment, the em-size space code is replaced with the normal-width space code (two characters). Because the symbol data exceeded the limitation of the number of characters, the symbol is deleted. (Comment is effective)

I:W-4504

I:W-4505

TITLE

FAPT LADDER-II SUPPLEMENTARY OPERATORS MANUAL

DRAW.NO. CUST.

B-66184EN/02-8
SHEET

EDIT

DATE

DESIG.

DESCRIPTION

9/9